Блог

atyaya “aty-aya” m. (fr. “i” with “ati” see “atī”), passing, lapse, passage

m. passing away, perishing, death

m. danger, risk, evil, suffering

m. transgression, guilt, vice

m. getting at, attacking

m. overcoming, mastering (mentally)

m. a class

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

atyaya , atyayika &c. See under atī.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

atyaya (von i mit ati) m. 1) “Vorübergang, das Verstreichen” (atikrama)

P. 2, 1, 6. AK. 3, 4, 152. H. an. 3, 476. MED. j. 66. toyadātyaya R. 2, 72,

19. kālātyaya M. 8, 145. R. 1, 2, 8. 69, 5. 4, 61, 50. 5, 92, 17. himātyaya

1, 11, 21. 2, 24, 8. ātapātyaya RAGH. 1, 52. — 2) “das zu-Grunde-Gehen,

das auf-den-Lauf-Gehen, das in-Gefahr-Gerathen”: jīvitātyayamāpannaḥ

“der in Gefahr ist das Leben zu verlieren” M. 10, 104. prāṇānāmatyaye

“wenn das Leben in Gefahr ist” 5, 27. = prāṇātyaye YĀJÑ. 1, 179.

śarīrasyātyaye M. 8, 69 (KULL. = śarīropaghāte). 6, 68 (KULL. = śarīrasya

pīḍāyām). putradārātyayaṁ prāptaḥ (KULL. =

kṣudavasannaputrakalatraḥ) 10, 99. neyamatyayamāpnuyāt SUŚR. 1, 370,

8. “Tod” AK. 2, 8, 2, 84. H. 323. an. 3, 476. MED. j. 66. — 3) = kṛcchra

AK. 3, 4, 152. H. an. MED. “Leiden, Beschwerden”: pānātyaya “in Folge

des Genusses geistiger Getränke” SUŚR. 2, 477, 2. 478, 13. u. s. w.

alpātyaya “geringe Leiden verursachend” 1, 353, 14. 2, 189, 17. niratyaya

“keine Leiden verursachend” 1, 353, 14. — 4) “Versehen, Vergehen”

(doṣa) AK. 3, 4, 152. H. an. MED. kṣetrikasyātyaye M. 8, 243. dāpyo

‘ṣṭaguṇamatyayam “ist zu strafen mit dem achtfachen Vergehen” 400

(aus dieser oder einer ähnlichen Stelle mag die Bedeutung “Strafe” AK. 3,

4, 152. H. an. 3, 476. MED. j. 66. geschlossen worden sein).

atyayamatyayato deśaya “bekenne die Sünde der Sünde wegen” (buddh.)

BURN. Intr. I, 299. — 5) “das Ueberschreiten”: kṣurasya dhārā niśitā

duratyayā KAṬHOP. 3, 14. — 6) “Angriff” YĀJÑ. 2, 12. — 7) “das

Ergründen”: buddhiśca te lokairapi duratyayā R. 3, 71, 15. — 8) “Art” (?):

nānātyayānāṁ vṛkṣāṇām “verschiedenartiger Bäume” CHĀND. UP. 6, 9, 1.

bahava ime ‘sminpuruṣe kāmā nānātyayāḥ 4, 10, 3.

atyaya “das Hinübergehen”: anatyaya ŚAT. BR. 13, 8, 4, 1. 2. – Z. 18 lies

atyayamatyayato. — Vgl. duratyaya, niratyaya, mahātyaya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

atyaya atyaya, i. e. ati-i + a, m.

1. Passing away, lapse (of time), Man. 8, 145.

2. Death.

3. Danger, Man. 5, 27.

4. Transgression, crime, fault, Man. 8, 243; dāpyo ‘ṣṭaguṇam

atyayam, ‘he shall be fined eight times the amount of the defraudation,’

Man. 8, 400.

— Comp. an-, adj. imperishable. kāla-, m. lapse of time, Man. 8, 145.

jala-, m. the end of the rainy season, i. e. autumn. tapa-, m. 1. the end of

the hot season, i. e. the rainy season. 2. the end of the heat, i. e. sunset,

Śāk. d. 60. duratyaya, i. e. dus-, adj., f. yā, 1. hard to be crossed (as a

river), MBh. 4, 1970. 2. hard to be attained, 13, 4880. 3. unfathomable,

Rām. 3, 71, 15. niratyaya, i. e. nis-, adj., f. yā, 1. free from danger. 2.

infallible. mahā-, 1. m. great pain, Chr. 11, 15. 2. adj. very pernicious,

Chr. 22, 22. su-mahā-, adj. very dangerous, Chr. 37, 3.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

atyaya m. going beyond, passing-away; transgression, offence, sin;

distress, pain, danger; end, death.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

atyaya ati+aya, m. passing away, lapse; end; risk, jeopardy, danger;

fault, transgression.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

atyaya pu° ati + iṇa–ac . atikrame, abhāve, vināśe, doṣe, kṛcchre,

atikramya gamane, kāryasyāvaśyambhāvābhāve ca . prāṇātyaye ca

saṁprāpte yo’nnamatti yatastataḥ . na sa pāpena lipyeta

padmapatramivāmbhaseti smṛtiḥ . kṣurasya dhārā niśitā duratyayeti

purā° atyayaṁ kālātikramaṁ na sahate ṭhak ātyayikaḥ . vilambākṣame

kārye tri° . ātyayikeṣu kāryeṣu sadya evādhivāsayediti purāṇam .

superior.

apara mf (“ā”) n. (fr. “apa”), posterior, later, latter (opposed to “pūrva”;

often in comp.)

mf (“ā”) n. following

mf (“ā”) n. western

mf (“ā”) n. inferior, lower (opposed to “para”)

mf (“ā”) n. other, another (opposed to “sva”)

mf (“ā”) n. different (with abl.)

mf (“ā”) n. being in the west of

mf (“ā”) n. distant, opposite. Sometimes “apara” is used as a

conjunction to connect words or sentences e.g. “aparaṁ-ca”, moreover

apara m. the hind foot of an elephant

apara mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. the west

apara m. the hind quarter of an elephant

apara m. the womb

apara mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. (used in the pl.) or (“am”) ([ vi, 33, 5]) n. the

future

apara m. (“aparam” [] or “aparam” [) ind. in future, for the future

apara mf (“ā”) n. (“aparam”) ind. again, moreover

apara m. in the west of (abl.)

apara mf (“ā”) n. (“eṇa”) ind. (with acc.) behind, west, to the west of

([cf. Goth. and Old Germ. ‘afar’, and the Mod. Germ. ‘aber’, in such words

as ‘Aber-mal’, ‘Aber-witz’]).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

apara a. (treated as a pronoun in some senses)

(1) Having nothing higher or superior, unrivalled, matchless; without a

rival or second (nāsti paro yasmāt); strīratnasṛṣṭiraparā pratibhāti sāme

S. 2. 9; cf. anuttama, anuttara.

(2) [na pṛṇāti saṁtoṣayati pṝ-ac]

(a) Another, other (used as adj. or subst.).

(b) More, additional; Ms. 11. 5.

(c) Second, another Pt. 4. 37; khaṁ keśavo’para ivākramituṁ

pravṛttaḥ Mk. 5. 2 like another (rival) Keśava.

(d) Different; other; anye kṛtayuge dharmāstretāyāṁ dvāpare’pare

Ms. 1. 85; Ks. 26. 235; Pt. 4. 6 (with gen).

(e) Ordinay, of the middle sort (madhyama); paritaptopyaparaḥ

susaṁvṛtiḥ Śi. 16. 23.

(3) Belonging to another, not one’s own (opp. sva); yadi

svāścāparāścaiva viṁderan yoṣito dvijāḥ Ms. 9. 85 of another caste.

(4) Hinder, posterior, latter, later, (in time or space) (opp. pūrva); the

last; pūrvāsaṁdhyāṁ japaṁstiṣṭhetsvakāle cāparāṁ ciraṁ Ms. 4. 93;

rātreraparaḥ kālaḥ Nir.; oft. used as first member of a genitive

Tatpurusha comp. meaning ‘the hind part,’ ‘latter part or half’; -pakṣaḥ

the latter half of a month; -hemaṁtaḥ latter half of winter; -kāyaḥ hind

part of the body &c.; -varṣā -śarad latter part of the rains, autumn &c.

(5) Following, the next.

(6) Western; payasi prapitsuraparāṁbunidheḥ Śi. 9. 1, Ku. 1. 1; Mu. 4.

21.

(7) Inferior, lower (nikṛṣṭaḥ); apareyamitastvanyāṁ prakṛtiṁ viddhi

me parāṁ Bg. 7. 5.

(8) (In Nyāya) Nonextensive, not covering too much, one of the two

kinds of sāmānya, see Bhaṣa P. 8. (paraṁ = adhikavṛtti) higher, aparaṁ

= nyūnavṛtti lower, or adhikadeśavṛttitvaṁ paraṁ, alpadeśavṛttitvaṁ

aparaṁ Muktā.

(9) Distant; opposite. When apara is used in the singular as a

correlative to eka the one, former, it means the other, the latter; eko

yayau caitrarathapradeśān saurājyaramyānaparo vidarbhān R. 5. 60;

when used in pl. it means ‘others’, ‘and others’, and the words generally

used as its correlatives are eke, kecit -kāścit &c., apare, anye;

kecidraktapaṭīkṛtāśca jāṭilāḥ kāpālikāścāpare Pt. 4. 34; eke

samūhurbalareṇusaṁhatiṁ śirobhirājñāmapare mahībhṛtaḥ Śi. 12. 45

some-others; śākhinaḥ kecidadhyaṣṭhurnyamāṁkṣurapareṁbudhau . anye

tvalaṁghiṣuḥ śailān guhāsknye nyelaṣata .. kecidāsiṣata stabdhā

bhayātkecidaghūrṇiṣuḥ . udatāriṣuraṁbhodhiṁ vānarāḥ setunāpare Bk.

15. 3133. –raḥ

(1) The hind foot of an elephant; baddhāparāṇi parito nigaḍānyalāvīt

Śi. 5. 48 (Malli. caramapādāgrāṇi).

(2) An enemy (na pṛṇāti saṁtoṣayāti). –rā

(1) Western direction, the west.

(2) The hind part of an elephant.

(3) Sacred learning, learning the four Vedas with the 6 Angas.

(4) The womb; the outer skin of the embryo.

(5) Suppressed menstruation in pregnancy. –rī Ved. The future, future

times; atāparībhyomaghavā vijigye Rv. 1. 32. 13. –raṁ

(1) The future, any thing to be done in future (kārya);

tadetadbrahmāpūrvamaparamanaṁtaṁ Bṛ. Ār. Up. (nāsti aparaṁ kāryaṁ

yasya).

(2) The hind quarter of an elephant. –raṁ adv. Again, moreover, in

future, for the future; aparaṁca moreover; apareṇa behind, west of, to

the west of (with gen. or acc.). [cf. Goth. afar; Germ. aber, as in

aberglauben].

— Comp.

–agni (agnī dual) 1. the southern and western fires (dakṣiṇa and

gārhapatya). –2. the last fire i. e. used at the funeral ceremony (-gniḥ).

–aṁgaṁ one of the 8 divisions of guṇībhūtavyaṁgya (the second kind of

kāvya) mentioned in K. P. 5. In this the vyaṁgya or suggested sense is

subordinate to something else; agūḍhamaparasyāṁgaṁ; aparasya

rasādervācyasya vā (vākyārthībhūtasya) aṁgaṁ rasādi anuraṇanarūpaṁ

vā; e. g. ayaṁ sa rasanotkarṣī pīnastanavimardanaḥ .

nābhyūrujaghanasparśī nīvivisraṁsanaḥ karaḥ, where śṛṁgāra is

subordinate to karuṇa. –aṁta a. living at the western borders. (

–taḥ) 1. the western border or extremity, the extreme end or

term; the western shore. –2. (pl.) the country or inhabitants of the

western-borders near the Sahya mountain; aparāṁtajayodyataiḥ

(anīkaiḥ) R. 4. 53 western people. –3. the kings of this country. –4.

death, -jñānaṁ anticipation of one’s end. –5. the hind foot of an

elephant; mṛducaladaparāṁtodīritāṁdūninādaṁ Śi. 11. 7; 18. 32.

–aṁtakaḥ 1. = -aṁtaḥ pl. –2. N. of a song; Y. 3. 113; -aṁtikā N.

of a metre consisting of 64 mātrās.

–aparāḥ, -re, -rāṇi another and another, several, various.

–ardhaṁ the latter or second half.

–ahṇaḥ [fr. ahan changed to ahna, P. II. 4. 29, V. 4. 88] the latter

part of the day, the afternoon, closing or last watch of the day; Ms. 3.

278; Śi. 9. 4; -tana, -hnetana belonging to this time; -kṛtaṁ P. II. 1. 45.

–itarā the east.

–kānyakubja a. situated in or belonging to the western part of

Kanyakubja.

–kālaḥ later period.

–godānaṁ (also goḍani or goḍāni) N. of a country to the west of

Mahameru (according to Buddhistic ideas).

–ja a. born later or at the end of the world. (

–jaḥ) the destroying fire.

–janaḥ an inhabitant of the west, the western people.

–dakṣiṇaṁ ind. in the south-west (belonging to the tiṣṭhadru

class).

–pakṣaḥ 1. the second or dark half of the month. –2. the other or

opposite side; a defendant (in law).

–paṁcālāḥ the western Panchālas.

–para a. one and the other, several, various; aparaparāḥ sārthāḥ

gacchaṁti P. VI. 1. 144 Sk. several caravans go; (apare ca pare ca

sakṛdeva gacchaṁti). –pāṇinīyāḥ the pupils of Paṇini living in the west.

–praṇeya a. easily led or influenced by others, docile, tractable.

–bhāvaḥ 1. being another or different, difference. –2. succession,

continuation.

–rātraḥ [aparaṁ rātreḥ] the latter or closing part of night, the last

watch of night (P. V. 4. 87); -kṛtaṁ P. II. 1. 45.

–lokaḥ the other world, the next world, Paradise.

–vaktrā, –ktraṁ N. of a metre.

–vairāgyaṁ a kind of Vairāgya mentioned by Patanjali

(dṛṣṭānuśrāvikaviṣayavitṛṣṇasya vaśīkārasaṁjñaṁ vairāgyaṁ). –sakthaṁ

the hind thigh.

–svastikaṁ the western point in the horizon.

–haimana a. belonging to the latter half of winter (P. VII. 3. 11).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

apara (von 1. apa) 1) pron. adj. f. ā gaṇa sarvādi; VOP. 3, 9. Declin. P. 1,

1, 34. 7, 1, 16. VOP. 3, 12. 37. a) “der hintere, der spätere” (Gegens.

pūrva): antarā pūrvamaparaṁ ca ketum ṚV. 10, 139, 2. parā pūrveṣāṁ

sakhyā vṛṇakti vitarturāṇo aparebhireti 6, 47, 17. na mṛṣyate prathamaṁ

nāparaṁ vacaḥ 1, 145, 2. ākṣitpūrvāsvaparā anūrut 3, 55, 5. 1, 31, 4. 74,

8. 120, 2. 6, 47, 15. 7, 6, 3. 10, 18, 5. 27, 7. 44, 7. ŚAT. BR. 7, 1, 1, 27. 8,

4, 4, 9. 10, 3, 5, 2. NIR. 1, 13. aparakūvarī KĀTY. ŚR. 12, 4, 12.

aparapakṣa “die zweite Hälfte des Monats” ŚAT. BR. 6, 7, 4, 7. Gegens.

pūrvapakṣa 14, 6, 1, 7. (= BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 1, 5). NIR. 5, 11. 11, 6. M. 3,

278. (aparaḥ pakṣaḥ geht voran) und apūryamāṇapakṣa CHĀND. UP. 5,

10, 3. pūrvaṁ kūlam ist “das diesseitige Ufer”, aparaṁ kūlam “das

jenseitige”, BṚH. ĀR. UP. 4, 3, 18. aparā saṁdhyā “Abendröthe”, pūrvā

saṁdhyā “Morgenröthe”, M. 4, 93. rātreraparaḥ kālaḥ NIR. 2, 18. Gegens.

para BHAG. 4, 4: aparaṁ bhavato janma paraṁ janma vivasvataḥ. Häufig

am Anfange eines comp. P. 2, 1, 58. 2, 1. Vgl. pūrvāpara. — b) “der

folgende”: apare ‘hni “am folgenden Tage” R. 2, 65, 1. — c) “westlich”

(Gegens. pūrva “östlich)”: pūrve samudre – apare samudre ŚAT. BR. 10,

6, 4, 1. (= BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 1, 2.) ŚĀK. 99, 15. aparānapi śālvādīn R. 4,

43, 23. Häufig mit einem Volksn. compon.: aparacīnān R. 4, 44, 14. u. s.

w. Vgl. apareṇa. — d) “nachstehend, geringer, niedriger” (Gegens. para,

mit Anklang an eine falsche Etymologie vermittelst des neg. a):

yasmātparaṁ nāparamasti kiṁcit ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 3, 9. paraṁ cāparaṁ ca

brahma PRAŚNOP. 5, 2. parā caivāparā ca (vidyā) MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 1, 4. 5.

apareyamitastvanyāṁ prakṛtiṁ viddhi me parām BHAG. 7, 5.

paramaparaṁ ceti dvividhaṁ sāmānyam ZdmG.VI, 13, N. 4. BHĀṢĀP. 7.

9. (RÖER übers. para durch “extensive”, apara durch “non-extensive”). —

e) “ein anderer” (itara) MED. r. 105. svāyaṁbhuvasya manoḥ ṣaḍvaṁśyā

manavo ‘pare M. 1, 61. pañcāparāḥ 7, 157. HIḌ. 2, 32. N. 12, 75. R. 3, 3,

12. 15, 26. u. s. w. sā cāparakārye preṣitā VET. 9, 4. mit dem abl.: nāto

‘paraḥ kaścana saha śarīreṇāmṛto ‘sat ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 3, 9. īdṛśaṁ karma

tvattaḥ kurvīta ko ‘paraḥ R. 6, 84, 29. tannāstyupāyo

vetālasādhanādaparo ‘tra me KATHĀS. 26, 235. mit dem gen.: tatte

dhūrta hṛdi sthitā priyatamā kācinmamaivāparā PAÑCAT. IV, 7. — “der

andere”: aparāḥ – kanyāḥ “die übrigen” R. 3, 20, 11. tato ‘pare M. 9, 123.

daśāpare 165. — “verschieden”: bimbādivoddhṛtau vimbau

rāmadehāttathāparau (“zwei verschiedene”) R. 1, 4, 12. —

“entgegengesetzt” (arvācīna) MED. r. 105. — “ein anderer, ein zweiter”:

namaste ‘stu yājñavalkya yo ma etaṁ (sc. praśnaṁ) vyavaco ‘parasmai

dhārayasva BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 8, 5. vasāparāṇi (“weitere”) dvātriṁśataṁ

varṣāṇi CHĀND. UP. 8, 9, 3. ŚAT. BR. 11, 1, 2, 11. kṛtadāro

‘parāndārānbhikṣitvā yo ‘dhigacchati M. 11, 5. nakṣatramālāmaparām

VIŚV.10, 21. saptarṣīnaparān 20. Häufig bei Vergleichungen:

strīratnasṛṣṭiraparā pratibhāti me ŚĀK. 42. dharma ivāparaḥ R. 1, 1, 19.

indra ivāparaḥ 3, 21, 31. VIŚV. 1, 10. 6, 2. 19. 10, 20. PAÑCAT. IV, 39.

KATHĀS. 4, 7. — “ein anderer, ein fremder” (Gegens. sva): aparapuruṣāḥ

“andere, fremde Leute” (gegenüber den samāneṣu) ŚAT. BR. 10, 3, 5, 11.

yadi svāścāparāścaiva (“aus der eigenen oder aus einer fremden Kaste”)

vinderanyoṣito dvijāḥ M. 9, 85. — Bisweilen bloss anreihend: hlādinī

yāvanī caiva nalinī ca tathāparā “und ferner die” Nalinī R. 1, 44, 14.

gāyanaiśca virāgiṇyo vādanaiśca tathāparaiḥ 19, 12. 3, 34, 32. — apare

‘parān “einer den andern”: pātayantyapare ‘parān R. 5, 73, 37. eka – –

apara “der eine – der andere” R. 1, 39, 8. AMAR. 16. ŚUKAS. 39, 15. H.

1230 eke – apare “Einige – Andere” P. 7, 2, 45, Sch. = kecit – apare M. 9,

32. = kecit – kecidapare (“einige Andere”) BRĀHMAṆ. 1, 31. Bei

mehrfacher Gliederung: eke – eke – apare M. 4, 22–24. kecit – tathāpare –

ca – tathāpare 3, 134. aparāḥ – aparāḥ – aparāḥ – anyāḥ R. 5, 13, 55. anye

— (fehlt) — apare – anye M. 1, 85. eke – anye – eke – apare – apare 12,

123; vgl. noch N. 12, 87. R. 1, 4, 18–22. 5, 13, 35. 38. 40, 13. fgg. und

den Artikel anya. Während anya nicht selten am Anf. eines comp. in

substantivischer Bedeutung auftritt (z. B. in anyamanas “dessen Sinn auf

Jmd anders gerichtet ist”), steht apara mit einem folgenden subst. stets

in einem Congruenzverhältniss. — 2) m. “Hinterfuss des Elephanten”

VAIJ. beim Sch. zu ŚIŚ. 5, 48. und zu KIR. 7, 37. — 3) f. aparā. a)

“Westen” H. 167. — b) “Hintertheil des Elephanten” H. 1228. — c)

“Uterus” MED. r. 105. — 3) f. aparī (a- P. 4, 1, 30.) pl. “künftige Zeiten,

Zukunft”: utāparīṣu kṛṇute sakhāyam “für die Zukunft gewinnt er einen

Freund” ṚV. 10, 117, 3. utāparībhyo maghavā vi jigye 1, 32, 13. o te yanti

ye aparīṣu paśyān 113, 11. ahaṁ prajā ajanayaṁ pṛthivyāmahaṁ

janibhyo aparīṣu putrān 10, 183, 3. kaṁ svidevāparīṣu

mahānāgamivābhisaṁsāraṁ didṛkṣitāro ya evametatprayājānāṁ yaśo

veditā ŚAT. BR. 11, 2, 7, 12. — 4) n. a) “Zukunft”: nūnaṁ na indrāparāya

ca syāḥ ṚV. 6, 33, 5. Vgl. aparī und aparam. — b) “Hintertheil des

Elephanten” MED. r. 105. H. 1228, Sch.; vgl. aparā. “b.” — Vgl. avara.

apara 1) c) diś MBH. 6, 4801. ambunidhi ŚIŚ. 9, 1. aparāmbhodhi

KATHĀS. 73, 329. — e) bhavantyaśucayaḥ sparśena yasyāpare d. i. “rein”

Spr. 3020. mahīyāneva nāparaḥ d. i. “ein Geringer” 4925.

apara 1) e) kimaparam “was Anderes?” Spr. (II) 6117. so v. a. “was thut

es zur Sache? gleichviel” 18. 6004 (anders in der Uebersetzung). — 3) c)

“Nachgeburt” CARAKA 4, 8. SUŚR. 1, 328, 10. 2, 217, 6. avarā v. l.; vgl.

amarā.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

apara

I. apa + ra, adj., f. rā.

1. Posterior, Man. 3, 278; with sandhyā, Evening-twilight, Man. 4, 93.

2. Following, Rām. 2, 65, 1.

3. Western, Śiś. 9, 1.

4. Other, Pañc. 55, 13. -acc. ram, adv. Moreover, Pañc. 71, 1.

II. a-para, adj.

1. Inferior, Bhag. 7, 5.

2. Relative, Bhāṣāp. 7; 9.

3. Modern, Man. 9, 99.

— Comp. pūrva-,

I. adj. 1. being before and behind. 2. prior and subsequent.

II. n. sing. 1. east and west. 2. connexion, Man. 8, 56 (Proof, and thing to

be proved, Ragh.).

— Cf. Goth. afar, after, N.H.G. aber.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

apara [1] a. hinder, farther, later, inferior, posterior, western; following

(in sp. & t.); different from, another than (abl. or gen.), foreign (opp.

sva), particular, strange, extraordinary. m. apara hind-foot of an

elephant. n. aparam adv. in future (also aparam); further, moreover

(±ca); west of (abl.). apareṇa behind, west of (acc.).

apara [2] n. -rī f. the future.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

apara 1. apa-ra, a. hinder, further; later, following; western; to the west

of (ab.); inferior; other; different form (ab.); opposite; strange, unusual:

-m, ad. subsequently, in the future, after; moreover, besides; to the west

of (ab.); m. elephant’s hind foot.

apara 2. apa-ra, n. future;

-kārya, n. later transaction.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

apara na° na pūryate yataḥ pṛ–apādāne, ap . gajasya paścādbhāge .

baddhāparāṇi parito nigaḍānyalāvoditi māghaḥ . parito baddhaḥ aparaḥ

paścimagrādoyairiti malli° . na pṛṇāti santoṣayati pṛ–ac . śatrau, bhinne

tri° . anye kṛtayuge dharmāstretāyāṁ dvāpare’pare iti manuḥ tamā

samudrādapare pare nṛpāḥ naiṣa° paścimāyāṁ diśi strī aparadiggaṇiketi

māghaḥ parakālavṛttau tri° . pūrbāṁ sandhyāṁ japan tiṣṭhet svakāle

cāparāṁ ciramiti manuḥ . paścādvṛttau tri° pūrbāparau toyanidhī vagāhya

kumā° . ṛgvedādividyāyāṁ strī . dvevidye viditavye iti hasma brahmavido

vadanti parā caivāparā ca tatrāparā ṛgvedo yajurvedaḥ

sāmavedo’tharvavedaḥ śikṣā kalpo vyākaraṇaṁ niruktaṁ chando

jyotiṣamiti ṛ° bhā° dhṛnā śrutiḥ . asya ca kāladeśādiniyame

sarvanāmakāryam . tatra pūrbādibhyo navabhyo vā iti pā° vā tatkarma .

aparatvañca daiśikaṁ kālikaṁ ca dvividhaṁ, tatra svāpekṣayā

udayācalaviprakṛṣṭatvam daiśikamaparatvam

svāpekṣayādhikasūryaspandanavattvaṁ kālikam . uktodāhṛtau daiśikam

kālikantu . aparaṁ bhavato janma paraṁ janma vivasvata iti gītā .

alpadeśavṛttirūpe vyāpye tri° sāmānyaṁ dvividhaṁ proktaṁ

parañcāparameva ca . vyāpakatvāt parāpi syāt vyāpyatvādaparāpi ca

bhāṣā° . dravyatvādeḥ ghaṭatvādyapekṣayā adhikadeśavṛttitvāt paratvaṁ

sattāpekṣayāalpadeśavṛttitvāt aparatvamiti muktā° . dravyatvādika

jātistu parāparatayocyate iti bhāṣā° . svāyambhuvasya ca mano

ṣaḍvaṁśyā manavo’pare iti aparakālikā bhinnā vā ityarthaḥ . nikṛṣṭe .

bhūmirāpo’nalo vāyuḥ svaṁ manobuddhireva ca ahaṅkāra itīyaṁ me

bhinnā prakṛtiraṣṭadhā aparevamitastvanyāṁ prakṛtiṁ viddhi me parāmiti

gītā . tatra bhūmyādīnāmitarapadārthyakṛtitve’pi jaḍatvāt saṁhatya

kāritvāt svayamasamarthatvena jīvasya bhogādyarthameva

pravṛttimattvācca nikṛṣṭatvam . jīvasya tu tadapekṣayā paratvam ..

uttarakālikatvāt taddhikāralakṣaṇe kārye

tadetadbrahmā’pūrbamanaparamanantamiti vṛha° upa° . nāsti aparaṁ

kāryaṁ yasyeti bhā° . vastutaḥ svarūpapracyavābhāvena kūṭasthasya na

kāryakāritvamata eva na kartṛtvaṁ na karmāṇi lokasya sṛjati prabhuḥ

ajñānenāvṛtaṁ jñānaṁ tena muhyanti jantava iti gītāyām

tasyākartṛtvamuktaṁ kartṛtvantu ajñānopahiteśvarasyeti na virodhaḥ .

samudāyinaḥ śeṣabhāge apararātraḥ aparāhṇaḥ ekadeśi sa° . asya

pūrbapadasthasya paścādeśaḥ paścārdham na° śeṣārdhe . aparasmin

bhavaḥ ḍimac paścimaḥ śeṣabhave . prathamāpañcamyādideśakālavṛtte

raparaśabdāt prathamādyarthe ati . paścāt . adhikamadhaḥśabde dṛśyam

. asya digvācakatvāt tena samāse deśavācinaḥ ṇidādi taddhite

uttarapadasyaiva vṛddhiḥ aparapāñcālaka ityādi .

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

āśvinacihnita (1. ā- + ci-) n. “Herbst-Aequinoctium” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.

u. jalaviṣuva.

the autumn.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

upaśaradam (von upa + śarad) adv. “zur Herbstzeit” P. 5, 4, 107, Sch.

VOP. 6, 62.

any action (esp. for sacrifices and other regular worship), right or fit time

m. an epoch, period (esp. a division or part of the year), season (the

number of the divisions of the year is in ancient times, three, five, six,

seven, twelve, thirteen, and twenty-four; in later time six seasons are

enumerated, viz. Vasanta, “spring”; Grīṣma, “the hot season”; Varṣās (f.

nom. pl.), “the rainy season” , “autumn”; Hemanta, “winter”; and śiśira,

“the cool season”; the seasons are not unfrequently personified,

addressed in Mantras, and worshipped by libations) &c. &c.

m. symbolical expression for the number six &c.

m. the menstrual discharge (in women), the time after the courses

(favourable for procreation; according to sixteen days after their

appearance) &c.

m. sexual union at the above time

m. fixed order, order, rule ([])

m. light, splendour

m. a particular mineral

m. N. of a ṛiṣi

m. of the twelfth Manu.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ṛtu (desselben Ursprungs wie ṛta) m. Uṇ. 1, 71. 1) “bestimmte Zeit,

Zeitpunkt, zugemessene Zeit”: prārannṛtūṁranu “zu ihren Zeiten, ein

Jedes zu seiner Zeit” ṚV. 1, 49, 3. srucā yajātā ṛtubhirdhruvebhiḥ 84, 18.

ṛturjanitrī (ṛturjanitrīya n. “das mit” ṛrtujanitrī “beginnende” Sūkta

ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 11, 14, 10. 22) “die Zeit (eine bestimmte) ist seine Mutter”

2, 13, 1. mā mātrā śāryapasaḥ pura ṛtoḥ “vor der Zeit” 28, 5. ṛtūṁranyo

vidadhajjāyate punaḥ (der Mond) 10, 85, 18. Namentlich von den

Zeitpunkten des Opfers und anderer regelmässiger Verehrung: veda me

deva ṛtupā ṛtūnām 5, 12, 3. ṛtuṁ naro na pra minantyete 7, 103, 9.

viśvāṁ ṛtunā vaso maha uśandevāṁ uśataḥ pāyaya haviḥ 2, 37, 6. 38, 4.

sa yajñiyo yajatu yajñiyāṁ ṛtūn 10, 11, 1. vidvāṁ ṛtūṁ ṛtupate yajeha 2,

1. 3. 1, 95, 3. AV. 11, 1, 4. Häufig im instr., namentlich pl.: “zu seiner

Zeit, in den rechten Zeiten, zur Opfer – oder Festzeit”; so z. B. ṚV. 1, 15,

1. fgg., wo die Commentatoren eine Personification ganz unpassend

annehmen, wie schon aus dem Wechsel von ṛtunā, ṛtubhiḥ, ṛtūṁranu

hervorgeht; desgleichen 2, 37, 1. fgg. und ähnlich an vielen andern

Stellen. āgandeva ṛtubhirvardhatu kṣayam ṚV. 4, 53, 7. tvamutsāṁ

ṛtubhirbadbadhānāṁ araṁha ūdhaḥ parvatasya 5, 32, 2. (devāḥ)

ṛtubhirhavanaśrutaḥ 6, 52, 10. ṛtubhirṛtupā pāhi somamindra 3, 47, 3.

ṛtubhirṛbhavo mādayadhvam 4, 34, 2. 9, 66, 9. 10, 7, 6.

prāśnantyṛtubhirniṣadya AV. 12, 3, 32. 3, 8, 1. VS. 18, 33. 12, 61. — 2)

“Zeitabschnitt”, insbes. “Jahresabschnitt, Jahreszeit.” Die gewöhnlich

angenommene Zahl der Jahreszeiten ist “fünf”, nämlich Vasanta, Grīṣma,

Varṣā pl., Śarad, Hemanta – Śiśira (so VS. 10, 10. fgg. AV. 8, 9, 15. 13, 1,

18. ŚAT. BR. 1, 3, 5, 11. 6, 2, 2, 3. 11, 1, 1, 26 u.s.w. TS. 4, 3, 3, 1. 2. 5,

3, 1, 2. pañcartavo hemantaśiśirayoḥ samāsena AIT. BR. 1, 1. auch

Varṣā-Śarad werden zusammengef. statt Hemanta-Śiśira ŚAT. BR. 13, 6,

1, 10. 11. mit Weglassung von Śiśira CHĀND. UP. 2, 5, 1), oder “sechs”,

mit Scheidung der beiden letzten, VS. 21, 23. fgg. AV. 12, 1, 36. ŚAT. BR.

1, 7, 2, 21. 2, 4, 2, 24. TS. 5, 1, 5, 2. pañca vā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsarasya,

yadyu ṣaḍevartavaḥ ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 5, 12. 8, 5, 1, 14. 21. 22. AK. 1, 1, 3,

12. H. 155. an. 2, 160. MED. t. 6. MBH. 3, 10663. R. 1, 19, 1. 2, 25, 9.

tatra māghādayo dvādaśa māsā dvimāsikamṛtuṁ kṛtvā ṣaḍṛtavo bhavanti.

te śiśiravasantagrīṣmavarṣāśaraddhemantāḥ. SUŚR. 1, 19, 7. 20, 1.

ṣaḍṛtūṁśca namaskuryāt M. 3, 217. Als sechs Männer gedacht, welche

mit goldenen und silbernen Würfeln spielen, MBH. 13, 2368. 2381.

Indessen wird auch die Zahl “sieben” angenommen, sei es durch

Einrechnung des 13ten Monats, sei es als Ausdruck der unbestimmten

Vielheit für “Jahresabschnitte” überhaupt: ahamṛtūṁrajanayaṁ sapta

sākam AV. 6, 61, 2. 8, 9, 18. ŚAT. BR. 8, 5, 1, 15. fgg. 9, 1, 2, 31. 3, 1,

19. 5, 2, 8. oder auch “zwölf”, indem sie mit den “Monaten” gleichgestellt

werden, AV. 11, 6, 22. madhuśca mādhavaśca vāsantikāvṛtū VS. 13, 25.

14, 6. 15. 16. 27. 15, 57. Vgl. Sch. zu P. 4, 3, 19–21. Der Schol. zu

JYOTIS 9 sagt, dass alte Lehrer auch 24 (also “Halbmonate”) und 366

(“Tage”) ṛtu angenommen hätten, LIA. I, 221, N. Endlich werden “drei”

gezählt: trayo vā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsarasya ŚAT. BR. 14, 1, 1, 28. – VS. 27, 1.

AV. 1, 10, 9. 10. 35, 4. 5, 28, 2. 13. 8, 8, 22. 9, 17. TS. 4, 4, 11, 1. yatha

ṛtava ṛtubhiryanti sādhu ṚV. 10, 18, 5. anta ṛtūnāṁ hemantaḥ ŚAT. BR. 1,

5, 3, 13 (die Buddhisten beginnen mit hemanta BURN. Intr. 569). ṛtavaḥ

samiddhāḥ prajāśca prajanayantyoṣadhīśca pacanti 3, 4, 7. 5, 3, 8.

yathartuliṅgānyṛtavaḥ svayamevartuparyaye. svāni svānyabhipadyante

tathā karmāṇi dehinaḥ.. M. 1, 30. ṛtūnāṁ parivartena R. 2, 105, 23.

rāmaśca sītayā sārdhaṁ vijahāra bahūnṛtūn 1, 77, 25. ṛtavaḥ śiśirādayaḥ

MBH. 14, 1213. ṛtūnāṁ kusumākaraḥ (aham) BHAG. 10, 35. ṛtau “zur

entsprechenden Zeit des Jahres” M. 4, 105. ṛtvante 26. ṛtvantāsu ca

rātriṣu 119. yathartupuṣpitā drumāḥ R. 5, 73, 59. tena

hyṛtusamavāyacihnaṁ pratipadyatāṁ latā kusumam ŚĀK. 108, 10.

ṛtupraiṣa AIT. BR. 5, 9. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 7, 8, 2. 10, 7, 8. ṛtupaśu “ein den”

Ṛtu “geweihtes Thier” ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 28. Collectiv im sg. VS. 39, 6.

Vgl. ṛtuthā, ṛtuśas. — 3) “die Regeln der Weiber”, insbes. “die unmittelbar

darauffolgenden, zur Zeugung günstigen Tage” AK. 3, 4, 64. H. 536. an.

2, 160. MED. t. 6. vyantu devīrya ṛturjanīnām ṚV. 5, 46, 8. KĀTY. ŚR. 5,

2, 21. NIR. 12, 46. SUŚR. 1, 316, 2. 318, 16. 18. MBH. 3, 3402. ṛtuḥ

svābhāvikaḥ strīṇāṁ rātrayaḥ ṣoḍaśa u. s. w. M. 3, 46. fgg.

yathāvidhyadhigamyaināṁ śuklavastrāṁ śucivratām. mitho bhajetā

prasavātsakṛtsakṛdṛtāvṛtau.. 9, 70. 4, 128. YĀJÑ. 1, 11. 79. MBH. 1, 4740.

yathāyamaturbandhyo na bhavati tathā kriyatām 750. ṛturmātuḥ

piturvījaṁ daivataṁ paramaṁ patiḥ 14, 2739. yāvatta kanyāmṛtavaḥ

spṛśanti tulyaiḥ sakāmāmapi yācyamānām. tāvanti bhūtāni hatāni

tābhyāṁ mātāpitṛbhyāmiti dharmavādaḥ.. VIṢṆU in DĀY. 272, 17. ṛtuṣu

naivābhigamanam PAÑCAT. Pr. 8. “der Beischlaf selbst zu dieser Zeit”:

pitre na dadyācchulkaṁ tu kanyāmṛtumatīṁ haran. sa hi

svāmyādatikrāmedṛtūnāṁ pratirodhanāt.. M. 9, 93. ṛtuṁ vai yācamānāyā

na dadāti pumānṛtum. bhrūṇahetyucyate brahmansa iha brahmavādibhiḥ..

MBH. 1, 3456. 3455. sā tvāṁ yāce prasādyāhamṛtuṁ dehi narādhipa

3409. — 4) “bestimmte Folge, Ordnung”: ekastvaṣṭuraśvasyā viśastā dvā

yantārā bhavatastatha ṛtuḥ “es giebt einen Schlächter, zwei Haltende, so

auch eine feste Regel” (für das Zerlegen des Opferpferdes) oder: “so ist

die Regel” ṚV. 1, 162, 19. — 5) “Glanz” MED. t. 6. — 6) “eine bes. Art

Kollyrium” (suvīra) VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — 7) N. pr. des 12ten Manu VP. 268,

N. 8. — Vgl. anṛtu.

ṛtu 2) so v. a. “Monat” WEBER, JYOT. 112. Nax. 2, 341. 351.

“Halbmonat”: bahule ‘pyṛtau JYOT. 30. Bez. “der Zahl sechs” VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 77, 24. 98, 1. Ind. St. 8, 167. — 7) N. pr. eines Ṛṣi Ind.

St.3,210,b.

ṛtu 2) als Bez. “der Zahl sechs” SŪRYAS. 1, 31. 37. 12, 88. — 3) die Zeit

wird BHĀVAPR. 2 auf 16 Tage vom Erscheinen der menses an gerechnet.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

ṛtu ṛ + tu, m.

1. Order (ved.).

2. Right time, Chr. 288, 3 = Rigv. i. 49, 3.

3. A season (of the year), Man. 3, 217.

4. The menstrual discharge, MBh. 14, 2739.

5. The season approved for sexual intercourse, Man. 3, 46, sqq.

— Comp. an-, m. wrong season, Man. 4, 104; for sexual intercourse, 5,

153. The aff. tu is a form of tvan and ṛ of ar; the older form would be *

artvan = Lat. ordo, base ordon.

— Cf. [greek] for [greek].

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ṛtu m. right or fixed time, period, epoch, season (mostly reckoned as 6,

but also 5, 7, 12, & 24); the menses of a woman & coition at that time;

fixed order, rule. — ṛtunā & ṛtubhis in time, at the appointed time, esp. for

sacrifice or a festival: pura ṛtos before the (right) time, too early.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ṛtu ṛ-tu, m. fixed time, right time for sacrifice; period, season; the

menses, esp. the days immediately following and suitable for conception;

sexual intercourse at such time; settled sequence; order; rule in. sg. & pl.

at the right time, in due season; lc. at the proper season.

fly with a sting

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kaṇabha m. “Stechfliege”: makṣikākaṇabhajalāyukā

mukhasaṁdaṁśaviṣāḥ SUŚR. 2, 258, 1. 289, 15. Auch kaṇabhaka 287, 19.

— Vgl. kaṇā.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kaṇabha kaṇabha, m. A kind of fly (an autumn fly ?), Suśr. 2, 258, 1.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kaṇabha pu° kaṇa iva bhāti bhā–ka . agniprakṛtike suśrutokte kīṭabhede .

trikaṇṭakaḥ kuṇī cāpi hastikakṣo’parājitaḥ . catvāra ete

kaṇabhāvyākhyātāstīvravedanāḥ suśruḥ . svārthe kan tatrārthe .

kauṇḍilyakaḥ kaṇabhakaḥ ityupakramya ete

hyagniprakṛtayaścaturviṁśatireva ca . vairbhavantīha daṣṭānāṁ rogāḥ

pittanimittajāḥ suśru° .

corresponding to part of October and November (the twelfth month of the

year, when the full moon is near the Pleiades) &c.

m. N. of Skanda (see “kārttikeya”)

m. of a Varsha

m. of a medical author

kārttika m. (“as”, or “am”) mn. N. of the first year in Jupiter’s period of

revolution

kārttika n. N. of a Tīrtha

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kārttika (von kṛttikā “die Plejaden”) 1) m. a) (mit oder ohne māsa) N.

eines Herbstmonats P. 4, 2, 23. “der 12te Monat im Jahre” AK. 1, 1, 3,

17. TRIK. 1, 1, 112. H. 155. HĀR. 151. LĀṬY. 9, 12, 13.

kārttikamārgaśīrṣau śarat SUŚR. 1, 20, 3. MBH. 2, 918. 13, 5161.

PAÑCAT. III, 36. BHĀG. P. 6, 19, 20. — b) patron. von Skanda (s.

kārttikeya) BRAHMAVAIV. P. im ŚKDR. — c) N. eines Varsha: sa ca

kṛttikārohiṇyorekatarasminbṛhaspaterastodayaikatarasaṁbandhe

bhavati.. MALAMĀSAT. im ŚKDR. — 2) f. kārttikī (mit oder ohne rātri)

“der Vollmondstag im Monat” Kārttika, “der Tag an welchem der

Vollmond im Sternbild” Kṛttikā “steht” KĀTY. ŚR. 5, 6, 1. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3,

15, 1. PĀR. GṚHY. 3, 9. atha vivāha ūrdhvaṁ kārttikyā ā vaiśākhyāḥ

KAUŚ. 57. P. 4, 2, 23. MBH. 3, 4073. 4079. 12554. 15, 358. R. 4, 25, 15.

SUŚR. 2, 173, 14. RAGH. 19, 39. -vrata Verz. d. B. H. No. 468.

kārttika 1) a) -māhātmya Verz. d. Oxf. H. 14,b,27. 15,b, No. 59. –

māsamāhātmya 302,a,4. — b) lies metron. st. patron. und vgl. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 26,a,7. fgg. — d) N. pr. eines medic. Autors Verz. d. Oxf. H.

311.b,29. 314,b,6 v. u. — 2) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 69. — 3) m. (sc. abda)

und n. (sc. varṣa) N. “des ersten Jahres in der 12jährigen Umlaufszeit des

Jupiters” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 2. fg. — 4) f. ī “die” Śakti “des” Kārttikeya

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 25,b, N. 5. — 5) n. N. pr. eines Tīrtha Verz. d. Oxf. H.

39,b,24.

kārttika 3) (Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 14, 17.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kārttika kārttika, i. e. kṛttikā + a,

I. m. The name of a month (OctoberNovember), MBh. 2, 918.

II. f. kī, The day of this month on which the moon is full, MBh. 3, 4073.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kārttika m. a cert. month in autumn, also = seq.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kārttika kārttika, m. N. of a month (October-November): ī, f. day of full

moon in Kārttika;

e-ya, m. met. of Skanda, god of war..

kāla m. a black or dark-blue colour

kāla m. the black part of the eye

kāla m. the Indian cuckoo

kāla m. the poisonous serpent Coluber Nāga (= “kālasarpa”)

kāla m. the plant Cassia Sophora

kāla m. a red kind of Plumbago

kāla m. the resin of the plant Shorea robusta

kāla m. the planet Saturn

kāla m. N. of śiva

kāla m. of Rudra

kāla m. of a son of Hrada 189

kāla m. of the prince Kāla-yavana

kāla m. of a brother of king Prasena-jit

kāla m. of a future Buddha

kāla m. of an author of Mantras (= Aśva-ghosha)

kāla m. of a Nāga-rāja

kāla m. of a Rakshas

kāla m. of an enemy of śiva

kāla m. of a mountain

kāla m. of one of the nine treasures

kāla m. a mystical N. of the letter “m”

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ā”) f. N. of several plants (Indigofera tinctoria ; Piper

longum ; (perhaps) Ipomoea atropurpurea ; Nigella indica ; Rubia

Munjista ; Ruellia longifolia ; Physalis flexuosa ; Bignonia suaveolens

kāla m. the fruit of the Kālā g. “harītaky-ādi”

kāla m. N. of a “śakti”

kāla m. of a daughter of Daksha (the mother of the Kāleyas or

Kālakeyas, a family of Asuras)

kāla m. N. of Durgā

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. black colour, ink or blacking

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. abuse, censure, defamation

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a row or succession of black clouds

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. night

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a worm or animalcule generated in the acetous

fermentation of milk (= “kṣīra-kīṭa” or “kṣāra-kīṭa”)

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. the plant Kālāṇjanī

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Ipomoea Turpethum

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a kind of clay

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Bignonia suaveolens

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the seven tongues or flames of fire

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a form of Durgā

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the Mātṛis or divine mothers

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the

Kālakeyas) 11552

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the sixteen Vidyā-devīs

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of Satyavatī, wife of king śāntanu and mother

of Vyāsa or Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana (after her marriage she had a son Vicitra-

vīrya, whose widows were married by Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana, and bore to him

Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu ; according to other legends Kālī is the wife of

Bhīmasena and mother of Sarvagata

kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. (with or without “gaṅgā”) N. of a river

kāla n. a black kind of Agallochum

kāla n. a kind of perfume (“kakkolaka”)

kāla n. iron

kāla m. (3. “kal”, “to calculate or enumerate”), [ifc. f. “ā” , a fixed or

right point of time, a space of time, time (in general) &c.

m. the proper time or season for (gen. dat. loc., in comp., inf., or Pot.

with “yad” e.g. “kālaḥ prasthānasya” or “-nāya” or “-ne”, time for

departure; “kriyā-kāla”, time for action ; “nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum”, this is

not the time to delay ; “kālo yad bhuṇjīta bhavān”, it is time for you to

eat &c.

m. occasion, circumstance

m. season &c.

m. meal-time (twice a day, hence “ubhau kālau”, “in the morning and

in the evening” ; “ṣaṣṭhe kāle”, “in the evening of the third day” ;

“ṣaṣṭhānna-kāla”, “one who eats only at the sixth meal-time, i.e. who

passes five meals without eating and has no meal till the evening of the

third day” ; or without “anna” e.g. “caturtha-kālam”, “at the fourth meal-

time i.e. at the evening of the second day”

m. hour (hence “ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ”, “at the sixth hour of the day, i.e.

at noon”

m. a period of time, time of the world (= “yuga”)

m. measure of time, prosody

m. a section, part

m. the end

m. death by age

m. time (as leading to events, the causes of which are imperceptible

to the mind of man), destiny, fate &c.

m. time (as destroying all things), death, time of death (often

personified and represented with the attributes of Yama, regent of the

dead, or even identified with him: hence “kālam-i” or “kālaṁ-kṛ”, “to die”

&c.; “kāla” in this sense is frequently connected with “antaka, mṛtyu” e.g.

“abhy-adhāvata prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ”, “e attacked the people like Time

the destroyer” ; cf. “kālāntaka; kāla” personified is also a Devarshi in

Indra’s court, and a son of Dhruva

kāla m. (“am”) acc. ind. for a certain time (e.g. “mahāntaṁ kālam”, for a

long time

kāla m. “nitya-k-“, constantly, always

kāla m. “dīrgha-k-“, during a long time

kāla m. (“ena”) instr. ind. in the course of time &c.

m. with “gacchatā” id.

kāla m. “dīrgheṇa kālena”, during a long time

m. after a long time

kāla m. “kālena mahatā” or “bahunā” id.

kāla m. (“āt”) abl. ind. in the course of time

kāla m. “kālasya dīrghasya” or “mahataḥ” id. &c.

kāla m. “kasya-cit kālasya”, after some time

kāla m. (“e”) loc. ind. in time, seasonably (cf. “a-kāle”)

kāla m. “kāle gacchati”, in the course of time

kāla m. “kāle yāte”, after some time

kāla m. “kāle kāle”, always in time

kāla m. ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘calen-doe’: Hib. ‘ceal’, “death and

everything terrible.”])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kāla a. (lī f.)

(1) Black, of a dark or dark-blue colour.

(2) Injuring, hurting. –laḥ

(1) The black or dark-blue colour.

(2) Time (in general); vilaṁbitaphalaiḥ kālaṁ nināya sa manorathaiḥ

R. 1. 33; tasminkāle at that time; kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatāṁ H. 1.

(1) the wise pass their time &c.

(3) Fit or opportune time (to do a thing), proper time or occasion;

(with gen., loc., dat., or inf.); R. 3. 12, 4. 6, 12. 69; parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī

Mk. 10. 60.

(4) A period or portion of time (as the hours or watches of a day);

ṣaṣṭhe kāle divasasya V. 2. 1; Ms. 5. 153.

(5) The weather.

(6) Time considered as one of the nine dravyas by the Vaiśeṣikas.

(7) The Supreme spirit regarded as the destroyer of the universe,

being a personification of the destructive principle; kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake kraḍiti prāṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39.

(8)

(a) Yama, the god of death; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt.

1. 146.

(b) Death, time of death.

(9) Fate, destiny. (10) The black part of the eye.

(11) The (Indian) cuckoo.

(12) The planet Saturn.

(13) N. of Śiva.

(14) A measure of time (in music or prosody).

(15) A person who distils and sells spirituous liquor.

(16) A section, or part

(17) A red kind of plumbago.

(18) Resin, pitch

(19) N. of an enemy of Śiva. (20) (with the Jainas) One of the nine

treasures.

(21) A mystical name for the letter m. –lā

(1) N. of several plants.

(2) N. of a daughter of Daksha.

(3) An epithet of Durgā. –lī

(1) Blackness.

(2) Ink, black ink.

(3) An epithet of Pārvatī, Śiva’s wife.

(4) A row of black clouds.

(5) A woman with a dark complexion.

(6) N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa.

(7) Night.

(8) Censure, blame.

(9) One of the seven tongues of Fire. (10) A form of Durgā;

kālītanayaḥ a buffalo.

(11) One of the Mātṛs or divine mothers.

(12) N. of a wife of Bhīma.

(13) A sister of Yama.

(14) A kind of learning (mahāviḍyā).

(15) A small shrub used as a purgative. –laṁ

(1) Iron.

(2) A kind of perfume.

— Comp.

–ayasaṁ iron.

–akṣarikaḥ a scholar, one who can read and decipher.

–agaru n. a kind of sandal tree, black kind of aloe; Bv. 1. 70, R. 4.

81. (–n.) the wood of that tree; Rs. 4. 5; 5. 5.

–agniḥ, –analaḥ 1. the destructive fire at the end of the world. –2.

an epithet of Rudra. –3. a kind of bead (rudrākṣa). –aṁga a. having a

dark-blue body (as a sword with a dark-blue edge).

–ajinaṁ the hide of a black antelope.

–aṁjanaṁ a sort of collyrium; Ku. 7. 20, 82. (

–nī) a small shrub used as a purgative.

–aṁḍajaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo.

–atikramaḥ –maṇaṁ delay, being late; Pt. 1. 154.

–atipātaḥ, –atirekaḥ loss of time, delay; Māl 2.

–atīta a. elapsed, passed by.

–atyayaḥ 1. delay, lapse of time. –2. loss by lapse of time.

–adhyakṣaḥ 1. ‘presiding over time’, epithet of the sun. –2. the

Supreme soul.

–anunādin m. 1. a bee. –2. a sparrow. –3. the Chātaka bird.

–anusārakaḥ 1. Tagara tree. –2. yellow sandal.

–anusāriḥ, –anusārin, –anusārivā, –anusāryaḥ, –ryakaḥ benzoin.

–aṁtakaḥ time, regarded as the god of death, and the destroyer

of every thing.

–aṁtaraṁ 1. an interval. –2. a period of time. –3. another time or

opportunity. -āvṛta a. hidden or concealed in the womb of time. -kṣama a.

able to bear delay; akālakṣamā devyāḥ śarīrāvasthā K. 263; S. 4. -prekṣin

Pt. 3. 172. -viṣaḥ an animal venomous only when enraged, as a rat.

–abhraḥ a dark, watery cloud.

–avadhiḥ appointed time.

–avabodhaḥ knowledge of time and circumstances; Mal. 3. 11.

–aśuddhiḥ f.,

–aśaucaṁ period of mourning, ceremonial impurity caused by the

birth of a child or death of a relation in the family; see aśauca. –ākṛṣṭa a.

1. led to death. –2. produced or brought by time.

–ātmaka a. depending on time or destiny.

–ātman m. the Supreme spirit.

–āyasaṁ iron.

–upta a. sown in due season.

–kaṁjaṁ a blue lotus.

–kaṭaṁkaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

–kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock. –2. a sparrow. –3. a wagtail. –4. a

gallinule. –5. an epithet of Śiva; U. 6.

–kaṁṭhakaḥ –kaṁṭakaḥ a gallinule.

–kaṁḍakaḥ a water-snake.

–karaṇaṁ appointing or fixing time.

–karṇikā, –karṇī misfortune.

–karman n. death.

–kalāyaḥ dark pulse.

–kalpa a. fatal, deadly.

–kālaḥ Supreme being.

–kīlaḥ noise.

–kuṁṭhaḥ Yama.

–kuṣṭhaḥ a myrrh.

–kūṭaḥ, –ṭaṁ

(a) a deadly poison; S. 6.

(b) the poison churned out of the ocean and drunk by Śiva; adyāpi

nojjhati haraḥ kila kālakūṭaṁ Ch. P. 50. –kṛt m. 1. the sun. –2. a

peacock. –3. Supreme spirit. –kṛta 1. produced by time. –2. fixed,

appointed. –3. lent or deposited. –4. done for a long time. (–taḥ) the

sun. –kramaḥ lapse of time, course of time; kālakrameṇa in course or

process of time; Ku. 1. 19. –kriyā 1. fixing a time. –2. death. –kṣepaḥ 1.

delay, loss of time; Me. 22; maraṇe kālakṣepaṁ mākuru Pt. 1. –2.

passing the time. –khaṁjaṁ, –khaṁjanaṁ, –khaṁḍaṁ the liver. —

gaṁgā the river Yamunā. –grāṁthiḥ a year. –ghātin a. killing by degrees

or slowly (as a poison) –cakraṁ 1. the wheel of time (time being

represented as a wheel always moving). –2. a cycle. –3. (hence fig.) the

wheel of fortune, the vicissitudes of life. (–kraḥ) an epithet of the sun. —

cihnaṁ a symptom of approaching death. codita a. summoned by the

angel of death. –jyeṣṭha a. senior in years, grown up; U. 5. 12. –jña a.

knowing the proPer time or occasion (of any action); atyārūḍho hi

nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ R. 12. 33; Śi. 2. 83. (–jñaḥ) 1. an

astrologer. –2. a cock. –jñānin m. an epithet of Śiva. –trayaṁ the three

times; the past, the present, and the future; -darśī K. 46. –daṁḍaḥ

death. –damanī an epithet of Durgā. –dharmaḥ, –dharman m. 1. the line

of conduct suitable to any particular time. –2. the law or rule of time. –3.

effects proper to the time. –4. fated time, death; na punarjīvitaḥ

kaścitkāladharmamupāgataḥ Mb.; parītāḥ kāladharmaṇā &c. –dhāraṇā

prolongation of time. –naraḥ (in astrology) the figure of a man’s body. —

nāthaḥ, –nidhiḥ Śiva. –niyogaḥ decree of fate or destiny; laṁdhyatena

khalu kālaniyogaḥ Ki. 9. 13. –nirūpaṇaṁ determination of time,

chronology. –nemiḥ 1. the rim of the wheel of time. –2. N. of a demon,

uncle of Rāvaṇa, deputed by him to kill Hanūmat. –3. N. of a demon with

100 hands killed by Viṣṇu. -ariḥ, ripuḥ, haraḥ, han m. epithets of Kṛṣṇa.

–pakva a. ripened by time, i. e. spontaneously; Ms. 6. 17, 21; Y. 3. 49.

–parivāsaḥ standing for a time so as to become stale. –pāśaḥ the noose

of Yama or death. –pāśikaḥ a hangman. –pṛṣṭhaṁ 1. a species of

antelope. –2. a heron. (–kaṁ) 1. N. of the bow of Karṇa; Ve. 4. –2. a

bow in general. –prabhātaṁ autumn or Śarad; (the two months following

the rainy season considered as the best time). –bhakṣaḥ an epithet of

Śiva. –bhṛt m. the sun. –bhairavaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –mānaṁ a

measure of time. –mukhaḥ a species of ape. –meṣī f. the Mañjiṣṭha

plant. –yavanaḥ a king of Yavanas and enemy of Kṛṣṇa and an invincible

foe of the Yadavas. Kṛṣṇa, finding it impossible to vanquish him on the

field of battle, cunningly decoyed him to the cave where Muchakunda was

sleeping who burnt him down. –yāpaḥ, –yāpanaṁ procrastination, delay,

putting off. –yogaḥ fate, destiny. -taḥ according to the requirements of

the time; Pt. 1. 184. –yogin m. an epithet of Śiva. –rātriḥ, –rātrī f. 1. a

dark night. –2. a sister of Yama. –3. the Amāvasyā on which lamps are

lighted (in the Divālī holidays). –4. the night of destruction at the end of

the world (identified with Durgā). –5. a particular night in the life of man,

on the 7th day of the 7th month of the 77th year. –lohaṁ –lauhaṁ steel.

–viprakarṣaḥ prolongation of time. –vṛddhiḥ f. periodical interest

(payable monthly, quarterly, or at stated times); Ms. 8. 153. –velā the

time of Saturn, i. e. a particular time of the day (half a watch every day)

at which any religious act is improper. –saṁkarṣā a girl 9 years old

personating Durga at a festival. –saṁrodhaḥ 1. keeping back for a long

time; Ms. 8. 143. –2. lapse of a long period of time. –sadṛśa a.

opportune, timely. –saṁpanna a. dated, bearing a date. –sarpaḥ the

black and most poisonous variety of the snake. –sāraḥ the black

antelope. (–raṁ) a yellow sort of sandal wood. –sūtraṁ, –sūtrakaṁ 1.

thread of time or death. –2. N. of a particular hell; Y. 3. 222; Ms. 4. 88.

–skaṁdaḥ the Tamāla tree. –svarūpa a. terrible as death, (deathlike in

form). –haraḥ an epithet of Śiva. –haraṇaṁ loss of time, delay; S. 3; U.

5; Mv. 4. 41. –hāniḥ f. delay; R. 13. 16.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kāla 1) adj. f. ī P. 4, 1, 42. “blauschwarz, schwarz”; als m. “die

blauschwarze Farbe, Schwärze” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 1397.

an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. P. 5, 4, 33. (rathe) kālāśvayukte R. 6, 67, 2. kālāḥ

kāñcanasaṁnāhāstasmiṁstamasi rākṣasāḥ. samadṛśyanta 19, 5. kālāni

bhūtvā māṁsāni śīryante yasya dehinaḥ SUŚR. 1, 299, 19. kālajīmūta R.

3, 55, 13. kālamegha 4, 10, 26. 6, 79, 13. MBH. 1, 7184. VET. 4, 20.

kālabāla und kālabāla ŚĀNT. 4, 4. MBH. 1, 1236. tasyāḥ – dīrdhaveṇī –

dadṛśe svasitā snigdhā kālī vyālīva mūrdhani 3, 16191. kālī strī

pāṇḍurairdantaiḥ 16, 57. timirābhyāhatāṁ kālīmaprakāśāṁ niśāmiva R. 2,

114, 2. pramadā 5, 27, 17. — 2) m. a) “das Schwarze im Auge” SUŚR. 2,

336, 20. Vgl. kālaka. — b) “der indische Kuckuck” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

= kālasarpa VET. 16, 13. — d) “Cassia Sophora Lin.” (s. kāsamarda). — e)

“eine Art Plumbago” (raktacitraka). — f) “das Harz der Shorea robusta”

(rāla) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “der Planet Saturn” (vgl. nīlavāsas) DĪPIKĀ

im ŚKDR. — h) ein Bein. Śiva’s H. an. H. ś. 45. MED.; vgl. kālakaṇṭha,

mahākāla und kālī Durgā. = Rudra BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 12. — i) N. pr. eines

Sohnes von Hrada HARIV. 189. eines Fürsten (kālayavana) BHĀG. P. 3, 3,

10. eines Bruders des Königs Prasenajit BURN. Intr. 173. eines künftigen

Buddha Lot. de la b. l. 126. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 85. eines Rakshas R.

6, 69, 12. eines Feindes von Śiva (s. kālāsuhṛd). — k) N. pr. eines Berges

R. 4, 44, 21. — l) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — m)

myst. Bez. des “Buchstabens m” Ind. St. 2, 316. — 3) f. kālā a) N.

verschiedener Pflanzen: “Indigofera tinctoria Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. H. an.

MED.; “Piper longum Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 15; eine der “Ipomoea Turpethum”

nahe verwandte Pflanze, viell. “Ipomoea atropurpurea Chois.” AK. 2, 4, 3,

27. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 131, 19. 2, 106, 19. 528, 16; “Nigella indica

Roxb.” AK. 2, 9, 37; “Rubia Munjista” (mañjiṣṭhā, kālameṣikā) “Roxb.” H.

an. (lies jiṅgyām). MED.; “Ruellia longifolia” (kulika) RATNAM. im ŚKDR.;

“Physalis flexuosa Lin.” (aśvagandhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; “Bignonia

suaveolens Roxb.” (pāṭalā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach dem gaṇa

harītakyādi zu P. 4, 3, 167 ist kālā auch “die Frucht der” Kālā. — b) N. pr.

einer Tochter des Daksha, der Mutter der Kāleya oder Kālakeya MBH. 1,

2520. 2542. HARIV. 11521. 11552. 12465. PADMA-P. in VP. 122, N. 19.

Vgl. kālakā. — c) ein Bein. der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32, Sch.; vgl. kālī. — 4) f.

kālī a) = kālikā “schwarze Farbe, Tinte” H. an. MED. — b)

“Anschwärzung, üble Nachrede” H. an. — c) “Nacht” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

d) “eine schwarz aufziehende Wolkenmasse” H. an. HĀR. 71. — e) “ein

best. in Milch vorkommendes Thierchen”, = kṣīrakīṭa H. an. = kṣārakīṭa

(sic) MED. — f) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = kālāñjanī; b) “Cajanus

indicus Spreng.” (tuvarī); g) “Ipomoea Turpethum” (trivṛt) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR.; d) “Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.” AK. 2, 4, 2, 35, Sch. — g) N. einer

der sieben Zungen Agni’s JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 4.

GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — h) eine Form der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. H. 203.

H. an. MED. MBH. 4, 195. HARIV. 10239. KUMĀRAS. 7, 39. DEV. 9, 27.

itthaṁ cemau rajanidivasau dolayandvāvivākṣau kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Hier wie bei kāla als

Bein. von Śiva hat man mit dem Begriff “der Schwärze” wohl auch den

“der Alles zerstörenden Zeit” vor Augen gehabt. Vgl. Ind. St. 1, 286. 287.

mahākālī und bhadrakālī. — i) N. einer der göttlichen Mütter H. an. MED.

— k) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālakā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, HARIV.

11552. — l) N. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 239. — m) Bein. der Satyavatī,

der Gemahlin Śāntanu’s und Mutter Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana’s TRIK. 2, 8, 10.

LIA. I, 629, N. 1. MBH. 1, 2209. 4244. BENF. Chr. 6, 1. Mutter

Vicitravīrya’s, mit dessen Gemahlin Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana die drei Kinder

Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu und Vidura zeugt HARIV. 1825. fg. Gemahlin

Bhīmasena’s und Mutter Sarvagata’s BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 30. — n) mit oder

ohne Beis. von gaṅgā N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 50. 56. 441. fg. — 4) n. a)

“eine dunkle Art Sandelholz” (kālīyaka) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) “ein

best. Parfum” (kakkolaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “Eisen” (vgl. kālāyasa)

VĀCASP. bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR.

kāla m. 1) “ein bestimmter” oder “richtiger Zeitpunkt; Zeit” überh. AK. 1,

1, 3, 1. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 1, 1, 103. H. 126. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. Im

ṚV. nur an einer Stelle: uta prahāmatidīvyā jayāti kṛtaṁ yacchvaghnī

vicinoti kāle 10, 42, 9. AV. 19, 53 und 54 sind Lieder, welche von Macht

und Wesen der Zeit handeln, deren Begriff an den der “Weltordnung” oder

des “Schicksals” streift (vgl. unter 2.). Einigermaassen gebräuchlich wird

das Wort (st. des alten ṛtu) erst in den BRĀHMAṆA: sa eṣa sviṣṭakṛtaḥ

kālaḥ ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 3, 3. 3, 8, 3, 36. yadi kāle yadyanākāle ‘thaivāśnanti

2, 4, 2, 4. juhoti kāla eva 4, 5, 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 5, 14. 25, 7, 2.

ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 15. M. 2, 80. 3, 105. 7, 164. 204. N. 2, 17. 25, 1. R. 1,

77, 13. 2, 40, 30. 3, 4, 7. SUŚR. 1, 124, 3. PAÑCAT. I, 253. 254. ŚĀK. 151.

RAGH. 3, 12. 12, 69. kāle kāle MBH. 1, 1680. RAGH. 4, 6. svakāle M. 4,

93. prāpte kāle 9, 307. kṣetre kālopapādite 36. kāloptāni vījāni 38.

kālayuktaṁ vacaḥ R. 5, 46, 2. parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī MṚCCH. 178, 10.

PAÑCAT. 149, 14. nainaṁ purā kālātprāṇo jahāti ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 11

(vgl. AIT. BR. 8, 25, wo āyuṣaḥ st. kālāt). kālameva pratīkṣeta M. 6, 45.

kālamanveṣayantau PAÑCAT. 182, 24. kālavid R. 4, 32, 13. kālaṁ

gacchati “er gelangt zum Endpunkt” (beim coitus) CHĀND. UP. 2, 13, 1.

“die zu Etwas bestimmte –, geeignete Zeit”; die Ergänz. im gen., dat.,

loc., im comp. vorang., im inf. oder im potent. mit yad (P. 3, 3, 167. 168):

saṁpratiṣṭhāmahe kālaḥ prasthānasya R. 2, 56, 2. tasya kālo ‘yamāgataḥ

“dazu ist jetzt die Zeit gekommen” VIŚV. 12, 9. eṣa dvaidhībhāvasya

kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 155, 9. 143, 12. VID. 241. nāyaṁ vaktavyasya kālaḥ

PAÑCAT. 194, 23. na rāma kālaḥ paridevanāya MBH. 3, 10259. na kālo ‘sti

vilambane R. 6, 8, 45. dakṣiṇākāla KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 2, 21 (vgl. dakṣiṇānāṁ

kāle ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 2, 21). karmakāla R. 1, 65, 34. kriyākāla SUŚR. 1, 5,

13. paṇakālamamanyata N. 7, 8. VIKR. 32, 15. 64, 18. nāyaṁ kālo

vilambitum N. 20, 11. DRAUP. 3, 7. R. 6, 93, 23. kālo yadbhuñjīta bhavān

P. 3, 3, 168, Sch. — kālamāsādya “in Berücksichtigung der Zeitumstände”:

kālamāsādya kāryaṁ ca daṇḍaṁ rājā prakalpayet M. 8, 324. 9, 293.

skandhenāpi vahecchatruṁ kālamāsādya buddhimān PAÑCAT. III, 247.

kālamāsādya kaṁcana “nach einer Weile”: yathā kāṣṭhaṁ ca kāṣṭhaṁ ca

sameyātāṁ mahārṇave. sametya ca vyapeyātāṁ kālamāsādya kaṁcana..

R. 2, 105, 24. — kālasaṁkhyāṁ na vedmi PAÑCAT. 242, 19. kālaṁ

kālavibhaktīśca M. 1, 24. evaṁ sarvaṁ sa sṛṣṭvedaṁ māṁ

cācintyaparākramaḥ. ātmanyantardadhe bhūyaḥ kālaṁ kālena pīḍayan 51.

kālasyānavasthitatvāt KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 6, 31. kālāvasthā SUŚR. 1, 113, 14.

151, 21. aitasmātkālāt ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 4, 5. ūrdhvaṁ tu kālādetasmāt M.

9, 90. etasminneva kāle N. 2, 12. anyeṣvapi tu kāleṣu M. 7, 183. sarveṣu

kāleṣu R. 1, 46, 11. viṣame kāle 2, 88, 15. kāle śubhe prāpte N. 5, 1.

tasminnatisukhe kāle DAŚ. 1, 19. deśakālau “der rechte Ort und die

rechte Zeit, Zeit und Ort” M. 3, 126. 7, 10. 16. 64. 8, 126. 156. 157. deśe

ca kāle ca 233. HIT. I, 14. deśakālajña N. 8, 12. kālaṁ kar “eine Zeit

festsetzen”: kālaśca kriyatāmasya svapne jāgaraṇe tathā R. 6, 38, 29.

Eine andere Bed. von kālaṁ kar wird u. 3 besprochen werden. trikālajña

R. 1, 1, 8. iṣṭapañcakālajña MBH. 12, 12797. agnau juhvadubhau

kālāvubhau kālāvupaspṛśan “bei Sonnenauf – und Niedergang” 1, 4623.

ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ “zur 6ten Stunde am Tage” d. i. “um Mittagszeit” VIKR.

20. ṣaṣṭhānnakāla “der nur die sechste Esszeit hat” d. i. “der 5

Mahlzeiten vorübergehen lässt und erst am Abend des 3ten Tages seine

Mahlzeit hält”; davon nom. abstr. ṣaṣṭhānnakālatā M. 11, 200.

Gewöhnlich mit Weglassung von anna “Speise”: caturthakālam “zur

vierten Esszeit” d. i. “am Abend des zweiten Tages” 109. ṣaṣṭhe kāle “am

Abend des dritten Tages” MBH. 13, 5175. 14, 1663. 1665.

kadāciddvādaśe kāle kadācidapi ṣoḍaśe. āhāramakarodrājā mūlāni ca

phalāni ca.. 1, 8118. Vgl. caturthakālika und aṣṭamakālika adjj. “der erst

am Abend des zweiten” und “vierten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält” M. 6, 19.

ṛtukāla “die Zeit der monatlichen Reinigung” NIR. 1, 19. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3,

13, 47. M. 5, 153. āpatkāle 2, 241. mantrakāle 7, 149. niśā- N. 15, 14.

pradoṣa- HIT. 22, 1. śīta-, uṣṇa- I, 186. śiśukāla “die Kinderjahre”

PAÑCAT. 192, 3. kiyānkālastavaivaṁ sthitasya saṁjātaḥ “wie viel Zeit ist

verflossen, seitdem du stehst?” 242, 14. evaṁ tasya tāṁ nityaṁ

sevamānasya kālo yāti 45, 10. kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatām HIT. Pr. 48. athaivaṁ gacchati kāle PAÑCAT. 34, 14. gacchatā

kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, nach einiger Zeit” 47, 6. 76, 10. 224, 7. kāle

gacchati dass. VID. 61. evaṁ tena saha sakalāṁ rātriṁ

yāvadvigrahaparasya kālo vrajati PAÑCAT. 117, 9. 163, 22. tasya ca kṛṣiṁ

kurvatastadaiva niṣphalaḥ kālo ‘tivartate “die Zeit, welche er auf das

Bebauen des Ackers verwendet, geht ihm fruchtlos dahin” 174, 9.

tasyaivaṁ vartamānasya kālaḥ samabhivartsyati. agniṁ śuśrūṣamāṇasya

pitaraṁ ca yaśasvinam.. R. 1, 8, 10. sa ca vakabālakān – sadaiva

bhakṣayankālaṁ nayati PAÑCAT. 98, 10. sadaikasthānavihāriṇau kālaṁ

nayataḥ 43, 2. bhakṣaṇapānaviharaṇakriyābhiḥ kālo neyaḥ 25, 10. HIT.

37, 20. RAGH. 1, 33. kālaṁ yāpayati PAÑCAT. 183, 24. kva cāyaṁ

vihṛtastvayā. kālaḥ MBH. 1, 7. nityakālam “stets” M. 2, 58. 73.

dīrghakālam “eine lange Zeit hindurch” 8, 145. SUND. 1, 10. CĀT. 1.

mahāntaṁ kālam dass. PAÑCAT. 114, 24. dīrgheṇa kālena dass. SUND. 1,

8. “nach langer Zeit” R. 1, 45, 40. kālena mahatā dass. VIŚV. 10, 10.

kālena bahunā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kenacittvatha kālena “nach einiger Zeit”

VIŚV. 5, 13. kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit” M. 9, 246. MBH. 3,

8843. BHAG. 4, 38. R. 4, 15, 34. PAÑCAT. 32, 24. KATHĀS. 4, 20. 6, 21.

VID. 16. 184. 193. dīrghasya kālasya “nach langer Zeit” N. 18, 1. M. 8,

216. R. 3, 4, 37. 4, 8, 49. kālasya mahataḥ dass. 1, 17, 12.

kasyacitkālasya “nach einiger Zeit” ŚĀK. 110, 15. kasyacittvatha kālasya

MBH. 1, 5299. HARIV. 6386. R. 1, 26, 25. kālāt “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit

der Zeit” M. 8, 251. kālatas dass. KATHĀS. 6, 101. — 2) Ereignisse, deren

Ursachen sich dem Verstande entziehen, werden, da sie im Verlauf der

“Zeit” geschehen, als unmittelbare Wirkungen “der thätig gedachten Zeit”

aufgefasst. Schon oben u. 1. haben wir zweier Lieder des AV. gedacht, in

denen der Begriff der “Zeit” an den der “Weltordnung” oder des

“Schicksals” streift. na kartā kasyacitkaścinniyoge nāpi ceśvaraḥ.

svabhāve vartate kālaḥ kasya kālaḥ parāyaṇaḥ.. R. 4, 24, 5. fgg. SUŚR. 1,

18, 18. BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Verz. d. B. H. No. 948. sarve kālena sṛjyante

hriyante ca punaḥ punaḥ MBH. 13, 56. kālasyāhaṁ vaśānugaḥ 51. R. 6,

12, 1. pracodito ‘haṁ kālena pannaga tvāmacūcudam MBH. 13, 50. ayaṁ

rāmastvayaṁ rāma iti kālena coditāḥ. anyo ‘nyaṁ samare jaghnuḥ R. 3,

31, 47. kālacodita 1, 1, 50. 3, 8, 8. ARJ. 10, 31. DRAUP. 8, 4. — 3) “die

Alles zu Ende führende, vernichtende Zeit; Tod”, sowohl der, welcher nur

das einzelne Individuum trifft, als auch der, welcher am Ende der Welt

Alles zerstört. Nach SUŚR. 1, 122, 11 “der Tod der durch die Zeit, durch’s

Alter kommt”: tatraikaḥ kālasaṁjñastu śeṣāstvāgantavaḥ smṛtāḥ

(mṛtyavaḥ). Sehr häufig personificirt mit den Attributen Jama’s und mit

diesem bisweilen auch identificirt. AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 3,

3, 382. H. 323. 184. H. an. MED. kālameyivān “er starb” BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 2.

kālaṁ kar “sterben” MBH. 14, 1784. R. 2, 64, 52; vgl. kālakarman und

kālakriyā. kālasamāyukta “gestorben” 6, 93, 23. kālasya nayane yuktā

yamasya puruṣāśca ye MBH. 2, 343. so ‘yaṁ vyaktaṁ bhavatāṁ

kālahetuḥ 2096. sa hi meghācalaprakhyaḥ kālaḥ puruṣavigrahaḥ.

varāyudhadharaḥ śrīmānutpapāta vihāyasā.. R. 5, 89, 45. kālo hi

vyasanaprasāritabhujo gṛhṇāti dūrādapi PAÑCAT. II, 21. upetya muniveṣo

‘tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam RAGH. 15, 92. pitṝṇāṁ (patiṁ)

sarvanidhanaṁ kālaṁ vaiśvānaraṁ prabhum HARIV. 12492. kālāyāḥ

kālakalpastu gaṇaḥ paramadāruṇaḥ 12465. prahrādastu – yuyudhe saha

kālena raṇe kāla iva sthitaḥ 13191. (nivātakavacāḥ) kālarūpāḥ MBH. 3,

12107. ARJ. 7, 5. svaṁ rūpaṁ kālarūpābhaṁ bheje vaiśravaṇānujaḥ R. 3,

55, 3. kālarūpin 4, 59, 20. kālopamau yuddhe 1, 22, 24. RĀJA-TAR. 1,

289. kālamivolvaṇam 5, 148. nidrayā kālarūpiṇyā HARIV. 3237.

śūnyamāsījjagatsarvaṁ kāleneva hataṁ tadā SUND. 2, 18.

saṁjihīrṣurdurādharṣaṁ kālo lokakṣaye yathā R. 6, 70, 35. kālasya

kālaśca bhavetsa rāmaḥ saṁkṣipya lokāṁśca sṛjedathānyān 3, 43, 42.

mṛtyurdaṇḍaṁ sapāśaṁ ca kālaḥ śaktimagṛhṇata HARIV. 12146.

khaḍgadaṇḍaṁ dhanuṣpāśaṁ śaraughajaṭharaṁ prabhum.

rāmakālamakālena na kālayitumarhasi.. R. 3, 41, 26. kālapāśa 1, 21, 13.

29, 9. 3, 31, 16. 35, 73. 45, 19. 5, 47, 35. VIŚV. 6, 8. 9, 18. MṚCCH. 163,

7. HIT. 21, 11. kāladaṇḍa MBH. 1, 984. R. 3, 35, 43. VIŚV. 6, 2. kālāstra

11. kālamudgara R. 3, 54, 10. kālajihva MBH. 1, 2932. kālaviṣa 3, 10884.

kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam VIŚV. 15, 16. 6, 19.

MBH. 3, 10393. kālāgnisadṛśaḥ krodhe R. 1, 1, 19. kālāgnimiva duḥsaham

74, 17. 4, 33, 32. 50, 9; vgl. kālānala. In Verbindung mit antaka (vgl.

kālāntaka) und mṛtyu “Tod”: antakaścābhaddogdhā kālo lokaprakālanaḥ

HARIV. 374. abhyadhāvata saṁkruddhaḥ prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ R. 3, 7, 9.

mṛtyukālasama 4, 37, 20. kālamṛtyuyugāntābha 31, 17. yathā yamo yathā

mṛtyuryathā kālo yathā vidhiḥ hantāsmi rākṣasānadya 3, 69, 20. kāla und

mṛtyu in Jama’s sabhā MBH. 2, 340. Kāla (kann hier wie im Folgenden

auch als Personif. der “Zeit” oder des “Schicksals” aufgefasst werden) als

Devarshi in Indra’s sabhā 295. Kāla ein Sohn Dhruva’s, “des

Polarsterns”: dhruvasya putro bhagavānkālo lokaprakālanaḥ (vgl. oben

HARIV. 374) 1, 2585. HARIV. 154. VP. 120. kāla = māṭhara im Gefolge

des Sonnengottes VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — 4) “Zeitalter, Weltalter” (= yuga):

tūrye kāle RĀJA-TAR. 5, 73. — 5) “Zeit” so v. a. “Zeitmaass; Prosodie”:

ekādaśidvādaśinorlaghāvaṣṭamamakṣaram (plabate). udaye saṁhitākāle

ṚV. PRĀT. 8, 21. hrasvo dīrghaḥ pluta iti kālato niyamā ṛci ŚIKṢĀ 11. AV.

PRĀT. 2, 39. P. 1, 1, 70. 2, 27. — 6) “Abtheilung, Abschnitt” VS. PRĀT. 3,

4. 5. — Vgl. akāla, ākāla, ekakālam, yathākālam.

kāla 1) KATHĀS. 64, 118. — 2) i) ein Sohn Vasu’s (vgl. kālin) Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 80,b,40. Verfasser von Mantra 101,b,16. = aśvaghoṣa WASSILJEW 35.

45. 58. 75. 200. — 4) f) b) nicht “Cajanus indicus”, sondern “eine best.

Lehmart.” — h) N. der Dākṣāyaṇī auf dem Berge Kālañjara Verz. d. Oxf. H.

39,b,4. ein Aṁśa der Prakṛti 23,b,1. WILSON, Sel. Works 1,246.

kāla 1) yathaiva śṛṅgaṁ goḥ kāle vardhamānasya vardhate “mit der Zeit,

allmählich” Spr. 4802. paritoṣakālāḥ “Zeit” so v. a. “Gelegenheit” 3012.

brāhmaṇastriṣu kāleṣu śastraṁ gṛhṇanna duṣyati. ātmatrāṇe varṇadoṣe

durdamyaniyameṣu ca.. MBH. 12, 2950. — 3) mṛtyukālau R. 7, 22, 22. —

5) ṚV. PRĀT. 6, 9. 11. 11, 1. 16. varṇāpattīnāṁ trayaḥ kālā bhavanti

mātrārdhamātrāṇumātropalakṣitāḥ Schol. zu VS. PRĀT. 4, 146. — 7) in

den Verbindungen pada-, krama-, saṁhitā- so v. a. pāṭha Schol. zu AV.

PRĀT. 4, 123. fg.

kāla 1) kālena “von Zeit zu Zeit, dann und wann” (Gegens. pade pade)

Spr. (II) 6900. “zu spät” 6007.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kāla 1 (yama) I (YAMA)>span class=”red”>* The god of Death.

When the life span of each living being allotted by Brahmā is at an end

Yama sends his agents and takes the soul to Yamapurī (the city of

Yama). From there, the holy souls are sent to Vaikuṇṭha (Heaven, the

abode of Viṣṇu) and the sinful souls to Hell.

kāla 2 II A Maharṣi. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 7, Verse 14,

refers to this sage as offering worship to Indra, in Indra’s assembly.

kāla See under the word Kālamāna.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kāla 1. kāla, m.

1. Due season, Man. 2, 80; instr. kālena, In due season, Man. 9, 246.

2. Time, Man, 1, 24; 7, 183; instr. kālena, and abl. kālāt, In the long

run, Pañc. 32, 24; Man. 8, 251; gen. dīrghasya kālasya, After a long time,

Nal. 18, 1; kasya cit kālasya, After some time, Śāk. 110, 15.

3. Mealtime; there are two meal-times a day, therefore, ṣaṣṭha kāla,

The sixth meal-time = the evening of the third day, MBh. 13, 5175; Rām.

3, 31, 47.

4. A period, Rājat. 5, 73.

5. Death, Bhāg. P. 9, 9, 2.

6. Time personified, fate, MBh. 13, 56; Rām. 6, 70, 35; endowed with

the attributes of Yama, the regent of the dead, Rām. 1, 21, 13; 3, 35, 43,

etc.

— Comp. a-, m. unseasonableness, Sund. 2, 31; loc. le, unseasonably,

Man. 3, 105. ādi-, m. beginning of time, Rām. 3, 20, 6. ṛtu-, m. 1.

seasonable time, MBh. 3, 14763. 2. time approved for sexual intercourse,

Man. 3, 45. eka-kāla + m, adv. once, Man. 6, 55. kārya-, m. time of

action, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1809. kṛta-,

I. m. appointed time, Yājñ. 2, 184.

II. adj. having waited a certain time, MBh. 2, 1875. caturtha-kāla + m,

adv. at the fourth meal-time, i. e. on the evening of every second day,

Man. 11, 109. tad-kāla + m, adv. instantly, Pañc. 192, 6. tāvatkāla + m, i.

e. tāvant-, adv. such a long time, MBh. 3, 16889. tri-, n. 1. past, future,

and present time, Bhāg. P. 5, 23, 8. 2. morning, noon, and evening, MBh.

13, 6607. duṣkāla, i. e. dus-, m. the formidable, all-destroying, time, Rām.

2, 33, 21; a name of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10418. nitya-kāla + m, adv.

continually, Man. 2, 58. purva(n)-, m. the periodic change of the moon.

prāpta-kāla + m (vb. āp with pra), adv. in due season, Pañc. 16, 6. a-

prāpta-kāla + m, adv. Out of due season, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 173. yathā-kāla

+ m, adv. At the proper time, Man. 2, 39. sa-kāla + m, adv. Betimes,

early in the morning. sūrya-, m. day.

kāla 2. kāla (cf. kalaṅka),

I. adj., f. lī, Dark blue, black, Rām. 6, 67, 2; MBh. 16, 57.

II. m.

1. A black and poisonous snake, Coluber naga, Lass. 16, 13.

2. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 336, 20.

3. A name of Rudra, Bhāg. P. 3, 12, 12.

4. A proper name, Hariv. 189.

5. The name of a mountain, Rām. 4, 44, 21.

III. f. lā.

1. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 131, 19, etc.

2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2520.

3. The name of a female demon, Hariv. 11552.

IV. f. lī.

1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 195.

2. A surname of Satyāvatī, Chr. 6, 1.

— Comp. bhadra-kālī, f. 1. a name of Durgā. 2. a fragrant grass, Cyperus.

mahā-,

I. m. a name of Śiva.

II. f. lī, Durgā.

— Cf. [greek] etc., under kalaṅka.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kāla f. ī1 dark-blue, black, m. the black part of the eye, E. of Rudra-Śiva;

N. of sev. kings etc., also = kālasarpa q.v.; f. ī E. of Durga etc.

kāla [2] m. time, esp. the right or proper time (w. gen., dat., loc., inf., or

–°); opportunity, case; season, mealtime (twice a day); the half of a day,

hour, age, era, measure of time, prosody; time as ruler or destroyer of

the world, i.e. destiny, fate; end; death or the god of death. –paraḥ kālaḥ

high time (w. inf.). kālaṁ kṛ appoint a time for (loc.). kālena in course of

time (also -gacchatā; kālāt or kālatas), at times; kālena dīrgheṇa bahunā,

or mahatā (also gen.) after a long time. kasya citkālasya after some time.

kāla & kāle in time, at the right or appointed time; (also kāle gacchati) in

course of time, little by little. kāle kāle always in time or at the right time.

kasmiṁścitkāle one day. — ubhau kālau morning and evening. ṣaṣṭhe kāle

on the sixth half-day i.e. after three days; pancaśate kāle after 250 days.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kāla 1. kāla, a. (ī) dark blue, black; m. the black in the eye; ep. of Śiva.

kāla 2. kāla, m. due season, appointed or right time (for d., g., lc., inf., –

°); time; opportunity; season; meal-time (of which there are two day);

half a day; hour; age, era; measure, prosody; Time, fate; death, god of

death; -°, at the right time; in time, gradually;

paraḥ kālaḥ, high time (w. inf.);

kālaṁ kṛ, fix a time for (lc.);

kālam āsādya, according to circumstances; in. kālena, in due season;

in course of time: -gacchatā, as time goes on, in course of time;

dīrgheṇa-, mahatā -or bahunā-, after a long time;

kenacit-, after some time;

tena-, at that time; ab. kālāt, in the long run, in course of time;

kālatas, id.; with regard to time; g. dīrghasya or mahataḥ kālasya,

after a long time;

kasya -cit-, after some time; lc. kāle, at the right or appointed time,

opportunely; in time = gradually; — prāpte, when the time has come;

-gacchati, in course of time; -yāte, after the lapse of some time;

-kaśmiṁś cit-, one day;

kāle kāle, always at the right time;

ṣaṣṭhe –, at the end of the third day: –‘hnaḥ, at the sixth hour of the

day, i. e. at noon;

pañ- caśate-, = after 250 days;

ubhau kālau, morning and evening.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kāla t ka kālopadeśe . iti karikalpadrumaḥ . (adantacurāṁ–paraṁ–

sakaṁ–seṭ .) yathā acakālat kālamiyattayā gaṇakaḥ . etāvatī veleti

kathitavānityarthaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kāla kālopadeśe (iyattayā kālaniścayārthopradeśe) ada° cu° ubha° saka°

seṭ . kālayati te avakālat–ta, kalayām–babhūva–āsa–cakāra–cakre .

kālayiṣyati–te

kāla pu° īṣadalati ala–ac koḥ kā° . 1 kṛṣṇabarṇe tasya varṇeṣu

īṣadbhūṣakatvāt tathātvam . astyarthe arśa ādyac . 2 tadvarṇayukte tri° .

3 lauhe na° vācaspatiḥ . dhātuṣu tasya kṛṣṇatvāt tathātvam . 4 kakkole

na° rājani° 5 kāloyake gandhadravyabhede na° śabdaca° .

tayaurgrandhadravyeṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam . 6 kokile puṁstrī° rājani°

tasya pakṣiṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7 rāle 8 raktacitrake 9 ka

samarde (kālaka sendā) vṛkṣe ca pu° rājani° . 10 śanigrahe medi°

kṛṣṇatvāttasya tathātvam . kalayatisarvaṁ cu° kala–ac

kālasamayavelāsviti pā° nirdeśāt ni° upadhārdardhaḥ . 11 yamarāje 12

mahākāle śive medi° . 13 parameśvare kālo’smi lokakṣayakṛtpravṛddhaḥ

kālaḥ kalayatāmaham iti ca gītā ṛtuḥ sudarśanaḥ kālaḥ parameṣṭhī

parigrahaḥ viṣṇusa° . trayīmayo’yaṁ bhagavāna kālātmā kālakṛdvibhuḥ

sū° si° . svanāmakhyāte paratvāparatvadhīhetau nyāyādimatasiddhe 1 4

dravyabhede . tannirūpaṇaṁ kaṇādasūtre upaskaravṛttau ca yathā

aparasminnaparaṁ yugapat ciraṁ kṣipramiti kālaliṅgāni ka° sū° .

itiśabdo jñānaprakāraparaḥ pratyekamabhimambadhyate

tathācāparamiti pratyayo yugapaditipratyayaḥ ciramitipratyayaḥ

kṣipramitipatyayaḥ kālaliṅgānītyarthaḥ aparasminnaparamityanena

parasmit paramityapi draṣṭavyaṁ, tenāyamarthaḥ–

bahutaratapanaparispandāntaritajanmani sthāpire yuvānamavadhiṁ kṛtvā

‘paratvamutpadyate taccāparatvamasamavāyikāraṇasāpekṣam, na ca

rūpādyasamavāyikāraṇaṁ vyabhicārāt trayāṇāṁ gandhādīnāṁ vāyau

paratvādyanutpādakatvāt sparśasyāpyuṣṇādibhedena bhinnasya

pratyekaṁ vyabhicārāt na cāvacchinnaparimāṇaṁ tathā tasya

vijātīyānārambhakatvāt tapanaparispandānāñca vyadhikaraṇatvāt

tadaṣacchinnadravyasaṁyoga evāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ pariśiṣyate tacca

dravya piṇḍamārtaṇḍobhayasaṁyuktaṁ vibhu syāt ākāśasya

tatsvābhāvyakalpane kvacidapi bheryabhidhātāt sarvabherīṣu

śabdotpattiprasaṅgaḥ . tathāca kālasyaiva mārtaṇḍasaṁyuktasya piṇḍena

saṁyogo’paratvāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ kāla eva mārtaṇḍakriyopanāyakaḥ

ātmanaśca dravyāntaradharmeṣu dravyāntarāvacchedāya

svapratyāsattyatiriktasannikarṣāpekṣatvāt anyathā vārāṇasīsthena

mahārajanāruṇimnā pāṭaliputre’pi sphaṭikamaṇerāruṇyaprasaṅgāt .

kālasya tu tatsvabhāvatayaiva kalpanādayamadoṣaḥ . kālenāpi

rāgasaṁkramaḥ kathaṁ na iti cet niyatakriyopanāyakatvenaiva

tatsiddheḥ evaṁ sthaviramavadhiṁ kṛtvā yūni paratotpattirnirūpaṇīyā .

yugapaditi yugapajjāyante yugapattiṣṭhanti yugavat kurvanti ityādi–

pratyayānāñca ekasmin kāle ekasyāṁ sūryagatau ekasmin

sūryagatvavacchinnakāle ityarthaḥ, na cāprāptā e sūryagatayo

viśeṣaṇatāmanubhavanti . na ca svarūpapratyayāsannāeva tāḥ

tasmādetāvṛśaviśiṣṭapratyayānyathānupapattyā viśeṣaṇa prāpakaṁ yad

dravyaṁ sa kālaḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ .

nanu sidhyatu kālaḥ, sa tu nityo dravyaṁ veti na pramāṇamata āha .

dravyatvamityatve vāyunā vyākhyāte ka° sū° .

yathā vāyuparamāṇorguṇavattvāddravyatvam adravyadravyatvācca

nityatvaṁ tathā kālasyāpītyarthaḥ upa° .

tathāpi santu bahavaḥ kālā ityata āha .

tattvambhāvena ka° sū° .

vyākhyātamiti bipariṇatenānvayaḥ . cirādiprayayānāṁ kālaliṅgānāṁ

sarvatrāviśeṣādanekatve’pyāratmanāmiva viśeṣaliṅgābhāvāt

sattāvadekatvaṁ kālasyetyarthaḥ .

nanvevaṁkṣaṇalavamuhūrteyāmadivasāhorātrapakṣamāsartvayanasaṁva

tsarādibhedena bhūyāṁsaḥ kālāstat kathamekaḥ iti cenna

bhedabhānasya upādhinibandhanatvāt yathā eka eva

sphaṭikamaṇirjavātāpiñjādyupādhyaparāgeṇa bhinna iva bhāsate tathaika

eva kālaḥ

sūryaspandādyavacchedabhedenatattatkāryāvacchedakabhedena ca

bhinna iva bhāsat ityayupagamāt tathāca kālopādhyavyāpakaḥ

kālopādhiḥ, svādheyakādācitkābhāvapratiyogyanādhāraḥ kālo vā kṣaṇaḥ

pratikṣaṇaṁ kasyacidutpatteḥ kasyacidvināśādetadadhyavaseyam .

kṣaṇadvayañca lavaṁ ityādyāgamaprasiddham . nanu

tathāpyatītānāgatavartamānabhedena kālatrayastu, śradhūyate hi

trekālyamupāvartate traikālyāsiddhiḥ ityādīti cenna traikālyavyavahārāt

yena hi vastunā yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya vartamānaḥ

yatprāgabhāvena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya bhaviṣyatkālaḥ

yatpradhvaṁ sena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasyātītakālaḥ

tathācāvacchedakatritvādhīnaḥ kālatritvavyavahāraḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ!

idānīṁ sarvotpattimatāṁ kālaḥ kāraṇamityāha .

nityaṣvabhāvādanityeṣu bhāvāt kāraṇe kālākhyeti ka° sū° . itiśabdo

hetau itihetoḥ kāraṇe–sarvotpattimatkāraṇe kālaḥ ityākhyā . hetumāha

nityeṣvabhāvāt anityeṣu bhāvāditi nityeṣu ākāśādiṣu yugapajjātaḥ

ciraṁjātaḥ kṣipraṁ jātaḥ idānīṁ jātaḥ divā jātaḥ rātrau jāta

ityādipratyayasyābhāvāt anityeṣu ghaṭapaṭādiṣu

yaugapadyādipratyayānāṁ bhāvāt anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ kāraṇaṁ kāla

ityathaḥ . na kevalaṁ yaugapadyādipratyayabalāt kālasya

sarvotpattimannimittakāraṇatvam api tu puṣpaphalādīnāṁ

haimantikavāsantikaprāvṛṣeṇyādisajñābalādeva tadadhyavaseyam upa° .

bhāṣāmuktāvalyośca saṅkṣepeṇa tannirṇayo yathā

janyānāṁ janakaḥ kālojagatāmāśrayomataḥ .

parāparatvadhīhetuḥ kṣaṇādiḥ syādupādhitaḥ bhāṣā .

kālaṁ nirūpayati janyānāmiti tatra pramāṇaṁ darśayitumāha

jagatāmiti tathāhi idānīṁ ghaṭaityādipratītiḥ sūryaparispandādikaṁ yadi

viṣayīkaroti tadā sūryaparispandādinā ghaṭādeḥ sambandhovācyaḥ sa ca

saṁyogādirna sambhavatīti kālaeva tatsambandhaghaṭakaḥ kalpyate

itthañca tasyāśrayatvamapi samyak . pramāṇāntaraṁ darśayati

parāparatveti paratvāparatvabuddherasādhāraṇaṁ nimittaṁ ka laeva

paratvāparatvayorasamavāyikāraṇasaṁyogāśrayolāghavādatiriktaḥ

kalpyataiti bhāvaḥ . nanvekatya kālasya siddhau

kṣaṇadinamāsavarṣādisamayabhedona syādataāha kṣaṇādiriti

kālastveko’pi upādhibhedāt kṣaṇādivyāhāraviṣayaḥ . upādhistu

svajanyavibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnaṁ kamma,

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnavibhāgovā

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnauttarasaṁyogaprāgabhāvo vā

uttarasaṁyāgāvacchinnaṁ karma vā . nacottarasaṁyogānantaraṁ

kṣaṇavyavahārī na syāditi vācyaṁ karmāntarasattvāditi . mahāpralaye

kṣaṇādivyavahāroyadyapi, tadā’nāyattyā dhvaṁ senopapādanāyaḥ .

dinādivyavahārastu tattatkṣaṇakūṭaireveti muktābalī .

tārkikaśiromaṇinā raghunāthaśiromaṇinā ca

padārthanirūpaṇaprakaraṇe tatra dikkālau neśvarādatiricyete iti vadatā

vibhurūpasyaikasya kālasya khaṇḍanaṁ kṛvam .

raghudevarāmabhadrābhyāṁ tadvivṛtaṁ tataḥ saṁkṣipya

padārthatattvasāre ca jayanārāyaṇatarkapañcānanena darśitaṁ yathā

dikkālau neśvarādatiriktau prācyāṁ ghaṭa idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ

ityādivyavahārasya īśvarātmakavibhuviṣayakatvenaivograpatteḥ, naca

tayorbhinnaviṣayakatvamanubhavasiddhamiti vācyaṁ tathā sati prācyāṁ

ghaṭaḥ pratīcyāṁ ghaṭaḥ idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ tadānīṁ ghaṭa ityāderapi

bhinnabhinnaviṣayakatvānubhavāt kāladiśorapi bahutvāṅgokāraprasaṅgāt,

tathā ca upādhibhedādekayā diśā ekena kālena ca yathā bhavatāṁ

bahūnāṁ vyavahārāṇa apaprattistathā’smākamapi

ekeneśvareṇāgamānumānāpyāṁ siddhena sarveṣāmeva

tādṛśavyavahāṇāsupadhibhedāduṣapatti sambhavati, suryakriyādau

svasaṁyukteśvarasaṁyogitapanāśritatvādisambandhena ghaṭādeḥ

sattvasambhavena tatsambandhaghaṭakatayā’pyati raktakālādyasiddheḥ .

ayavā kṣaṇā evātiriktāḥ idānāmityādivyavahāraviṣayāḥ,

vibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnakarmaṇaḥ kṣaṇatvāsambhavāt

bhābikarmāntarajanyavibhāgāntaraprāgabhāvāvacchinnasya karmaṇaḥ

kṣaṇacatu yādisthāyitvena tādṛśasyopā dhitvāmambhavāt naca vibhāge

svajanyatvaṁ viśeṣaṇīyam, svavānanugamādanangaptāpatteḥ,

vibhāgajananādidaśāyāmupādhyantarasya vācyatayā

tāvatāpyananugamācca, evañcopādhīnāmatiriktānāṁ

kṣaṇikapadārpamvarūpāṇāṁ kṣaṇānāmavaśyābhyupeyatayā tere .

tādṛśāḥ sarve vyavahārā upapādanīyāḥ kimatiriktena kāleveti .

sāṁkhyamate tasya kāśalarbhāvaḥ na pṛthakatattvāntaratvaṁ

tadetatsāṁkhyasūtrabhāṣyayordarśitam

khaṇḍadikkālayoḥ sṛṣṭimāha bhā° .

dikkālābākāśādibhyaḥ sāṁ° sū° .

nityau yau dikkālautāvākāśaprakṛtibhūtau pakṛterguṇaviśeṣaveva . ato

dikkālayorvibhatvopapattiḥ . ākāśavat savagataśca nitya itya

diśrutyaktaṁ vibhutvaṁ cākāśasyopapannam . yau tu khaṇḍadikkālau tau

tu tacadupādhisayogādākāśādatpadyete ityathaḥ

ādaśabdenopādhigrahaṇāditi . yadyapi tattadupādhiviśiṣṭākāśameba

khaṇḍadikka lau tathāpi ṣiśiṣṭasyātiriktatābhyupagamavādena

vaiśeṣikanaye śrotrasya kāryatāvat tatkābhāpamatroktam pra° bhā° .

atapadaṁ darśayiṣyamāṇamādhavagranthe ca vācaspatimatena

kālakhaṇḍanaṁ tu nityapibhukālakhaṇḍanaparaṁ tathāhi upādhibhidyate

na tu tadvāniti sā° sū° upādhibhedeca dharmibhedāsambhavasya

vyāsthāpanāt dharmiṇaḥ kālasya ekatvena upādhinā bhedāsambhavāt

upādhinā nā’nāgatādi bhedavyavahārasambhavaḥ tathā ca kriyādereva

upādhibhūtasyānāgatādivyavahāropapādakatayā tasyaiva kālatvam .

ataeva kriyaiva kāla ityabhiyuktoktiḥ . kālamādhavīye ca mādhavena

śaṅkāpūrvakaṁ kālaścetthaṁ nyarūpi

nanu nāyamudyamaḥ saphalaḥ kālasya gaganakusumāyamānatvāta

tadetatparamarahasyamabhijānānaḥ kapilamahāmunistattvāni

nirvivektukāmaḥ kālamupekṣyānyānyeva pañcaviṁśatitattvāni viveca

mūlaprakṛtiravikṛtirmahadādyāḥ prakṛtivichatayaḥ sapta . ṣāḍaśakastu

vikārā na prakṛtina vikṛtiḥ puruṣaḥ iti . na caiteṣveva

tattveṣakālamyāntarbhāvo muninā vivajita iti śaṅūnīyam

tvadabhimatamya kālamya pañcaviṁśatitattvānāṁ cānyādṛśāni lakṣaṇāni

. satvarajastamoguṇānāṁ sāmyāvasthā

malaprakṛtirmadahaṅkārapañcataktātrākhyānāṁ svaptānāṁ

prakṛtivikṛtīnām madhyetdhyavasāyaheturmattattvava

abhimānaheturahaṅkāraḥ . śabdasparśaruparasagandhātmakāni

pañcatanyātrāṇi pṛthivyādipañcamahābhūtānāṁmekādaśendiyāṇāñca

ṣoḍaśavikārāṇāṁ lakṣaṇāni prasiddhāni . apra kṛtiravikṛtiḥ

puruṣaścidātmakaḥ . na hyevaṁlakṣaṇakeṣ tattveṣu kālamyāntarbhāvaḥ

sambha vyate nāpi ṣaḍvaṁśaṁ tattvāntaraṁ muniranubhanyate . kathaṁ

tarhi munipraṇītāni tattvāni āryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāna īśvarakṛṣṇau

bahiḥkaraṇāntaḥkarane vicinvan kālaṁ vyājahāra? sāṁpratakālaṁ bāhya

trikālamābhyantara karaṇamiti . paraprasiddhyāparo bodhanīya iti

nyāyenāyaṁ vyavahāro na tu sasiddhāntābhipāyeṇeti vadāmaḥ . ata

evaitadvaco vyācakṣāṇā vācaspatimiśrāstattvakaumuhyāmevamāhuḥ

kālastu vaiśeṣikābhibhata eko nānāgatātītādi bhedaṁ pravartayitumarhati

. tasmādayaṁ yairupādhibhedairatītānāgatādibhedabhāvaṁ pratipadyate

santu taevopādhayo vyavahārahetavaḥ kṛtamantargaḍunā kāleneti

sāṁkhyācaryāḥ . tasvānna kālarūpatattvāntarābhyupagama iti .

athocyeta–bhūtakālo vartamānakāloṁ bhaviṣyatkāla iti evaṁ triṣvapi

bhūtādiṣvanugataḥ kālapratyaya ekamanugataṁ

kālatvamantareṇānupapanna iti tanna padārthapratyayavadupapatteḥ

yathā bhavanmate dravyapadārtho guṇapadārtha iti ṣaṭsu bhāveṣu

caturṣvabhāveṣvanugataḥ padārthapratyaya ekamanugata

padārthaśabdavācyaṁ tattvāntaramantareṇāpyupapannaḥ . tathā

kālaprayogo’pi kuto nopapadyeta! . tasmānnistattvaṁ kāla nirṇetuṁ

mahānayamudyamaḥ prekṣāvacchiromaṇermādhavācāryasya na

kathañcidapyapapanna ityevaṁ prāpte brūmaḥ āyuṣmataśce tasyevaṁ

nirūḍhakālatattve yaḥ pradvaṣaḥ sa kasya hetoḥ? itivaktavyam . ki

kapilamahāmuninā nirākṛtatvāt? 1 kiṁvā

sāṁkhyaśāstrapraṇoteṣutattveṣu asaṁgṛhītatvāt? 2 uta lakṣaṇābhāvāt? 3

āhosvitpramāṇā bhāvān? 4 athavā prayojanāmāvāt? 5, athavā

tattvagatapañcaviṁśatisaṁ khyābhyāsapāṭavenābhyasitāt

śraddhājāḍyāt? 6, na prathamaḥ kālanirākaraṇasūtrasya muninā

praṇītasyānupalambhāt . na dvitīyaḥ atiprasaṅgāt ṛgvedaproktānā

jyotiṣṭomādīnāmāyurvedadhanurvedagāndharvavedaproktānāsaitradhapas

trasvarādīnāṁ māsaṁgṛhītatvena teṣvapi bhāvataḥ pradveṣaḥ phana

vāryeta? . aya teṣāṁ viṣaśaṣyā’maṁgrahe’pi

sukhaduḥkhamohātmakatvena guṇatrayāntargatatvādastyevārthāt

saṁgrahaiyacyate tarhi kālasyāpyasau na daṇḍavārita iti buddhiṁ

samādhatasva . kālasya guṇavayapariṇāmatve sāvayavatvama nityatā ca

ghaṭāderiva prasajyeteti cet? nityaniraptayava kālatattvābhiniveśavato

vaiśeṣikādeḥ patatvayaṁ vajraprahāraḥ śirasi . vedavādināṁ tu na kāpi

kṣatiḥ . kālasyotapattisāvayatvayoḥ pratyakṣaśrutāvapalabhyamānatvāta

. taittiroyaśa khāyāṁ nārāyaṇīye kālotpattirāmnāyate sarve nimeṣajijñire

vidytaḥ puruṣādadhi kalāmuhūrtā kāṣṭhāścāhorātrāśca sarvaśaḥ .

ardhasāmā māmā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsaraśca kalpattāmiti tamyāmeva

śāsvayāmāruṇakrtukacayana brāhmaṇe māvayavatvaṁ śrūyate uktoveṣo

vāsāṁsi ca ka lābayavānāmitaḥ pratīcyeṣiti . itosmādanuvākātpranocyeṣ

adhastaneṣu anuvākeṣa kālāvayavānāmṛtnāṁ dhyātavyo beṣa uktaḥ

vastrāṇi coktānītyathaḥ . nityatvaniravayavatvābhidhāyino

vaiśeṣikādiśāstrasya amṛtā devatā iti

badāpekṣikanityatāyāmantardhānaśaktyupetayakṣarākṣasādivat

saṁṛrśayogyāvayavaśvanyatāthā ca tātparye varṇanīyam .

atha manyase mahatā tapasā śivamārādhya tatprasāda

labbasarvajñatvapadaḥ kaṇādamunirvedavātparyaṁ mamyagvettīti ved

syaiva mandamatipratītādarthādarthāntaraṁ netavyasiti . evamapi yasya

prasādādayaṁ sarvaṁjñatāmalabhata saeva śivo mukhyaḥ sarvajña iti

tanmatānusāreṇa kaṇādamatasyaivātyathānayanamatyantamucitam .

śivo hi śaiveṣu āgameṣu ṣaṭatriṁ śattattvāni nirūpayat

kālavattvasyotpattimaṅgīncakāra . nikhilaśaivāgamasāramāryābhiḥ

saṁgṛhṇāno bhojarājaḥ śuddhāni pañca tattvaḥni

śivaśaktisadāśiveśvaravidyākhyāni nirdiśyetarāṇi

nirdiśanmāyākāryatvoktipūrvakameva kālaṁ niradikṣat puṁso jagataḥ

kṛtaye māyātastattva pañcakaṁ bhavati . kālo niyatiśca tathā kalā ca

vidyā ca rāgaśca iti tāni māyāsahitānyekādaśa tattvāni

sāṁkhyaprasiddhapañcaviṁśatitattvāni coddiśya vivṛṇvannidamāha

nānāvidhaśaktimayī sā janayati kālatattvamevādau . bhāvi

bhavadbhūtamayaṁ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . taṭṭīkākāra itthaṁ

vyācakhyau . nanveṣa kālo naiyāyikādibhinityo’bhyapagataḥ ata āha

māvibhavadbhūtamayamiti . bhūtādi rūpeṇa trividhatvāt

acetanatvenāsyānityataṁ siddhamiti bhāvaḥ . kena ka ryeṇāsya

siddharataāha kalayavi jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti .

cirakṣiprādipratyayopādhidvāreṇa kalayatyākṣipatatyartha’iti . ittha

pratyakṣaśrutisahakṛtaśaitāptamaiḥ kaṇādaśāstrasya bādhe sati

uttaramāmāṁsāgataḍitīyādhyāyaprathamādhikaraṇanyāyo’nugṛhyate

tasya ca nyāyasya saṁgrāhakau ślokau sāṁkhyasmṛtyaḥsti saṅkoco na

vā yedasamanvaye . dharme vedaḥ sāvakāśaḥ saṅkocyo’navakāśayā .

pratyakṣaśrutimūlābhirmanvādismṛtibhi smṛtiḥ amūlākāpilo bādhyā na

saṅkoca’nayā tataḥ iti . ayamarthaḥ . ṛgvedadi bharagnihotrādidharmo

brahmaṇo jagatkartṛtvaṁ ca prati pādyate . sāṁkhyasmṛtyādistu

padhānasya jagatkāraṇatva pratipāṭayati tatra tayā smṛtyā vedasya

saṅkoco’sti . veti saṁśaye smṛterjagatkāraṇatvamantareṇānavakāśatvāt

prābalya vedasya tu dharme’pi caritārthacāddaurbalyam . tataḥ

smṛtyanusāreṇa vedaḥ samkucita iti pūrvaḥ pakṣaḥ .

pratyakṣaśrutibhirbahva bhiranugṛhītābahvyo manvādimṛtayo

brahmakāraṇatāmācakṣate sāṁkhyasmṛtistvekā mūlahīnā ceti

durbalatvāt saiva bādhyā ato nāsti vedasya saṅkoca iti siddhānta iti . atha

tārkikatvābhimānagrahagṛhītaḥ sana paravaśa evaṁ brūṣe

bhūtādonāmaupādhikānāṁ kālaviśeṣāṇāmevotpattirna tu nirupādhikasya

mukhyasya kālasyeti tarhi kapardikānveṣaṇāya

pravṛttaścintāmaṇimalabhatetyevaṁvāsiṣṭarāmāyaṇa

proktasyābhāṇakamya tvameva viṣayo’bhūḥ . yataḥ

sādharyavaidharmyajñānāya dravya dīnyanviṣyan

parabrahmatattvamavāgamaḥ . vyavahārahetūnāṁ

bhūtādikālaviśeṣāṇāmādhāraḥ svayaṁ vyāhārātīto nityo niracayavo

mukhyoyaḥ kālaḥ sa paramātmaiva . tathāca śvetāśvatarā āmananti . yaḥ

kālakālo guṇī sarvavidya iti . āstāṁ nityatvānityatvasāvayavatvacintā .

sarvathāpyasti sāṁkhyatattveṣu ārthikaḥ kālasargrahaḥ

sākṣātsaṁgrahābhāvastu jyotiṣṭomādivat

prakṛtipuruṣavivekānupayogādityavagantavyam . tṛtīyacaturthapakṣau tu

bhavato vaiśeṣikaparicayagandho’pi nāstīti prakaṭayataḥ . vaiśeṣika

grantheṣu sarveṣvapi kālaprakaraṇeṣu tallakṣaṇasya

tatsādhakānumānasya ca papañcitvāt pramāṇāntarāṇi tu kālasādhakāni

śrutyaivopanyastāni tathā ca taittirīyā āruṇaketuke mantramāmananti

smṛtiḥ pratyakṣamaitihyam anumānaścatuṣṭayam . etairādityamaṇḍalai

sarvaireva vidhāsyate iti . tatra smṛti anumeyaśrutimūlaṁ

manvādiśāstraṁ prayakṣaṁ śrotragrāhyo ‘kṛtrimo vedākhyo’kṣararāśiḥ,

yogipratyakṣamaupaniṣadābhimataṁ sākṣipratyakṣaṁ vā .

aitihyamitihāsapurāṇādike jyotiḥśāstrasyāpyatrāntarbhāvo draṣṭavyaḥ .

anumīyate svamūlabhūtaṁ smṛtivākyamanenetyenumānaḥ

śiṣṭācārastasya ca smṛtyanumāpakatvaṁ .

bhaṭṭācāryarvispaṣṭamabhihitam . ācā rācca smṛtiṁ jñātvā smṛteśca

śrutikalpanamiti, tadevaṁ smṛtyādīnāṁ catuṣṭayaṁ saphalam,

etaiścaturbhiḥ sarvairapyādityamaṇḍalaṁ pramīyata iti mantrasyārthaḥ .

nanu smṛtyādīni maṇḍalasādhakatvenātropanyastāni na tu

kālasādhakatveneti cet maivaṁ maṇḍalasya

sārvajanīnapratyakṣasiddhatvena tatra smṛtyādyanupayogāt,

kālavivakṣayevātra kālanirvāhakamaṇḍale tānyupanyastāni, tathā ca

maṇḍaladvārā kālaḥ pramīyate . kālavivakṣā cottaramantreṣvatisphuṭā

tatrānantaro mantraevamāmnāyate, sūryo marīcimādatte

sarvasmādbhuvanādadhi, tasyāḥ pākaviśeṣeṇa smṛtaṁ kālaviśeṣaṇamiti

tasyāyamarthaḥ . bhuvanagataṁ

sarvabhūtajātamadhikṛtyarasavīryapākādibhistattadanugrahasamarthaṁ

marīciṁ sūryaṁ svīkaroti tatkṛtena bhūtapākabhedena nimeṣādiḥ

parārdhaparyantaḥ kālavibhedo’smābhiravagato bhavatīti . kālaprati

pādakāni ca smṛtyādītyudāharāmaḥ . tatra manuḥ kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñceti

sṛṣṭiprakaraṇe kālaṁ vyavajahāra . yājñavalkyo’pi, śrāddhakālaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ iti . evamanyāsvapi smṛtiṣūdāhāryam . śrutiṣvapi kṛtaṁ svapne

vicinoti kālaḥ iti bahvṛcāḥ . ahameva kālonāhaṁ kālasyeti taittirīyāḥ . kā

ca sandhyā kaśca sandhyāyāḥ kāla iti sāmagāḥ . yogaśāstre’pi

saṁyamaviśeṣāddhāraṇādhyānasamādhitrayarūpādyogino’tītādikālaṁ

pratyakṣataḥ paśyantīti abhihitam tathā ca pātañjalabhūtram

pariṇāmatrayasaṁyamādatītānāgatādijñānamiti . sāṁkṣipratakṣamapi,

ahamasminakāle nivasāmi, ityanubhavastāvatsārvajanīnaḥ . na cāsau

bāhyendriyakṛtaḥ kālasya rūpādihīnatvāt . nāpi

mānasastārkikaistadanaṅgīkārāt . nāpyanumānādijanyaḥ

aparokṣapratyayatvāt . ataḥ

sāmagryabhāva’pyaparokṣadarśanātsākṣipratyakṣametadityaupaniṣadām

anyante . itihāse’pi mahābhārate praharau ghaṭikānyūnau praharau

ghaṭikādhikau . sa kālaḥ kutapojñeya pitṝṇāṁ, dattamakṣayamiti .

purāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavānkālo’santā’jaraḥ paraḥ iti śiṣṭāśca

paurṇamāsyākhyakāle svasvakalocitān devaviśeṣebhyaḥ

kṣīradadhyādisamarpyaṇādikāndharmaviśeṣānbhānuvārādikālaviśeṣe ca

samācaranti . tadevamanekapramāṇapramite kāle

pramāṇābhāvarūpaścaturthaḥ pakṣaḥ kathamāśaṅkyeta? . nāpi

prayojanābhāvāditi pañcamaḥ pakṣo yujyate . tārkikaistāṣat

sarvotpattinimittakāraṇatvamuddhoṣitam . loke

kṛṣyādyupayogaḥḥkālaviśeṣya kṛṣīvalādibhirvyavahriyate .

gṛhapraveśaprayāṇādyupayogo jyotiḥśāstraprasiddhaḥ .

śrautasmārtakarnopayogastu pradarśayiṣyate . tasmāt

sāṁkhyaśraddhājāḍyakṛtasrava pradveṣa ityayaṁ ṣaṣṭaḥ pakṣaḥ

pariśipyate . tathāca pāpā tmanaḥ svasya budbyaparādhaṁ puṇyātmani

mādhavācārye samāro payan kayā vā śikṣayā na daṇḍyo’si . tadevaṁ

kālasyapratyā khyātumaśakyatvānnirṇayodyamaḥ saphala iti sthitam .

nanu katarakālo’tra nirṇīyate . kiṁ kevalaḥ kālaḥ kiṁ vā kālakālaḥ . nanu

kimityaprasiddhabhāṣayā bhīṣayasi, na bhīṣayāmyahaṁ kiñcāstyeva

kalayitavyabhedātkāladvaividhyam . yena

prāṇidehādayo’tītavartamānādirūpeṇa kalayitavyāḥ sa kevalaḥ kālaḥ . sa

ca tattvaprakāśavacanena pūrvam udāhṛtaḥ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti

. tādṛśo’pi kāryotpattisthitivināśakāriṇā yena kalayitavyaḥ sa kālakāla iti .

sa ca vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇedaśitaḥ kāle pi kalyte yeneti śrutiśca bhavati sa

viśvakṛdviśvavidātma yonirjñaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidyaḥ

pradhānakṣatrajñaḥ iti guṇī sasāramokṣasthitibandhaheturiti ca

kūrmapurāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavān kālo’nanto’jaraḥ paraḥ . sarvagatvāt

svatantratvāt sarvātmatvānmaheśvaraḥ . brahmāṇo bahavo rudrā anye

nārāyaṇādayaḥ . ekohi bhagavānīśaḥ kālaḥ kaviriti smṛtaḥ .

brahmanārāyaṇeśānāṁ trayāṇāṁ prākṛtolayaḥ . procyate kālayogena

punareva ca sambhavaḥ . paraṁ brahma ca bhūtāni vāsudevo’pi śaṅkaraḥ

. kālenaiva ca sṛjyante saeva grasate punaḥ . tasmāt kālatmakaṁ viśvaṁ

sa eva parameśvaraḥ iti . viṣṇudharmottare’pi . anādinidhanaḥ kālo

rudraḥ saṅkarṣaṇaḥ smṛtaṁ . kalanātsarvabhutānāṁ sa kālaḥ parikīrtitaḥ

. karṣaṇāt sarvabhūtānāṁ sa tu saṅkaṣaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ .

sarvabhūtaśamitvācca sa rudraḥ parikīrtitaḥ anādinidhanatvana sa mahān

parameśvara iti jyotiḥśa stre’pi bhūtānāmantakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ

kalanātmakā iti . tatraivaṁ sati dvayormadhye kālakālotra na nirṇetaka

tasya dharmānuṣṭhāneṣvahetutvema heyatvādanupādeyatvācca .

yastvitaro māsapakṣatithyādirūpaḥ so’pi jyotiḥśāstre samyaṅnirṇīta iti

kṛtamanayā kālanirṇayapravṛttyeti prāpte brūmaḥ umayamapyatra

nirṇetavyaṁ kālakālasya jagadīśvarasya sarveṣu karmārambheṣu

anusmartavyatvāt ataeva śiṣṭāḥ puṇyāhavācanādāvīśvaramanusmaranti .

sarveṣu kāleṣu samasta deśeṣvaśeṣakāryeṣu tayeśvareśvaraḥ .

sarvaiḥsvarūpairbhagavānanādimānmamāstu māṅgalyavivṛddhaye hariḥ .

yasya smṛtyā ca nāmoktyā tapoyajñakriyādiṣu . nyūnaṁ saṁpūrṇatāṁ

yāti sadyovande tamacyutamiti . māsādirūpabhedasya tu svarūpeṇa

jyotiṣe nirṇītatve’pi śrautasmārtakarmaviśeṣeṇa saha kālasyāṅgāṅgibhāvī

nirṇetavyaḥ . yadyapyasau hemādiprabhṛtiṣu grantheṣu

nirṇītastathāpyanekatra viprakīrṇasyaikatra saṁgrahārthamatra yatnaḥ

kriyate . tadevaṁ cikīrṣitasya granyasya kālarūpo viṣayaḥ

saṁgraharūpaṁ prayojanaṁ cāstīti ayaṁ grantha ārabhyate . nityo

janyaśca kālau dvau tayorādyaḥ pareśvaraḥ . so’vāṅamanasagamyo’pi

dehī bhaktānukampayā nityakālasya parameśvaratve pramāṇaṁ

pūrvamevopanyastam . parameśvarasya cāvāṅmanasagocaratve sarve

vedāntāstadanusārismṛtipurāṇāni tattvavidanubhavaśca pramāṇam .

bhaktānugrāhimūrtisvīkāraśca ta lavakārākhye sāmavedaśākhāviśeṣe

kasyāṁ cidākhyāyikāyāmāmnāyate tasyāṁ hyāstyāyikāyāmevamuktam–

agnivāyvi ndrādayo devā īśvarānugṛhītāḥ sarvatra vijayamānāḥ

svakīyameva tatsāmarthyamityamimanyante sma . tān

bodhāyitumavāṅmanasagamyaṁ parameva brahma pūjyāṁ

cakṣurgamyāṁ kāñcinmūrtiṁ dhārayitvā prādurbabhūva . tayā saha

vādaṁ kṛtvāpi rājasacittāvagnivāyū tadbrahmatattvaṁ naiva bubudhāte

indrastu sātvika cittobubudhe iti . vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇe’pi śukropākhyāne

śukraṁ mṛtamavalokya tatpitā bhṛguḥ kruddho mārayitāraṁ kālaṁ

śapnumudyata tadānīṁ kālo’nugrahītumīdṛśena rūpeṇāvirbabhūveti

paṭhyate athākalitarūpo’sau kālaḥ kavalitaprajaḥ . ādhibhautikamāsthāya

vapurmunimupāyayau . bahupāśadharaḥ śrīmān kuṇḍalī kavacānvitaḥ .

ṛtuṣaṭkamayodāravaktraṣaṭkasamanvitaḥ .

māsadvādaśakoddāsabhujadvādaśakodbhaṭaḥ . svākārasamayā bahvyā

vṛtaḥ kiṅkarasenaya . sa upetya praṇamyādau kupitaṁ taṁ mahāmunim .

kalpakṣubdhāvdhigambhīraṁ sāntvapūrvamuvāca h . tvamatyantatapā

vipra! vayaṁ niyatiprālakā tena saṁpūjyase pūjya . sādho! netaravīkṣayā

. mā tapaḥ kṣapayā’buddha! kalpakālamahānalaiḥ . yo na dagdho’smi me

tasya kiṁ tvaṁ śapena dhakṣyasi? . saṁsārāvalayo grastā

nigīrṇārudrakoṭayaḥ . bhuktāni viṣṇuvṛndāni kena śaptā vayaṁ mune! .

bhoktāro hivayaṁ brahman bhojanaṁ yuṣmadādayaḥ . svayaṁ niyatireṣā

hi nāvayoretadokṣitamiti . na ca bhaktānujighṛkṣayā svekṛtā

mūrtirīdṛśyeveti kaścinniyamosti sarvātmakasya parameśvarasya

bhaktacittapriyāyāḥ sarvasyā api mūrte svakīyatvāt ataeva

bhagavadgītāyām yo yo yāṁ yāṁ tanu bhaktaḥ śraddhayārcitumicchati .

tasya tasyācalāṁ śraddhāṁ tāmeva vidadhāmyaham . sa tayā śraddhayā

yuktastasyā rādhanamīhate . labhate ca tataḥ kāmān mayaiva vihitān

hitāniti . viṣṇurudrādivat acetanamūrtayo’pi

tattatphalaviśaṣārthibhirośvaratvenopāsyāḥ . tadetadṛgvede

samāmnāyate . etaṁ hyeva bahvyaca mahatyukthe mīmāṁsa

ntaetamagnāvadhvaryava, etaṁ mahāvratecchandogā, etamasyām

(pṛthivyām) etaṁ divyetaṁ vāyāvetamākāśa etamoṣadhīṣvetaṁ

vanaspatiṣvetaṁ chandasyetaṁ nakṣatreṣvetaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣviti

vājasaneyino’pi maṇḍalabrāhmaṇe tametamagnimadhvaryava upāsata

ityāramya paṭhanti viṣamiti sarpāḥ, sarpa iti sarpavidaḥ, urgiti devaḥ,

rayiriti manuṣyāḥ, māyetyamurāḥ, svadheti pitaro, devajana iti

devajanavido rūpamiti gandharvā, gandhaityapsarasastaṁ

yathāyathopāsate tadeva bhavatīti . taittirīyāśca paṭhanti kṣema iti vāci,

yogakṣemam iti prāṇāpānayorityādi . parabrahmaṇyāropitaṁ

yadyāvajjagadrūpam asti tena sarveṇaḥpyupāsanayā parameśvaro

rūpavānbhavatītihiraṇmayādhikaraṇatejomayādhikaraṇayoḥ prapañcitam .

evaṁ ca sati yo yadā yatkarmārabhate sa tadā tatkarmopayuktāṁ

kālātmakasyeścarasya mūrtimiṣṭadevaṁtārūpeṇānusmaret . ata eva

mantraśāstreṣu nānāvidhāni dhyānānyupadiṣṭāni .

loke’pyāvidvadāgopālāṅganaṁ sarvo’pi jana ekaikāṁ devatāṁ svecchayā

pūjayati tadetadbhagavānāha yajante sātvikādevān yakṣarakṣāṁsi

rājasāḥ pretān bhūtagaṇāṁścānthe yajante tāmasā janāḥ iti tasma

dārabhyamāṇakarmaphalapradonijeṣṭadevatārūponityaḥ kālaḥ

karmārambheṣu anusmartavya iti siddham .

atha janyaṁ kālaṁ nirūpayāmaḥ . nanu kālasya janyatve sati kathaṁ

pralaye kālavyavahāraḥ . pralayatvasya janyānadhikaraṇatvarūpatvāt .

pralayo’tītaḥ pralayobhāvīti kālanityatvavādinastavāpi samodoṣaḥ .

nityasya kālasya tapanaparisyandādyupādhibhiḥ paricchede satyetāvān

kāla iti kāleyattā varṇayitavyā . na ca pralaye tadupādhayaḥ santi .

atastava kathaṁ pralayakāle iyattānirṇayaḥ . atha

satkāryavādābhyupagamenopādhayo’pi vāsanā rūpeṇa santi tarhi kāle’pi

tatsamānaṁ, na caitāvatā nityatāprāptiḥ upādhiṣu tadanaṅgīkarāt . atha

manyase iyattārahite’pi pralayakāle sṛṣṭikāleyattāvāsanāvaśādiyattā

vyavahriyate . tatropādhyāyatvādirdṛṣṭāntaḥ . yathā kaścinmāṇavakaḥ

triṁśadvarṣavayaskādadhyetumupakramya

saṁvatsaramadhītyāsmadupādhyāya ekatriṁśadvarṣavayaska

ityadhyayanarahite’pyatote vayasyvapādhyāyatvaṁ vyavaharati .

tadvadiyattāvyavahāraḥ . evaṁ tarhyanena nyāyena kālarahitapralaye

kālavyavahāraḥ kiṁ na syāt? . kālarahitaṁ ca pralayādikaṁ vastvastoti

māṇḍūkyādiśrutayo’bhyupra gacchanti . tathā ca śrūyate,

yaccānyattrikālātītaṁ tadapyoṅkāra eveti . prābhākarāścāpūrvasya

kālatrayāsaṁsṛṣṭāṅkāñcidavasthābhāhuḥ . tasmātkālaḥ sukhena

janyatāṁ sa ca sāmānyaviśeṣābhyāndvividhaḥ . tasya

cobhayavidhasyeśvarākhyānnityātkālādutpattiṁ manurāha kālaṁ

kālavibhaktiñca nakṣatrāṇi grahāṁstathā . sṛṣṭiṁ sasarja caivemāṁ

sraṣṭumicchannimāḥ prajāḥ iti . tatra yaḥ sāmānyakālaḥ sa

viśeṣānugatatvāttadapekṣayā nityograhagatyādibhiranumeyo

bhūtotpattinimittakāraṇamiti tārkikajyautiṣikādayaḥ pratipedire . tatra

jyautiṣikā evamāhuḥ prabhavaviratibhadhyajñānabandhyā nitāntaṁ

viditaparamatattvā yatra te yogino’pi . tamahamiha nimittaṁ

viśvajanmātyayānāmanumitamabhivande bhagrahaiḥ kālamīśam .

yugavarṣamāsadivasāḥ samaṁ pravṛttāstu caitraśuklādeḥ .

kālo’yamanādyanto graharbharanumīyate kṣetra iti kālaviśeṣeṣu ca

saṁvatsaraḥ prādhānabhūtaḥ . anye sarve guṇabhūtāḥ .

tathācāruṇaketuke samāmnāyate nada va prabhavā kācidakṣayyā

syandate yathā . tāṁ nadyobhisamāyanti saha, sā na nivartate . evaṁ

nānāsamutthānāḥ kālāḥ saṁvatsaraṁ śritāḥ . aṇuśaśca

mahāntaścasarvesamavayanti tam . sa taiḥ sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭa ūhaḥ

sanna nivartate iti . ayamarthaḥ . bhāgīrathīgodāvaryādikā nadīva kālaḥ

kutaścidutpattisthānādutpadyate . taccotpattisthānaṁ sāṁkhyoktaṁ

prakṛtiḥ śivāgamoktamāyā vā śrutismṛtyuditā nityakālātmaka īśvaro vā

bhaviṣyati . yathā tāṁ gaṅgādikāṁ mahānadī manyāṁ

svalpanadyo’bhitaḥ praviśanti sā ca praviṣṭairnadyantaraiḥ saha vistīrṇā

pravahatpravāhā satī na kadācit śuṣyati . evaṁ nānāvidharūpaiḥ

samutpannāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁvatsarākhyaṁ pradhānaṁ kālamāśritāḥ .

tatra nimeṣādyā ayanaparyantāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁsatsarādaṇavo,

yugādyāḥ parārdhaparyantāḥ saṁvatsarānmahāntaste sarve taṁ

saṁvatsaraṁ samyak praviśanti . aṇū nāmavayavatvena praveśaḥ .

mahatāntu saṁvatsarāvṛttiniṣpādyānāmadhyakṣaḥ saṁvatsaraiti tatra

praveśo’bhidhīyate . tathāca yedāṅgajyotiṣagranthe paṭhyate

pañcasaṁyatsaramayaṁ yugādhyakṣaṁ prajāpatim .

dinartvayanamāsāṅga praṇamya śirasā sthita iti . sa ca

saṁvatsarasteraṇubhirmahadbhiśca sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭo’tidīrghaḥ

sannasmin jagati ta cchidyata iti . nanvaṇutvaṁ nimeṣe paryavasitaṁ

mahattvotu parārdhe tathā ca tayoranyatarasya prādhānyamucitam .

tatra kathaṁ saṁvatsarasya prādhānyam? iti cet īśvareṇa prathamaṁ

sṛṣṭatvāditi brūmaḥ . tathā ca vājasaneyinaḥ samāmananti so’kāmayata

dvitīyoma ātmājāyeteti sa manasā vācā mithunaṁ samabhavadyattadreta

āsīt sa saṁvatsaro’bhavaditi . tasmātsaṁvatsaraḥ pradhānam, ataeva

vayaṁ saṁvatsarabhāramya kālaviśeṣaṁ nirṇayāmaḥ . tatra

saṁvatsaro’yanamṛturmāsaḥ pakṣaḥ tithirnakṣatraṁ yoga ityevaṁ vidhāḥ

karmakālāḥ . yadyapi purāṇaṣu mṛtyumārkaṇḍeyādīnāṁ

yugādikalpādiparimitaṁ tapaḥ smaryate tathāpi śatasaṁvatsarāyuṣo

manuṣyānadhikṛtya dharmaśāstrapravṛtteḥ yugādinirṇayonoyayuktaḥ .

śāstrāṇāṁ manuṣyādhikāratvaṁ cāsmābhiḥ pārāśarasmṛtivyākhyāne

manuṣyāṇāṁ hitaṁ dharmam ityasminvacane prapañcitam . yetu kalau

pañca vivarjayet ityādayomanuṣyadharmāsteṣvapi na yugādikaṁ

nirṇetavya saṁdehābhāvāt . na ca śatāyuṣāmadhikāre kathaṁ

sahasrasaṁvatsarasatraśrutiriti śaṅkanīyam tatra

saṁvatsaraśabdodivasapara iti ṣaṣṭhādhyāye sapnamapādenirṇītatvāt .

ye’pi caturdaśasavatsarāvṛttisādhyā anantavratādayasteṣvapi na

saṁvatsarādhikaḥ kaścitkālo nirṇetavyo’sti . ataḥ

saṁvatsaramārabhyāvāṁñca eva nirṇetavyāḥ karmāṅakālāḥ . na ca

kālasya karmāṅgatve vivaditavyam sāyaṁ buhoti prātarjahotītiḥ śruteḥ

tattatkarmaṇastāvadapūrvaviṣayatvāt (apūrvajanakatvāt,

prādhānyamabhyugamya tathā ca kālasya guṇatvenānvayaḥ pariśiṣyate

ataeva gargaḥ tithinakṣatravārādi sādhanaṁ puṇyapāpayoḥ .

pradhānaguṇabhāvena svātasthyeṇa na te kṣamāḥ iti .

tasmādaṅgabhūteṣa nirṇeyeṣa kāleṣvavayavitvena

saṁvatsarasyābhyarhitatvādalpavaktavyatayā sūcīkaṭāhanyāyānusāreṇa

ca saeva ādau nirṇīyataitisthitam . sū° si° raṅga° kālavibhāgaścetthaṁ

pradarśitaḥ

lokānāmamakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ . sa dvidhā

sthūlasūkṣmatvānmūrtaścāmūrta ucyate sū° si° . kālo dvidhā tatraikaḥ

kālo’khaṇḍadaṇḍāyamānaḥ śāstrāntarapramāṇasiddhaḥ . lokānāṁ

jīvānāmupalakṣaṇādacetanānāmapi . antakṛdvināśakaḥ . yadyapi

kālasteṣāmutpattisthitikārakastathāpi vināśasyānantatvāt

kālatvapratipādanāya cāntakṛdityuktam .

antakṛdityanenaivotpattisthitikṛdityaktamanyathā nāśakatvāsambhavāt .

ataeva kālaḥ sṛjati bhūtāni kālaḥ saṁharati prajāḥ ityādyuktaṁ

granthāntare . anyo dvitīyaḥ kālaḥ khaṇḍakālaḥ . kalanātmako

jñānaviṣayasvarūpaḥ . jñātuṁśakyaityarthaḥ . sa dvitīyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ

kālo’pi dvidhā bhedadvayātmakaḥ . tadāha sthūlasūkṣmatvāditi

mahattvāṇutvābhyām . mūrtaḥ–iyattāvacchinnaparimāṇaḥ .

amūrtastadbhinnaḥ kālatattva vidbhiḥ kathyate . cakāro hetukrameṇa

mūrtāmūrtakramārthakaḥ . tena mahān mūrtakālo’ṇṛramūrtaḥ kāla

ityarthaḥ . athoktaṁ bhedadvayaṁ svarūpeṇa pradarśayan

prathamabhedaṁ pratipipādayiṣustadavāntarabhedeṣu bhedadvayamāha

raṅganāthaḥ . prāṇādiḥ kathito mūrtastruṭyādyo’mūrtasañjñakaḥ .

ṣaḍabhiḥ prāṇairvināḍī syāt tatṣaṣṭhyā nāḍikā smṛtā sū° si° .

prāṇaḥ svasthasukhāsīnasya śvāsocchāsāntarvartī kālo

daśagurvakṣaroccāryamāṇa ādiryasyaitādṛśaḥ prāṇanāntargato mūrtaḥ

kāla uktaḥ . truṭirādyā yasyaitādṛśaḥ kāla eva

prāṇāntargatastraṭitatparādiko’mūrtasañjñaḥ . athāmūrtasya

mūrtādibhūtasya vyadhahārāyogyatvenāpradhānatayānantaroddiṣṭasya

bheda pratipādanamupekṣya mūrtakālasya vyavahārayogyatvena

pradhānatayā prathamoddiṣṭabhedān vivakṣuḥ prathamaṁ

palaghaṭyāvāha . ṣaḍbhiriti . ṣaḍabhiḥprāṇairasubhiḥ pānīyapalaṁ bhavati

palānāṁ ṣaṣṭhyā caṭikoktā kālatattvajñaiḥ . atha dinamāsādikamāha

raṅga° .

nāḍīṣaṣṭyā tu nākṣatramahorātraṁ prakīrtitam . tattriṁśatā

bhavenmāsaḥ sāvano’rkodayaignathā .

aindavastithibhistadvat saṅkrāntyā saura ucyate .

māsairdvādaśabhirvarṣaṁ divyaṁ tadaharucyate .

surāsurāṇāmanyo’nyamahorātraṁ viparyavāt . tatṣaṣṭiḥ ṣaḍguṇā 360

divyaṁ varṣamāsurameśa ca .

taddvādaśa sahasrāṇi caturyugamudāhṛttam . sūryābdasaṅkhyayā

dvitrisāgarairayutāhataiḥ 4320000 .

sandhyāsandhyāṁśasahitaṁ vijñeyaṁ taccaturyugam . kṛtādīnāṁ

vyavastheyaṁ dharmapādavyavasthāyā . yugasya daśamo

bhāgaścatustridvyekasaṅguṇaḥ . kramāt kṛtayugādīnāṁ, ṣaṣṭhāṁśāḥ

sandhayaḥ svakāḥ .

yugānāṁ saptatiḥ saikā manvantaramihocyate . kṛtābdasaṅkhya

1728000 stasthānte sandhiḥ proktojalaplavaḥ .

sasandhayaste manavaḥ kalpe jñenyāścaturdaśa . kṛtapramāṇaḥ

kalpādau sandhiḥ pañcadaśaḥ smṛtaḥ .

ityaṁ yugasahasreṇa bhūtasahārakārakaḥ . kalpo brāhmamahaḥ

proktaṁ śarvarī tasya tāvatī .

paramāyuḥ śataṁ tasya tayā’horātnasaṅkhyayā . āyuṣordhamitaṁ

tasya śeṣe kalpoyamādimaḥ sū° si° . aharādikālabhedāḥ (ahan) śabde

uktāḥ .

si° śi° tu nimeṣatatparatruṭirūpāḥ sūkṣmāḥ kālāvayavāḥ darśitāḥ

tasya vākyaṁ 1788 pṛ° darśitam . sa ca kālastrividhaḥ

vartamānabhūtabhaviṣyadbhedāt tatra bhūtabhaviṣyat kālāvapi

pratyekaṁ dvidhā adyatanānadyatanabhedāt tadbhedenaiva

lakāraviśeṣaṁ pāṇiniranuśaśāsa .

so’yaṁ kālaḥ ṣaḍindriyavedyaḥ iti mīmāṁsakā manyante na so’sti

pratyayoloke yatra kālo na bhāsate iti teṣāmukteḥ . vedāntinastu tasya

sākṣipratyayabhāsyatvamaṅgīcakruḥ tatra pramāṇaṁ kālamā°

anupadameva darśitam . so’yaṁ kālaḥ

deśavṛttaravyāpyavṛttitāniyāmakaḥ . tathāhi yaḥ padārthaḥ

svādhikaraṇavṛttyabhāvapratiyogī so’vyāpyavṛttiriti bhaṇyate

tattānirvāhakaśca kālodeśaśca . kvaciddeśe sthitasya tādṛśapadārthasya

kālabhedena tatraivādhikaraṇe’bhāvastiṣṭhati yathā jñānāśraye ātmani

suṣuptikāle icchādiviśeṣaguṇāntarakāle ca jñānābhāvaḥ . yathā vā

guṇavati janyadravye utpattikāle guṇābhāvaḥ śyāmale apakve ghaṭe

raktatvābhāvaḥ raktatvasya pākīttaraṁ jāyamānatvāt . kālasattva ca

deśo’pi tathā . yathā ātmani jñānakāle śarārāvacchedena jñānaṁ,

ghaṭādyavacchedena tadabhāvaḥ . tathā vṛrkṣa kapisaṁyogakāle’pi mūle

tadabhāvaḥ . kālena kṛtasambandhaśca kālikasambandhaḥ tena

sambandhena sarveṣu janyabhāveṣu janyabhāvānāṁ vṛttimattā nityeṣu

gu kālikasambandhena na kasyāpi sattvam

nityānuyogikakālikatambanyānupagamāt iti naiyāyikāḥ . tasya ca

pauruṣaṁ daivasampāyā kāle phalati pārthiva! . trayametanmanuvyasya

piṇḍitaṁ syāt phalāvaham ityukteḥ kāryamātre nimittakāraṇatā . yadyapi

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge dṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcaneti śāstrāntareṇa tattatkālānāmeva

yattatkāryotpattau hetutā ‘dhigatā tathāpi yadviśeṣayoḥ

kāryakāraṇabhāvastatsāmānyayorapīti nyāyāt sāmānyataḥ kāryamātraṁ

prati kālasāmānyasya hetutvam . kālaḥ krīḍati gacchatyāyustadapi na

muñcatyāśāvāyuḥ mohamu° . kāle bhavaḥ ṭhañ . kālika kālabhave tri°

samāsapratyayabidhau pratiṣedho vaktavyaḥ bā° ukteḥ

tadantavidhiparibhāṣāyāḥ apravṛtteḥ kālāntaśabdānnāsya pravṛttiḥ tena

tadanta śabdāt khaeva sādhuḥ samānakānīnaḥ prākkālīna ityādi

bhūriprayogāt . si° kau°

samānakālonaprākkālonaśabdayoraprāmāṇikatoktiḥ prauḍhoktireva

udāhṛtavārtikasya jāgarūkatvāt iti gauḍāāhuḥ . pratīcyāstu

kaumudīkāraśraddhāvaśāt ṭhañvidhāyakasūte

kālasāmānyatadviśeṣaparyāyāṇāṁ grahaṇāt samānakālaprākkālayorapi

kālaviśeṣatvena tataḥ ṭhañeva pravṛttirna khasyeti bhāṣyādiprayogastu

ārṣatvāt samādheyaḥ iti manyante . kālena nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ kālika

kālasādhye tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . kartustātkālikī śuddhiriti smṛtiḥ tatra

tatkālaśabdasyaiva ṭhañaḥ prakṛtitvāt tena na pūrvoktavārtikasaṅkocaḥ

ataeva tatra tacchabdasyaivādyacovṛddhiḥ tena nivṛttamityadhikārāt

prakṛtimātrasyaiva grahaṇāt na kālatvena tatraprakṛtitā . kāle sādhuḥ

puṣyan pacyamāno vā aṇ . kāla–kāle sādhau kāle yikaśa māne kāle

pacyamāne ca tri° . atra sūtre kālaviśeṣasyaiva grahaṇaṁ na svarūpasya

tena na tato’ṇ ityanye . kālaḥ prāpto’sya yat . kālya prāptakāle śītādau

tri° kālodevatā’sya kālebhyobhavavat pā° ṭhañ . kālika kāla devatāke

havirādau striyāṁ ṅīp . 15 tattatkarmocitakāle varamekāhutiḥ kāle nākāle

lakṣakoṭayaḥ tri° ta° . akāle’pyatha vā kāle gaṅgāṁ prāpya saridvarām

prā° ta° . kāle kālakṛto naśyet phalabhogyo na naśyati yā° smṛ° .

ardhayāmaśabde 376 pṛ° darśite ravyādivāreṣu kālavelākhye 16

divāniśorardhayāmabhede yātrāyāṁ maraṇaṁ kāle vaidhavyaṁ

pāṇipīḍane . brate brahmabadhaḥ proktaḥ sarvaṁ karma tatastajet jyo°

ta° tasya sarvakarmasu varjyatāmāha 17 sāṁkhyīkte meghāsvye

vivekasākṣātakārāntarāye tuṣṭibhede yathā ādhyātmikyaścatasraḥ

prakṛtyupādānakālabhāgyākhyāḥ . bāhyāviṣayoparamāt pañca, nava

tuṣṭayobhavanti sā° kā0

yā tu pravrajyāpi na sadyonirvāṇadeti saiva kālaparipākamapekṣya

siddhinte vidhāsyati alamuttaptatayā tavetyapadeśe yā tuṣṭiḥ sā kālākhyā

megha (1) ucyate kau° . vivṛtañjaitadasmābhiḥ . pravrajyāmātrasya

vivekakhyātihetutve prabrajyāgrahaṇamātreṇa vivekakhyātyāpattirūpam

upadeśe asattavaprayojakaṁ dūṣaṇam sahakāryantarāpekṣākalpanāt

pariharannupadeśāntaraṁ darśayati na sadyo nirvāṇadeti . sadyaḥ,

grahaṇamātrāt na tu kālarūpasahakāryantarāpekṣaṇāta na nirvāṇadā

vivekakhyātijananadvārā na muktidetyarthaḥ . tathā ca

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge vṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcana iti śāstreṇa kāryamātraṁ prati kālasya sahakāritāyā

anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ ca prasiddhatvāt kālasyaiva taddhetutvamastu

kṛtaṁ dhyānābhyasādineti samuditārthaḥ .

kālasyasādhanatāsādhakaśāstreṇa kṛṣyādeḥ pradhāna phalahetutvaṁ

tatra kālasya sahakāritāmātraṁ pratipāditaṁ na tu tanmātrasya

hetutvamevañca kālasya sādhāraṇakāraṇatvam asādhāraṇakāraṇatvantu

kṛṣyādereva evañca prakṛte’pi vivekakhyātiṁ prati

dhyānābhyāsāderevārādpakārakatvāt asādhāraṇahetutvaṁ, kālasya

sādhāraṇahetutvamityasyāsadudhadeśatva miti bodhyam iti .

varsavācikālaśabdasya striyāṁ janapadā° ni° ṅīṣ . kālī kākālī

kāmadhurā kāśītalavāhino gaṅgā . bidagdha mu° samānapraśnottaram .

18 hiṁsake tri° tataḥ striyāṁ na ṅīṣ . kālāt vaṇṇaścet vārtikokteḥ .

kālānyā si° kau° . kālasyeyam aṇ ṅīp kālasya patnī ṅīṣ vā . kālī kālaśaktau

śivakāntāyāñca strī . adhikaṁ kālīśabde vakṣyate . 19 mṛtyau medi°

sarvasyāgrahaṇānāttasya tathātvam . aśumāṁśca tapastepe

gaṅgānayanakāmyayā . kālaṁ mahāntaṁ nāśaknīt tataḥ kālena

saṁsthitaḥ . dilīpastatsutastadbadaśaktaḥ kālameyikān bhāga° 9 9 2 3 1

kālaṁ mṛtyum śrīdharaḥ .

varṇavācakāt tasya bhāva ityarthe imanic kāliman pu° tal kālatā strī,

tva kālatva na° . kṛṣṇavarṇe . tatra yame upetya muniveśo’tha kālaḥ

provāca rāghavam raghuḥ . yamaparatve 20 dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 21

tatsaṁkhyānvite ca bharaṇyāyamadaivatatvāt tasyāśca

aśvinyādinakṣatracakre dvitīyatvāt lakṣitalakṣaṇayā tatparatvam .

śivaparatve 22 ṣaṭsaṁkhyāyāṁ 23 tadanvate ca śivadaivatārdrāyā

aśvinyādiṣu ṣaṣṭhatvāduktarītyā tathātvam . ṛṇidhanicakraśabde 1428 pṛ°

darśitaṁ ṣaṭkālakāletyādi vākyam udā° kālasya velā ravitaḥ

śarākṣikālānalāgāmbudhayo gajendū jyo° ta° .

candrādigrahāṇāṁ dṛṣṭiyogyatāprāpakakālātmake 24 aṁśabhede ca .

sa ca si° śi° darśito yathā

dasrendavaḥ 12 śaulabhuvaśca 17 śakrā 14 rudrāḥ 11 khacandrā 10

stithayaḥ 15 krameṇa . candrāditaḥ kālalavā niruktāḥ

jñaśukrayorvakragayordvihīnāḥ si° śi° .

candrādīnāmene 12 . 17 . 14 . 11 10 . 15 . kālāṁśā jñeyāḥ .

budhaśukrayostu vakragatayordvihīnā 12 . 8 dvivarjitā jñeyāḥ .

atropapattiḥ . kālāṁśā iti kālātmakā aṁśāḥ ṣaḍbhira śairekā ghaṭikā .

ekasyāṁśasya daśa pānīyapalāni . atraitaduktaṁ bhavati . candrasya kila

dvādaśa 12 kālāṁśāḥ . arkasyāstamayādudayādvā

ghaṭikādvayādhike’ntare candro dṛṣṭiyogyo bhavati . tadūne

tatprabhācchāditatvādadṛśyaḥ . atastasya dvādaśa kālāṁśāḥ . evaṁ

bhaumasya saptadaśa 17 ṣaḍaṁśonāstisro ghaṭikāḥ 2 . 50 ityarthaḥ .

ebamanyeṣāṁ yathāpaṭhitāsteṣāṁ vimbasya sthūlasūkṣmatāvaśāt

nyūnādhikatā . ata eva budhaśukrayorvakragatayorvimbasya

sthūlatvāddvihīnāḥ . atropalabdhireva vāsanā prami0

yatrodayo vāstamayo’vagamyastaddigbhavo dṛkkhacaro raviśca .

astodayāsannadine kadācit sādhyastu paścāt taraṇiḥ saṣaḍbhaḥ si° śi° .

iha kendrabhāgairgrahasyodayo’stamayo vā yasmin dina

āyātastasyāsanne kasmiṁściddine taṁ grahaṁ raviṁ ca sphuṭaṁ kṛtvā

yasyāṁ diśi grahodayo’stamayo vā taddigbhavo dṛggrahaḥ kāryaḥ . yadi

prācyāṁ tadaudayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvodayalagnaṁ sādhyam . yadi ca

pratīcyāṁ tadāstamayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvāstalagnaṁ sādhyamityarthaḥ .

yadā pratīcyāṁ, tadāraviḥ saṣaḍbhaśca kāryaḥ .

idānīmiṣṭakālāṁśānayanamāha prami° .

dṛkkhecarārkāntarajātanāḍyo rasāhatāḥ kālalavāḥ syuriṣṭāḥ si° śi° .

dṛggrahārkayorantaraghaṭikāḥ sādhyāstā rasa 6 hatā iṣṭāḥ kālāṁśā

bhavanti . atha tairudayāstayorgataiṣyāḥ nāḍyaḥ prami° .

uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭāḥ kheṭodayo gamyagatastadā syāt .

ato’nyathā vā’stamayo’vagamyaḥ prokteṣṭakālāṁśaviyogaliptāḥ .

khābhrāṣṭabhū 1800 ghnādyucarodayāptāḥ

kheṭārkabhukyantarabhājitāśca . vakre tu bhuktyaikyahṛtā

avāptāstadantarāle divasā gataiṣyāḥ . tātkālikābhyāṁ ravidṛggrahābhyāṁ

muhuḥ kṛtāste sphuṭatāṁ prayānti si° śi° .

evaṁ ya iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāste proktebhyo yadi svalpā bhavanti tadā

grahasyodayo gamyaḥ . yadyadhikāstadā gata iti veditavyam .

ato’nyathāstamaya iti . atha proktāuktebhyoyadīṣṭāḥ svalpāstadā

grahasyāstamayogatoyadyadhikastadā gamya iti . atha

proktānāmiṣṭakālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstā aṣṭādaśaśatai 1800

rguṇyā dṛggrahākrāntasya rāśeḥ svadeśodayāsubhirbhājyāḥ .

phalakalānāṁ grahārkabhuktyantareṇa vakrage grahe bhuktiyogena

bhāge gṛhīte yallabdhaṁ te gatā eṣyā vādivasā bhavantyudaye

vāstamaye vā . tairdivasaistātkālikau dṛggrahārkau

kṛtvaivamasakṛtkarmaṇā samyak tatkālajñānaṁ bhavati .

atropapattiḥ . iṣṭakālāṁśasādhane lagnavāsanaiva . proktānāṁ

kālāṁśānāmanantarvartī graho dṛśyo bhavati . ato yāvadiṣṭā

nyūnāstāvadadṛśyaḥ . udaye vilokyamāne udeṣyati . aste

bilokyamāne’staṁ gata ityarthājjñāyate . iṣṭā yadyadhikāstadā

proktebhyo vilokyamāne’staṁgate bahirbhūtādgraho’dṛśya udaye

vilokyamāna uditaḥ astaṁ yāsyatītyarthājjñāyate . atha teṣāṁ

prokteṣṭānāṁ kālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstāsāṁ kṣetraliptīnāṁ

karaṇāyānupātaḥ . yāvatyaḥ kālakalāstāvanta evāsavo bhavanti . atha

yadi dṛggrahodayāsubhiraṣṭādaśaśatāni 1800 kṣetraliptā labhyante tadā

tadantarakalāsubhiḥ kimiti . phalaṁ kṣaitraliptāḥ . tā

grahārkabhuktyantareṇa bhājyāḥ . bhuktyantaraṁ hi

kṣetraliptāntarātmakamataḥ sajātīyakaraṇāya kṣetraliptīkaraṇam .

bhuktyantareṇaiko divaso labhyata iti yuktamuktam . vakre tu bhuktiyoga

eva bhuktyantaram . dūrāntare sthūlakālo bhavatītyasakṛtkarma

sūkṣmārtham . atra viśeṣamāha . prami0

prāgdṛggarhaścedadhiko raveḥ syādūno’tha vā paścimadṛggrahaśca .

prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhiḥ sādhyastadānīṁ divasāgataiṣyāḥ . tathā

yadīṣṭakālāṁśāḥ proktebhyo’bhyadhikāstadā . vyatyayaścagataiṣyatve

jñeyo’hnāṁ sudhiyā khalu si° śi0

yadi prāgdṛggraho raveradhiko bhavati . atha vā paścimadṛggraho

nyūno bhavati tadāye iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāsteṣāṁ proktānāṁ ca

yogakalābhirdivasāḥ sādhyāḥ . nāntarakalābhiḥ tathā

prāgdṛggrahe’rkādadhike sati paścāddṛggrahe vā nyūne ya iṣṭakālāṁśā

āgatāste ca yadi proktebhyo’dhikāntarāḥ tadā prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ

kalābhirye divasāḥ sādhitāsteṣāṁ divasānāṁ gataiṣyatve viparyayojñeyaḥ

.

atropapattiḥ . yo grahaḥprācyāmudeti pratitiṣṭhati vā asau raverūnaḥ

san praścimāyām adhikaḥ san prācyāṁ diśi proktakālāṁśairūnaḥ san

dṛśyatāmeti . tāvadbhireva paścimā yāmadhikaḥsan . ato raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ

prācyāṁ proktakālāṁśāḥ pratīcyāmagrataḥ . prācyāmūne grahe ya

iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ . ataḥ pṛṣṭhagataireva

proktakālāṁśaisteṣāmantaraṁ kartuṁ yujyate . atha prācyāṁ

raveradhike dṛggrahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveragrato bhavanti

. ato’gragatānāṁ pṛṣṭhagatānāñca kālāṁśānāṁ yoge kṛtesatyantaraṁ

kṛtaṁ bhavati tathā uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭā iti

yadgatagamyalakṣaṇamuktaṁ tat sajātīyānāmeva . yadā punareke

pṛṣṭhagatā eke’gragatāstadā tadgatagamyalakṣaṇaṁ vyatyayena bhavati

. ata uktaṁ vyatyayaśca gataiṣyatva ityādi . atra sudhiyeti

viśeṣaṇādubuddhimataidadanuktamapi jñāyate prami° . vyavahāre

vādiprativādinoḥ pratijñātārthasāghanāya rājñādeye 25 avasararūpe

samayabhede ca tatkālaviśeṣaḥ smṛtau darśito yathā pratyarthī labhate

kālaṁ tryahaṁ saptāhameva ca . arthī tu prārthayan kālaṁ tatkṣaṇādeva

hīyate . pratyarthino’pi kvacidviṣayena kālo deyaḥ

kvaciccārthipratyarthinoricchayā kālodeyaḥ yathāha yājña°

sāhasasteyapāruṣyago’bhiśāpātyaye striyām . vivādayet sadyaeva

kālo’nyatrecchayā smṛtaḥ .

samayarūpakālasya vaiśeṣikamate

saṁyogavibhāgapṛthaktvasaṁkhyāparimāṇarūpā pañca guṇāḥ . bhīmo

bhīmasenavat uttarapadalopaḥ . kāladaṇḍarūpe 26 yoge kāladaṇḍaśabde

udā° . vāraviśeṣe digbhedena jyotiṣokte yātrādau niṣiddhe 27 yogabhede

. sa ca yogaḥ mu° ci° uktaḥ . kauverīto vaiparītyena kālo’rkādye vāre

sammukhe tasya pāśaḥ . rātrāvetau vaiparītyena gamyau yātrā yuddhe

saṁmukhau varjanīyau . ayamaryaḥ . ravāvuttarasyāṁ kālaḥ, some

vāyavyāṁ, bhaume paścimāyām, budhe nairṛtyām, gurau dakṣiṇasyām,

śukre āgneyyāṁ, śanau pūrvasyām . ravāvuttarataḥ kālaḥ some

vāyavyabhāgake . bhaume tu paścime bhāge budhe nairṛtabhāgake . jīve

ca yāmyadigbhāge śukre cāgneyakoṇake . śanau tu pūrvadigbhāge

kālacakraṁ prakīrtitam . svarodaye yatrasthastatrakālaḥ syāt pāśastasya

tu sammukhaḥ . dakṣiṇasthaḥ śubhaḥ kālaḥ pāśo vāmadigāśrayaḥ .

yātrāyāṁ samare śreṣṭhastato’nyatra na śobhavaḥ . rātrau ca

vaiparītyena yathā ravau rātrau dakṣiṇasyāṁ kālaḥ uttarasyāṁ pāśa

ityādikrameṇetyūhyam . 28 kalāye (maṭara) śimbībhede, vaija° .

vikasatkalāyakusumam māghavyā° kālakusumamiti malli°

dhruvanāmakavasoḥ 29 putrabhede pu° . dhruvasya putro bhagavān kālo

lokaprakālanaḥ harivaṁ° 3 a° .

two months following the rainy season, autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kālaprabhāta (2. kāla + pra-) n. “Anbruch der” (wahren) “Zeit” d. i. “der

Herbst” (der auf die Regenzeit folgt) TRIK. 1, 1, 111.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kālaprabhāta na° kālaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ prabhātaṁyatra . śaradṛtau trikā° .

mf (“ā”) n. compact, solid, material, hard, firm, dense, i, 8, 3 (“ghanā”

for “-nam ā”) &c.

mf (“ā”) n. coarse, gross

mf (“ā”) n. viscid, thick, inspissated

mf (“ā”) n. full of (in comp.), densely filled with (in comp.)

mf (“ā”) n. uninterrupted

mf (“ā”) n. dark (cf. “-śyāma”)

mf (“ā”) n. deep (as sound; colour) xliii, 19

mf (“ā”) n. complete, all

mf (“ā”) n. auspicious, fortunate

ghana m. (= [characters]) slaying

ghana m. an iron club, mace, weapon shaped like a hammer, i, 33, 4; 36,

16; 63, 5; ix, 97, 16

ghana m. any compact mass or substance (generally ifc.) xiv &c. (said

of the foetus in the 2nd month

ghana ifc. mere, nothing but (e.g. “vijṇāna-ghana”, “nothing but

intuition” xiv) 5 viii f. (cf. “ambu-, ayo-“)

mf (“ā”) n. a collection, multitude, mass, quantity

mf (“ā”) n. vulgar people

mf (“ā”) n. a cloud &c. (ifc. f. “ā” 2660)

mf (“ā”) n. talc

mf (“ā”) n. the bulbous root of Cyperus Hexastachys communis

mf (“ā”) n. a peculiar form of a temple

mf (“ā”) n. a particular method of reciting the and Yajur-veda (cf.

p.409)

mf (“ā”) n. the cube (of a number), solid body (in geom.)

mf (“ā”) n. phlegm (“kapha”)

mf (“ā”) n. the body

mf (“ā”) n. extension, diffusion

ghana n. any brazen or metallic instrument or plate which is struck

(cymbal, bell, gong, &c.) 8688

ghana n. iron

ghana n. tin

ghana n. a mode of dancing (neither quick nor slow)

ghana n. darkness

ghana mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. closely iii 9

ghana n. (“dhvan”, to sound) deep

ghana n. very much

ghana mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of a stringed instrument

ghana n. Glycine debilis

ghana n. a kind of creeper

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ghana a. [han mūrtau ap ghanadeśaśca Tv].

(1) Compact, firm, hard, solid: saṁjāta śca ghanāghanaḥ Mal. 9. 39;

nāsā ghanāsthikā Y. 3. 89; R. 11. 18.

(2) Thick, close, dense; ghanāviralabhāvaḥ U. 2. 27; R. 8. 91; Amaru.

57.

(3) Thick-set, full, fully developed (as breasts); ghaṭayati ghasune

kucayugagagane mṛgamadarucirūṣite Gīt. 7; agurucatuṣkraṁ bhavati gurū

dvau ghanakucayugme śaśivadanā’sau Śrut. 8; Bh. 1. 8; Amaru. 28.

(4) Deep (as sound); Mal. 2. 12; Mu. 1. 21.

(5) Uninterrupted, permanent.

(6) Impenetrable.

(7) Great, excessive, violent.

(8) Complete.

(9) Auspicious, fortunate. (10) Coarse, gross.

(11) Engrossed by, full or replete with; Māl. 1. 32; nirvṛti- U. 6. 11. —

naḥ A cloud; ghanodayaḥ prāk tadanataraṁ payaḥ S. 7. 30;

ghanarucirakalāpo niḥsapatno’sya jātaḥ V. 4. 10.

(2) An iron club, a mace.

(3) The body.

(4) The cube of a number (in math.).

(5) Extension, diffusion.

(6) A collection, multitude, quantity, mass, assemblage.

(7) Talc

(8) Phlegm.

(9) Any compact mass or substance. (10) Hardness, firmness.

(11) A particular manner of reciting Vedic texts; thus the padas

namaḥ rudrebhyaḥ ye repeated in this manner would stand thus: –namo

rudrebhyo rudrebhyo namo namo rudrebhyo ye ye rudrebhyo namo namo

rudrebhyo ye. –naṁ

(1) A cymbal, a bell, a gong.

(2) Iron.

(3) Tin.

(4) Skin, rind, bark.

(5) A mode of dancing.

— Comp.

–atyayaḥ, –aṁtaḥ ‘disappearance of the clouds’, the season

succeeding the rains, autumn; (śarad); R. 3. 37.

–ajñānī N. of Durgā.

–aṁbu n. rain.

–ākaraḥ the rainy season.

–āgamaḥ, –udayaḥ ‘the approach of clouds’, the rainy season;

ghanāgamaḥ kāmijanapriyaḥ priye Rs. 2. 1.

–āmayaḥ the date-tree.

–āśrayaḥ the atmosphere, firmament.

–uttamaḥ the face.

–upalaḥ hail.

–oghaḥ gathering of clouds.

–kaphaḥ hail.

–kālaḥ the rainy season.

–garjitaṁ 1. thunder, peal or thundering noise of clouds, roar of

thunder. –2. a deep loud roar.

–golakaḥ alloy of gold and silver.

–ghataḥ the cube of a cube.

–jaṁbāla, thick mire.

–jvālā lightning.

–tālaḥ a kind of bird (sāraṁga). –tolaḥ the Chataka bird.

–dhātuḥ lymph.

–dhvani a. roaring. (

–niḥ) 1. a deep or low tone. –2. the muttering of thunder clouds;

Śi. 16. 25.

–nābhiḥ smoke (being supposed to be a principal ingredient in

clouds; Me. 5).

–nīhāraḥ thick hoar-frost or mist.

–padaṁ the cube root.

–padavī ‘the path of clouds’, firmament, sky;

krāmadbhirghanapadavīmanekasaṁkhyaiḥ Ki. 5. 34.

–pāṣaṁḍaḥ a peacock.

–phalaṁ (in geom.) the solid or cubical contents of a body or of an

excavation.

–mūlaṁ cube root (in math.).

–rasaḥ 1. a thick juice. –2. extract, decoction. –3. camphor. –4.

water (m. or n.).

–varaṁ the face.

–vargaḥ the square of a cube, the sixth power (in math.).

–vartman n. the sky; ghanavartma sahasradheva kurvan Ki. 5. 17.

–vallikā, –vallī lightning.

–vātaḥ a thick oppressive breeze or air.

–vīthiḥ the sky.

–śabdaḥ thunder, peal of thunder.

–vāsaḥ a kind of pumpkin gourd.

–vāhanaḥ 1. Śiva. –2. Indra.

–śyāma a. ‘dark like a cloud’, deep-black, dark. (

–maḥ) an epithet

(1) of Rāma,

(2) of Kṛṣṇa. –samayaḥ the rainy season. –sāraḥ 1. camphor;

ghanasāranīhārahāra &c. Dk.

(1) (mentioned among white substances). –2. mercury. –3. water.

–svanaḥ, –śabdaḥ, –svaḥ the roaring of clouds. –hastasaṁkhyā the

contents of an excavation or of a solid (in math).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ghana (von han) I) subj. 1) adj. subst. “der welcher erschlägt,

Zermalmer”: vṛtrāṇām ṚV. 3, 49, 1. 4, 38, 1. 1, 4, 8. 8, 85, 12. — 2) m.

“Knüttel, Keule” AV. 10, 4, 9. vadhīrhi dasyuṁ dhaninaṁ ghanena ṚV. 1,

33, 4. ā vajraṁ ghanā dadīmahi 8, 3. 36, 16. 63, 5. 9, 97, 16. “eine

hammerähnliche Waffe” AK. 2, 8, 2, 59. H. 785. an. 2, 262. MED. n. 3.

Vgl. ayoghana. — II) obj. 1) adj. f. ā (“fest zusammengeschlagen

u.s.w.”), = mūrta, nirantara, sāndra, dṛḍha AK. 3, 2, 15. 3, 4, 18, 113. H.

1447. H. an. MED. = pūrṇa, saṁpuṭa ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. a) “compact”:

kavalikā SUŚR. 1, 16, 8. “fest, hart”: granthi 257, 17. śopha 2, 44, 19.

vraṇa 2, 7. piṇḍa 1, 322, 7. nāsā ghanāsthikā YĀJÑ. 3, 89. śilāghane

tāḍakorasi RAGH. 11, 18. stanau BHARTṚ. 1, 17. CAURAP. 40. ŚRUT. 8.

GĪT. 7, 24. jaghana, ūru 10, 6. CAURAP. 15. AMAR. 28. PRAB. 101, 16.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 3. aṅguli 67, 43. “fest”, von Speisen SUŚR. 1, 241,

15. “zäh, dick”, von Flüssigkeiten und dergl. srāva 84, 9. 2, 363, 5. doṣa

345, 15. ghanayāṅgaṁ mṛdālipat KATHĀS. 24, 93. trapsyaṁ dadhi

ghanetarat AK. 2, 9, 51. ghanaṁ ghanapaṭalam BHARTṚ. 1, 43. udadhi,

vāta (Gegens. tanu) H. 1359. “dicht”, von einem Gewebe SUŚR. 1, 29, 8.

2, 197, 14. vana PAÑCAT. III, 188. 141, 16 (wo sughana für saghana zu

lesen ist). vṛkṣaiḥ VET. 6, 8. von Zähnen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 52.

atighanatarapatracchanna PAÑCAT. 148, 5. pulaka AMAR. 57. dhārā

PAÑCAT. 93, 2. dhūma MBH. 14, 1738. andhakāra R. 6, 19, 60. MṚCCH.

7, 11. PAÑCAT. 129, 18 (comparat.). timira I, 189. ŚIŚ. 4, 67. niśītha

AMAR. 69. “dick, voll von Etwas”, am Ende eines comp.:

jaladhārāghainarghanaiḥ MBH. 1, 5374. tamoghanāyāṁ niśi 13, 4047. hṛdi

śokaghane RAGH. 8, 90. “häufig auf einander folgend, ununterbrochen”:

gāṇḍīvasphuragurughanāsphālanakrūrapāṇi (vgl.

anavataradhanurjyāsphālana ŚĀK. 37) PAÑCAT. III, 237. — b) “dunkel”,

von Farben: ghanaruc “eine dunkle Hautfarbe habend” BHĀG. P. 4, 5, 3;

vgl. ghanaśyāma. — c) “tief”, von Tönen: gaurhambhāravaghanasvanā

MBH. 1, 6680. paraśorjarjaraśabdo neṣṭaḥ snigdho ghanaśca hitaḥ

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42 (43), 19. ghanam – dhvananti RĀJA-TAR. 5, 377. — d)

“zusammengefasst. ganz, all”: dhanam “das ganze Vermögen” UPAK. 24

(KATHĀS. 4, 26 eine ganz andere Lesart). ghanamapaśyataḥ (pāpasya)

“des Bösen, der nichts merkte” KATHĀS. 4, 53. — 2) m. a) “eine

compacte Masse, Klumpen u.s.w.”: saindhavaghana ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 3,

13. supuṣpite patraghane nilānaḥ R. 5, 16, 55. saṁdhyābhra- 6, 35, 12.

MBH. 3, 11555. keśa- HARIV. 4298. vom “Fötus im zweiten Monat” (vgl.

SUŚR. 1, 322, 7) NIR. 14, 6. VARĀH. L. JĀT. 3, 4 (nach dem Sch. n.).

rasa-, prajñāna-, vijñāna-, prajñā-, jīva- “ganz, nichts als” rasa, “ganz

Erkennen” u.s.w. ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 3, 13. 5, 4, 12. MĀṆḌ. UP. 5. PRAŚNOP.

5, 5. BHĀG. P. 8, 3, 12. 9, 8, 23. Vgl. ambughana, ayoghana. Nach den

Lexicographen: = mūrtiguṇa, dārḍhya, vistāra, saṁgha, ogha AK. 3, 4,

18, 113. H. an. MED. — b) “Wolke” AK. 1, 1, 2, 9. 3, 4, 18, 113. TRIK. 3,

3, 237. H. 164. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 5374. 12, 12405 (unterschieden von

jīmūta, ghanāghana, megha, balāhaka). DAŚ. 1, 15. R. 3, 61, 8. 4, 27, 23.

SUŚR. 1, 113, 19. MEGH. 20. 104. ŚĀK. 109. prativātaṁ na hi ghanaḥ

kadācidupasarpati PAÑCAT. III, 22. HIT. 34, 21. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 93. 6,

11. 21, 20. ghanacchannadṛṣṭirghanacchannamarkaṁ yathā niṣprabhaṁ

manyate VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 36. Am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā

HARIV. 2660. — c) “Talk” (wie auch andere Synonyme von “Wolke”; vgl.

abhra, abhraka und H. 1051) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “die knollige Wurzel

von Cyperus hexastachyus communis Nees.” (wie alle Synonyme von

“Wolke”; vgl. AK. 2, 4, 25. H. 1193) TRIK. 3, 3, 237. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 2,

421, 11. 431, 16. 485, 13. 515, 1. — e) “Phlegma, Schleim” (s. kapha)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) “Körper” H. 564. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “Kubus”

COLEBR. Alg. 10. 11. trighana = 3 x 3 x 3 = 27 VARĀH. L. JĀT. 1, 21. 13,

2. — h) “eine Art den” Veda “zu schreiben” COLEBR. Misc. Ess. I, 21.

Verz. d. B. H. No. 368. — 3) f. ghanā N. zweier Pflanzen: a) = māṣaparṇī.

— b) = rudrajaṭā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. a) “Schlaginstrument” AK. 1,

1, 7, 4. TRIK. 3, 3, 237. H. 286. H. an. MED. HARIV. 8688. — b) “Eisen”

H. 1037. — c) “Zinn” H. ś. 160. — d) = tvaca RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Eher “die

aromatische Rinde der Laurus Cassia” als “Rinde, Haut” überh., wie

WILSON annimmt. — e) “das gemässigte Tempo beim Tanz” AK. 1, 1, 7,

9. H. 292. H. an. MED. — III) nom. act. m. “das Erschlagen”: śreṣṭho

ghane vṛtrāṇāṁ sanaye dhanānām ṚV. 6, 26, 8.

ghana II) 1) a) sūtra “fest” Spr. 4000. viveka “derb, kräftig” 2971 (Conj.).

utsāhaika- (vīrahṛdaya) KATHĀS. 83, 39. Z. 13 lies 129, 8; Z. 14 lies

jaladhārāghanairghanaiḥ. — 2) a) mahābhra- R. 7, 6, 61. vom “Fötus”

WASSILJEW 236. — f) HALĀY. 2, 355. — g) yugānāṁ trighano (d. i.

“siebenundzwanzig” Juga) gataḥ SŪRYAS. 1, 22. 46. 70. — h) vgl. Ind. St.

3, 269.

ghana I) 2) “Hammer” Spr. (II) 4074. — II) 2) a) und b) pl. von Menschen

so v. a. “Pack” und zugleich “Wolken” Spr. (II) 6919. — h) Ind. Antiq.

1874, S. 133.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

ghana ghana, i. e. han + a,

I. adj., f. nā,

1. Firm, hard, Bhartṛ. 1, 17.

2. Without interstices, Suśr. 1, 29, 8.

3. Uninterrupted, Pañc. iii. d. 237.

4. Dense, Pañc. iii. d. 188; 129, 8.

5. As latter part of a compound adj., sometimes Full, Ragh. 8, 90.

6. Dusk, Bhāg. P. 4, 5, 3.

7. Deep (as a sound), MBh. 1, 6680; Rājat. 5, 377.

8. Whole, Upak. 24.

II. m.

1. A solid mass, substance, Vedāntas. in Chr. 211, 9.

2. A heap, Rām. 5, 16, 55.

3. A cloud, Megh. 20.

— Comp. sa-, adj. dense, Pañc. 141, 16. stamba-, m. 1. a small hoe for

weeding. 2. A sickle. 3. A basket for the heads of wild rice.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ghana a. slaying, striking; compact, solid, firm, tight (n. adv.); dark, deep

(sound); uninterrupted, whole, entire; full of (–°). m. slaughter, slayer;

mace, club, hammer; compact mass, cloud; nothing but (–°).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ghana ghan-a, a. striking; slaying; firm, hard; dense, solid, thick;

uninterrupted; dark, murky; deep (tone); whole; -°, full of: -m, ad.

closely, firmly; m. slaying; slayer; club, hammer; lump, solid mass; -°,

nothing but, pure (cognition); cloud: pl. rabble.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ghana pu° hana–mūrtau ap ghanādeśaśca . 1 meghe 2 mustake 3

samūhe 4 dārdye 5 vistāre ca 6 lauhamudgare medi° 7 śarīre 8 kaphe 9

abhrake rājani° . samatrighātaśca ghanaḥ pradiṣṭaḥ iti 10 sīlāvatyukte

samāddhatrayabadhe . 11 niviḍe sāndre tri° amaraḥ 12 vṛḍhe tri° medi° .

13 pūrṇe 14 saspuṭe tri° śabdara° . 15 karatālādikāṁsyavādyamede 16

madhyama nṛtye ca na° amaraḥ . 17 lauhe na° hemaca° 18 tvace na°

rājani° . tatra meghasyotpattibhedādikaṁ purāṇamarvasve

brahmāṇḍapu° uktaṁ yathā sūryaḥ kiraṇajālena vāyuyuktena sarvataḥ .

jagato jalamāṭatte kṛtsnasya dvijasattamāḥ! . ādityabhūtaṁ bhūtebhyaḥ

somaṁ saṁkramate jalam . nāḍībhirvāyuyuktābhirlokādhāraḥ pravartate .

yat somāccyavate sūkṣmaṁ tadabbhreṣvavatiṣṭhate .

meghāvāvvabhivātena visṛjanti jalaṁ bhuvi . evaṁ prakaraṇenaiva patate

cāsakṛjjalam . na nāśamudakasyāsti tadeva parivartate .

mandhāraṇārthaṁ bhūtānāṁ māyaiṣā viṣṇunirmitā . anayā māyayā

vyāptaṁ trailokyaṁ sacarācaram . viśraśo lokakṛddevaḥ sahabhrāṁśuḥ

prajāpatiḥ . dhātā kṛtsnasya lokasya prabhaviṣṇurdivākaraḥ .

sārvalaukikamambhoya ttat somo nabhasorasaḥ . evaṁ bhūtaṁ jagat

sarvametattathyaṁ prakīrtitam . sūryāduṣṇaṁ nisravati somācchītaṁ

pravartate . śītoṣṇavīryau dvāvetau yuktyā pālayato jagat .

somāmṛtodbhavā gaṅgā pavitrā vimalodakā . bhadrāsomapurogāśca

mahānadyo dvijottamāḥ! . sarvabhūtaśarīreṣu yāstvāpo’pasṛtābhuvi . teṣu

sandahyamāmeṣu jaṅgamasthāvareṣu ca . pūryante sarvabhūtebhyo

niṣkrāmantīha sarvaśaḥ . tena cābbhrāṇi jāyante sthānamabbhramayaṁ

smṛtam . tejo’rkaḥ sarvabhūtebhya ādatte raśmibhirjalam .

samudrādvāyusaṁyogādraśmayaḥ pravahantyapaḥ . tatastvṛtugate kāle

parivṛtto divākaraḥ . niyacchatyapomeghebhyaḥ śuklakṛṣṇairgabhastibhiḥ

. abbhrasthāḥ prapatantyāpo vāyunā samudīritāḥ . sarvabhūtahitārthāya

rasyabhūtāḥ samantataḥ . tato varṣati ṣaṇmāsān sarvabhūta vivṛddhaye .

vāyavyaṁ stanitañcaiva vidyudagnisamudbharvā . mehanācca

miherdhātormeghatvaṁ vyañjayantyuta . na bhraśyanti

yataścāpastadabhraṁ kavayo viduḥ . meghānāṁ punarutpattau trividhā

yonirucyate . agnijā brahmajā caiva pakṣajā ca pṛthagvidhāḥ . tridhā

ghanāḥ samākhyātāsteṣāṁ vakṣyāmi sambhavam . āgneyāḥ sūkṣmajāḥ

proktāsteṣāṁ dhūmāt pravartanam . śītadurdinavātā ye svaguṇāste

vyavasthitāḥ . mahipāśca varāhāśca mattamātaṅgarūpiṇaḥ . bhūtvā

dharaṇi mabhyetya ramanti vicaranti ca . jīmūtā nāma te meghā ye

tebhyo vījasambhavāḥ . vidyadguṇavihīnāśca jaladhārāvalamvinaḥ . sakā

meghā mahākāyā āvahasya vaśānugāḥ . krośamātrācca varṣanti

krośārdhādapi vā punaḥ . parvatāgra nitatveṣu varṣanti gahvareṣu ca .

valākāgarbhadāścaiva vālākā garbhadhāriṇaḥ . brahmajāścaiva ye meghā

brahmaniśvāsasambhavāḥ . te ha vidyudgaṇāpetāḥ stanayitnupriyasvanāḥ

. teṣu śabdapraṇādena bhūmeḥsvāṅgaruhodbhavaiḥ .

vāyuvāhyābhiṣikteṣu vāyuryauvanamaśnute . teṣviya prāvṛḍāsaktā

bhūtānāṁ jīvitodbhavā . jīmūtā nāma te meghā ye tebhyo jīvasambhavāḥ

. dvitīyaṁ pravahaṁ vāyuṁ meghāste tu samāśritāḥ . ito yojanamātrācca

sārdhārdhādapi vā ca te . vṛṣṭidharmo dvadhā teṣāṁ dhārā”sāraḥ

prakīrtitaḥ . puṣkarāvartakā nāma ye mevāḥ pakṣamambhatāḥ .

saṁyogādvāyunocchinnāḥ parvatānāṁ mahaujasām . kāmagānāṁ ca

lokānāṁ sarvepāṁ śitamicchatām . puskarā nāma te meghā vṛhatto

ḥsamatsarāḥ . puṣkarāvartakāstena kāraṇeneha śabditāḥ .

nānārūpadharāṁścaiva mahāghorasvanāśca ye . kalpāntavṛṣṭeḥ sraṣṭāraḥ

saṁvartāgnerniyāmakāḥ . varṣanti te yugānteṣu tutīyāste prakīrtitāḥ .

anekarūpasaṁsthānāḥ pūrayanto mahītalam . vāyuṁ parivahaṁ te syuḥ

śritāḥ kalpāntasādhakāḥ . yo’ṇḍasya ca vibhinnasya prākṛtasyābhavattadā

. yasmāt brahmā samutpannaścaturvaktraḥ svayambhuvaḥ .

tasyaivāṇḍakapālāni sarvameghāḥ pravartitāḥ . teṣāmāpyāyanaṁ dhūmaḥ

sarveṣāmaviśeṣataḥ . teṣāṁ śreṣṭhastu parjanya ścattvāraścaiva

diggajāḥ . gajānāṁ parvatānāñca meghānāṁ bhogibhiḥ saha .

kulamekaṁ pṛthak bhūtaṁ yonistvekaṁ jalaṁ smṛtam . parjanyo

diggajāścaiva hemante śītasambhavāḥ . tuṣāravṛṣṭiṁ varṣanti himaṁ

sasyavivṛddhaye . vāyuviśeṣakṛtaeva ghanabhedo bhā° śā° 330 a° darśito

yathā prerayatyabhrasaṁghātān dhūmajāṁścoṣmajāṁśca yaḥ .

prathamaḥ prathame mārge pravaho nāma yo’nilaḥ . ambare

snehamabhyetya taḍidbhyaścotamadyutiḥ . āvaho nāma saṁbhāti

dvitīyaḥ śvasanonadan . udayaṁ jyotiṣāṁ śaśvat somādonāṁ karoti yaḥ .

antardeheṣu codānaṁ yaṁ vadanti manīṣiṇaḥ . yaścaturbhyaḥ

samudrebhyo vāyurdhārayate jalam . uddhṛtyādadate cāpo

jīmūtebhyo’mbare’nilaḥ . yo’dbhiḥ saṁyojya jīmūtān parjanyāya

prayacchati . udvaho nāma vaṁhiṣṭha stṛtīyaḥ sa sadāgatiḥ .

samuhyamānā bahudhā yena nītāḥ pṛthagghanāḥ .

varṣamokṣakṛtārambhāste bhavanti ghanāghanāḥ . saṁhatā yena

cāviddhā bhavanti nadatā nadāḥ . rakṣaṇārthāya sambhūtāḥ

meghatvamupayānti ca . yo’sau vahati bhūtānāṁ vimānāni vihāyasā .

caturthaḥ saṁvaho nāma vāyuḥ sa girimardanaḥ . yena vegavatā rugaṇā

rūkṣeṇārujatā nagān . vāyunā sahitā meghā ste bhavanti valāhakāḥ .

ṣṭāruṇotpātasañcāro nabhasaḥ stanayitnumān . pañcamaḥ sa mahāvego

vivaho nāma mārutaḥ . yasmin pāriplavā divyā vahantyāpovihāyasā .

puṇyañcākāśagaṅgāyā stoyaṁ viṣṭabhya tiṣṭhati .

samatrighātaścetyāderayamayaḥ samasaṁkhyānāṁ trayāṇāṁ ghātaḥ

yadyapyatra samayordvayorghātena vargarūpeṇa tanmūlasya samatvaṁ

nāsti tathāpi samaśabdena sadṛśaghātadvithātatvena samatvaṁ todhyaṁ

yathā 1 ghanaḥ? . dvābhyo dvayorguṇane 4 catvāraḥ teṣāṁ dvābhyāṁ

guṇane 8 . evaṁ trayāṇāṁ tribhirguṇane 9 nava teṣāṁ

punastribhirguṇane 27 . evaṁ krameṇa vāradvayaṁ

samasamadvighātarūpavargaguṇanāt ghanarūpatvaṁ jāyate

tatraikādīnāṁ daśaparyuntānāṁ ghanasaṁkhyāḥ suvodhāya pradarśyante

yathā 1 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 . 9 . 10 1 . 8 . 27 . 64 . 125 . 216 . 343 .

512 729 . 1000 asya prakārāntaraṁ sthāpyoghanotyasyetyādi līlāvatyāṁ

dṛśyaṁ vistarabhayānnoktam . jaṭāmuktāṁ viparyasya

ghanamāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ ityukte 19 vedapāṭhabhede ṛgvedaśabde 1409 . 11

. 12 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ tatra sāndre pracaṇḍaghanagarjitapratirutānukārī (ravaḥ)

muhuḥ veṇī° . jaghanena ghanena sā lauhodghanaghanaskandhāḥ bhaṭṭiḥ

. lauhamudgare pratijaghāna ghanairiva muṣṭibhiḥ kirā° . meghe

prāvṛṣamiva ghanakeśajālām kāda° . rajanītimirāvaguṇṭhite puramārge

ghanaśabdavihvalāḥ kumā° asambhavadghanarasā śatālīpariṣevitā

udbhaṭaḥ . ghanaśyamaḥ . mūrtau–kāṭhinthe dvāraṁ

tamoghanaprakhyam bhaṭṭiḥ . tamasoghano mūrtiḥ kāṭhinyam tena

mūrtimattamaḥsamam jayama° .

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ghanakāla (ghana “Wolke” + kāla) m. “die Regenzeit” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.

ghanakāla SĀH. D. 130, 13.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ghanakāla m. the season of the rains (clouds).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ghanakāla ghana-kāla, m. rainy season;

-tā, f. density, solidity; condition of a cloud;

-tām-asa, a. pitch dark;

-timira, n. cataract (of the eye);

-tva, n. density, toughness;

-pad-avī, f. (cloud-path), sky;

-vartman, n., -vīthi, f. id.;

-vāri, n. rain-water;

-vyapā- ya, m. disappearance of the clouds, autumn;

-samaya, m. rainy season;

-sāra, a. firm, strong; m. camphor.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ghanakāla pu° ghanapradhānaḥ kālaḥ . varṣartau śabdaca° .

autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ghanavyapāya (ghana + vya-) m. “das Verschwinden der Wolken, Herbst”

RAGH. 3, 37.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ghanāgama (ghana + āgama) m. “die Ankunft der Wolken, Regenzeit”

ṚT. 2, 1.

ghanāgama KATHĀS. 53, 101. 78, 23. 122, 70.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ghanāgama ghana+āgama, m. arrival of the clouds, rainy season;

-atyaya, m. departure of the clouds, autumn;

-anta, m. id..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ghanāgama pu° āgamyate’tra ā + gama–ādhāre ghañ . ghanānāṁ

meghānāmāgamaḥ 6 ta° . varṣākāle ghanāgame rājapathe hi picchile

naiṣa° . bhāve ghañ 6 ta° . 2 meghāgamane ca .

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ghanātyaya (ghana + atyaya) m. “das Verschwinden der Wolken, Herbst”

H. 158. SUŚR. 1, 21, 3.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ghanātyaya m. autumn (lit. the end of the clouds or rains).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ghanātyaya pu° thanānāmatyayoyatra . śaratkāle hemaca° . vātikānāṁ

ghanātyaye suśru° . 6 ta° . 2 ghanātikrame pu° . ghanavyavātho’pyatra .

ghanavyavāyena gabhastimāniva raghuḥ

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ghanānta m. autumn (lit. the end of the clouds or rains).

the brilliancy or hue of light (said of gods, of water [ x, 121, 9 vi] and of

Soma)

candra m. the moon (also personified as a deity &c.) &c. (ifc. f. “ā”

&c.)

candra m. ifc. “the moon of” i.e. the most excellent among (e.g.

“pārthiva-” [g. “vyāghrādi” or “narendra-” [ i, 4], “a most excellent king”)

candra m. the number “one”

candra m. a lovely or agreeable phenomenon of any kind

candra m. a spot similar to the moon

candra m. the eye in a peacock’s tail

candra m. the mark of the Visarga, Tantr.

candra m. a kind of reddish pearl

candra m. camphor

candra m. water

candra m. the Kāmpilla plant

candra m. a metre of 4 x 19 syllables

candra m. N. of a Daitya (= “-varman”, king of the Kāmbojas)

candra m. of a son of Kṛiṣṇa

candra m. of a son of Viśva-gandhi and father of Yuvanāśva, ix, 6, 20

candra m. of a grammarian (= “-gomin”)

candra m. of a king

candra m. of one of the ancestors of the Gauḍa Brāhmans

candra m. of several other men vi f.

candra m. one of the 18 minor Dvipas

candra m. = “-parvata”

candra n. ( i, 2; also m. gold

candra n. a kind of sour rice-gruel

candra n. N. of a Sāman

candra mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a hall covered only at the top, awning, canopy

candra n. cardamoms

candra n. Cocculus cordifolius (“guḍūcī”)

candra n. = “-drāspadā”

candra n. N. of a river

candra mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. Serratula anthelminthica (cf. “ardha-“.)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

candra (von cand) Uṇ. 2, 13. 1) adj. f. ā; die vollständigere Form ścandra

findet sich ṚV. 3, 31, 15. 4, 2, 13. 8, 54, 11 und in den compp.

aśvaścandra, puru-, viśva-, su-, sva-, hari-; vgl. ṚV. PRĀT. 4, 37.

“schimmernd, lichtfarbig (die Farbe des Goldes)”: hiraṇya ṚV. 8, 54, 11.

9, 97, 50. 10, 107, 7. agne retaścandraṁ hiraṇyam TBR. 1, 2, 1, 4. bhānu

ṚV. 1, 48, 9. Ushas 157, 1. Agni 3, 3, 5. die Āditya 7, 62, 3. andere Götter

8, 20, 20. 4, 9. vasūni 5, 42, 3. 9, 69, 10. candraṁ rayiṁ puruvīraṁ

bṛhantaṁ candra candrābhirgṛṇate yuvasya 6, 6, 7. ratna 4, 2, 13. vahatu

10, 85, 21. ratha 4, 48, 1. Wasser: yaścāpaścandrā bṛhatīrjajāna 10, 121,

9. yannaktaṁ bhavatyapo ‘haḥ praviśati tasmāccandrā āpo naktaṁ

dadṛśre TS. 6, 4, 2, 4. Soma ṚV. 3, 40, 4. agne yatte śukraṁ yaccandram

VS. 12, 104. 4, 18. 21. 8, 43. — 2) m. a) “der Mond, der Mondgott” AK. 1,

1, 2, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 348. H. 105. H. an. 2, 417. MED. r. 31. AV. 2, 15, 2.

22, 1. 3, 31, 6 u.s.w. VS. 22, 28. 39, 2. ŚAT. BR. 6, 2, 2, 16. 14, 4, 1, 20.

3, 20. 5, 1, 3. -tārakam 6, 7, 13. -lokāḥ 6, 1. pūrṇa- R. 5, 18, 26. N. 16,

22. paripūrṇa M. 9, 309. -kṣaya 3, 122. na hi saṁharate jyotsnāṁ

candraścaṇḍālaveśmani HIT. I, 55. Personif. M. 7, 4. 8, 86. 9, 303.

candrasyaiti salokatām 11, 220. -sālokya 4, 231. Lot. de la b. l. 2. LALIT.

52 u.s.w. Gehört zu den Jyotiṣka H. 92. Am Ende eines adj. comp. f. āḥ

naṣṭacandrā yathā rātriḥ MBH. 9, 221. MṚCCH.65, 4. hīnacandreva rajanī

R. 2, 76, 9. 3, 52, 18. KUMĀRAS. 7, 26. PRAB. 7, 6. GĪT. 7, 15. — b) “der

Mond” als “schönstes Gestirn” bezeichnet in der Zusammensetzung das

“Vorzüglichste seiner Art”: pārthivacandra gaṇa vyāghrādi zu P. 2, 1, 56.

— c) “eine liebliche, erfreuliche Erscheinung” H. an. VYĀḌI bei BHAR. zu

AK. ŚKDR. — d) “ein mondähnlicher Fleck”: daśacandramasim –

śatacandram BHĀG. P. 4, 15, 17. — e) “das Auge im Pfauenschweife”

(vgl. candraka) H. an. — f) “das” Visarga-“Zeichen” ŚKDR. nach einem

TANTRA. — g) “Gold” (vgl. n.) AK. 3, 4, 25, 184. H. an. MED. — h) “eine

röthliche Perle” VYĀḌI bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. — i) “Wasser” H. an.

MED. — k) “Kampfer” AK. 2, 6, 3, 32. TRIK. H. 643. H. an. MED. — l)

“eine best. Pflanze”, = kāmpilla AK. 2, 4, 5, 12. H. an. MED. — m) N.

eines Metrums (metrical sequence) COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 163 (XIV, 11).

— n) N. pr. eines Daitja (ident. mit Candravarman, König der Kāmboja;

vgl. candramas) MBH. 1, 2667. eines Sohnes des Viśvagandhi und Vaters

des Yuvanāśva BHĀG. P. 9, 6, 20. eines Grammatikers (vgl. candragomin)

COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 6. 20. 39. 48. BÖHTL. in der Einl. zu P. II, xv. fgg.

WEST. in der praef. zu den Radd. III. fg. -vyākaraṇa WASSILJEW 208.

RĀJA-TAR. 1, 176. verschiedener Männer 6, 350. 7, 97. 358. 1351. eines

Königs PAÑCAT. V, 61. 253, 10. eines der Stammväter der Gauḍa-

Brahmanen COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 188. = candragupta LIA. II, 202. — o)

N. pr. eines Dvīpa ŚABDAM. im ŚKDR. TROYER in RĀJA-TAR. II, 314. —

p) N. pr. eines Flusses, des einen Hauptarmes der Candrabhāgā LIA. I,

Anh. XLI. — q) N. pr. eines Berges R. 6, 26, 6. -parvata 2, 37. — 3) f.

candrā a) “eine nur von oben gedeckte Halle” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b)

“Kardamomen” ebend. — c) “Cocculus cordifolius Dec.” (guḍūcī) ŚKDR.

(iti kecit). — 4) f. candrī “Serratula anthelminthica Roxb.” (vākucī)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 5) n. a) “Gold” NAIGH. 1, 2. H. 1044. RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. tamukṣamāṇaṁ rajasi sva ā dame candramiva surucaṁ hvāra ā

dadhuḥ ṚV. 2, 2, 4. 3, 31, 15. sīsaṁ kravyādapi candraṁ ta āhuḥ AV. 12,

2, 53. candraṁ (somaṁ) candreṇa (krīṇāmi) VS. 4, 26. 19, 93. ŚAT. BR.

3, 3, 3, 4. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 8, 15. PAÑCAV. BR. 6, 6. — b) “eine Art saurer

Reisschleim” (cukra) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. eines Sāman KĀTY. ŚR.

26, 4, 1. LĀṬY. 1, 6, 24. Ind. St. 3, 216. — Vgl. ardhacandra.

candra 1) candrataram adv. “lieblicher”: strī naktaṁ candrataraṁ vadati

KĀṬH. 30, 1. — 2) a) der “Mond” als Bez. “der Zahl Eins” SŪRYAS. 1, 43.

2, 21. — n) ein Sohn Kṛṣṇa’s BHĀG. P. 10, 61, 13. Z. 7 streiche 1351. — 5)

a) HALĀY. 2, 18. hierher etwa auch ṚV. 3, 61, 7.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

candra 1 I A prominent asura, also called Candravarman. It was this

asura, as beautiful as Candra (the moon) who was born as the king of

Kāmboja under the name Candravarman (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 67,

Verse 31).

candra 2 II A king born in the Solar dynasty and the son of Viśvarandhi

and father of Yuvanāśva. See Vaṁśāvalī)

candra 3 III The Purāṇas declare that Candra was one of the invaluable

things got at the churning of Kṣīrābdhi (ocean of milk) Candra,

Mahālakṣmī, Surā, Uccaiḥśravas, Kaustubha, Pārijāta, Kāmadhenu,

Dhanvantari, Amṛtam and Kālakūṭa were the things thus got from the

Ocean of Milk. (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 18 and Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1,

Chapter 9). Also, the evil devatā called Jyeṣṭhā, Airāvata, the gem named

Cintāmaṇi and fair damsels like Tārā and Rumā were got from the

Kṣīrābdhi, (Kampa Rāmāyaṇa, Yuddhakāṇḍa). For general information

about Candra, see Grahas).

candra 4 IV (CANDRA DEVA).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

candra cand + ra, m.

1. The moon, MBh. 11, 220.

2. A moon-like spot, Bhāg. P. 4, 15, 7.

3. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2667.

4. The name of a mountain, Rām. 6, 26, 6.

— Comp. ardha-, see separately. pūrṇa-, m. the full of the moon, Rām. 3,

53, 44. rāma-, m. the second of the three renowned Rāmas, the son of

Daśaratha, and hero of the Rāmāyaṇa. śaraccandra, i. e. śarad-, m. the

autumnal moon.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

candra a. shining, glittering, brilliant, bright. — m. the moon (often

personif.), moon i.e. chief among (–°).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

candra cand-ra, a. shining, bright; lovely; m. moon (also as a deity); -° =

chief among –; N.; n. gold: a-ka, m. (-° a. ikā) moon; eye in a peacock’s

tail; N.;

-kalā, f. sixteenth part of the moon’s disc (as seen on the day before

or after new moon);

-kānta, a. lovely as the moon; m. moon-stone (a fabulous gem formed

of the congealed rays of the moon, glittering & exuding cool moisture in

moonlight only): -maṇi-maya, a. made of moonstone, -maya, a. id..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

candra pu° cadi–āhlāde ṇic–rak . vyomasthe jalamaye maṇḍalākāre

(cāṁda) khyāte padārthe . tanmaṇḍalamānādi induśabde 955 . 56 pṛ°

uktam . sa ca grahabhedaḥ tadadhiṣṭhāvṛdevādi grahayajñaśabde 2757

pṛ° darśitam . adhikaminduśabde 930 pṛṣṭhādau dṛśyam . tasyotpattiḥ

atrijaśabde 111 pṛ° uktam . tadvaṁśādi harivaṁśe bhāgavate ca dṛśyam .

candrasya digvalavarṇādijñānāya sarvagrahāṇāṁ digbalādyucyate tatra

jyo° ta° raktaśyāmobhāskarogauraindurnātyuccāṅgoraktagauromahījaḥ .

dūrvāśyāmojñogururgauragātraḥ śyāmaḥ śukrobhāskariḥ kṛṣṇadehaḥ .

sūryaḥ śukraḥ kṣamāputraḥ saiṁhikeyaḥ śaniḥ śaśī .

saumyastridaśamantrī ca prācyādidigadhīśvarāḥ . prācyāṁ

saumyasurācāryau yāmyā bhāskarabhūmijau . pratyak saurirudīcyāntu

sitendū digvalānvitau . bhaumārkajīvāḥ puruṣāḥ klīvau somajabhānujau .

stryākhyau bhārgavacandrau dvau tatpatitvāttathocyate .

candrārkajīvājñasitau kūjākīṁ yathākrama satvarajastamāṁsi .

kaṭulavaṇatiktamiśritamadhurāmlau ca kaṣāyako’rkataḥ . brāhmaṇe

śukravāgośau kṣatriye bhaumabhāskarau . candrovaiśye budhaḥ śūdre

patirmando’ntyaje jane . ṛgvedādhipatirjīvoyajuryedādhipaḥ sitaḥ .

sāmavedādhipobhaumaḥ śaśijo’tharvavedarāṭ .

madhupiṅgarādṛkcaturaśratanuḥ pittaprakṛtiḥ savitālpakacaḥ .

tanuvṛttatanurbahuvātakaphaḥprājñaśaśī mṛduvāk śubhadṛk .

bhūmijastaruṇabhūrtirudāraḥ paittikaḥ sucapalaḥ kṛśamadhyaḥ . śliṣṭāk

satatahāsyarucirjñaḥ pittamārutakaphaprakṛtiśca . vṛhattanuḥ

piṅgalamūrdhajekṣaṇovṛhaspatiḥ śreṣṭhamatiḥ kaphātmakaḥ . bhṛguḥ

sukhī kāntavapuḥ sulocanaḥ kaphānilātmā’sitavakramūrdhajaḥ .

mando’lasaḥ kaṣiladṛk kṛśadīrghagātraḥ sthūlo’ṅghrijaḥ

paruṣalomakaco’nilātmā mitrāṇi sūryacchiśibhaumajīvāḥ sūryendujau

sūryaśaśāṅkajīvāḥ . ādityaśukrau ravicandrabhaumā budhārkajau

candrajabhārgavau ca . sitāsitau candramaso na kaścit budhaḥ śaśī

saumyasitau ravīndū . ravīndubhaumā ravitastvamitrā mitrāviśeṣastu

samaḥ pradiṣṭaḥ . budhaḥ kujejyāsphujidarkaputrāḥ, śukrārkajau,

bhaumasurejyamandāḥ . śaniḥ, kujejyau surarājamantrī ravyādito’mī

samasaṁjñitāḥ syuḥ . taccāraphalādikam vṛ° sa° uktam tacca induśabde

931 . 32 pṛ° dṛśyam ardhādūnaḥ śaśī pāpaḥ samayāmṛtam .

adrijātasomasya candralokaprāptikathā kāśīkha° 14 a° . pitā somasya

bho vipra! jajñe’trirbhagavānṛṣiḥ . brahmaṇomānasāt pūrvaṁ

prajāsargaṁ vidhitsataḥ . anuttaraṁ nāma tapo yena taptaṁ hi tat purā .

trīṇi varṣasahasrāṇi divyānīti hi nau śrutam . ūrdhamācakrame tasya

retaḥ somatvamīyivaḥ . netrābhyāṁ tacca susnāva daśadhā

dyotayatdiśaḥ . taṁ garbhavidhinā hṛṣṭā daśa devyo dadhustataḥ .

sametya dhārayāmāsurnaiva tāḥ samaśaknuvan . yadā na dhāraṇe

śaktāstasya garbhasya tā diśa . tatastābhiḥ sajūḥ somoniṣpapāta

vasundharām . patitaṁ somamālokya brahmā lokapitāmahaḥ .

rathamāropayāmāsa lokānāṁ hitakāmyayā . sa tena rathamukhyena

sāgarāntāṁ vasundharām . dviḥ saptakṛtve druhiṇaścakārāye

pradakṣiṇam . tasya yat plāvitantejaḥ pṛthivīmanvapadyata .

tenauṣadhyaḥ samudbhūtā yābhiḥ sandhāryate jagat . sa labdhatejā

bhagavān brahmaṇā vardhitaḥ svayam . tapastepe sahābhāga!

padmānāṁ daśatīrdaśa . avimuktaṁ samāsādya kṣetraṁ

paramapāvanam . saṁsthāpya liṅgamamṛta candreśākhyaṁ khanāmataḥ

. vījoṣadhīnāṁ toyānāṁ rājā’ bhūcca dvijanmanām .

prasādāddevadevasya viśveśasya pinākinaḥ . tatra kuṇḍaṁ

vidhāyaikamamṛtodamiti smṛtam . yasyāmbupānasrānābhyāṁ naro’jñānāt

pramucyate . tuṣṭena devadevena svamaulau yodhṛtaḥ sadā . ādāya

tatkalāmekāṁ jagatsañjīvanīṁ parām . paścāddakṣeṇa śapto’pi māsānte

kṣayamāpya ca . āpyāyyate’sau kalayā punaregha tayā śaśī . sa tat

prāpya mahadrājyaṁ somaḥ somavatāṁ varaḥ . rājasūyaṁ samājahre

sahasraśatadakṣiṇam . dakṣiṇāmadadat soma strilokāniti nau śrutam .

tebhyo brahmarṣimukhyebhyaḥ sadasyebhyaśca bhodvija! . hiraṇyagarbho

brahmātrirbhṛguryatrartvijo’bhavan . sadasyo’bhūddharistatra

bahubhirmunibhirvṛtaḥ . taṁ sinī ca kuhūścaiva dyutiḥ puṣṭiḥ prabhā

vasuḥ . kīrtirdhṛtiśca lakṣmīśca nava devyaḥ siṣevira . umayā sahitaṁ

rudraṁ santarpyādhvarakarmaṇā . prāpa somaiti khyātiṁ dattāṁ somena

śambhunā . tatraiva taptavān somastapaḥ paramaduṣkaram . tatraiva

rājasūyañca cakre candreśvarāgrataḥ . tatraiva brāhmaṇaiḥ

prītairityukto’sau kalānidhiḥ . somo’snākaṁ brāhmaṇānāṁ rājā

trailokyadakṣiṇaḥ . tatraiva devadevasya vilocanapadaṅgataḥ . śambhunā

protamanasā trailokyāhlādahetave . tvaṁ mamāpi parā

mūrtirityuktastattapībalāt! jagattavodayaṁ prāpya bhaviṣyati

sukhodayam . tvatpīyūṣa mayairhastaiḥ spṛṣṭametaccarācaram!

bhānutāpaparītañca parāṁ gnāniṁ vihāsyati . iti dattvā varān

śambhustasmai candramase dvija! . antarhito maheśānastasmin

vaiśveśvare pure . tadārabhya ca loke’smin dvijarājā’dhipo’bhavat . tasya

māsamadhye dakṣaśāpāt kṣayavṛddhī pādme svargakhaṇḍe ukte yathā

aśvinyādyāstu dakṣasya upayeme sutā vidhuḥ . rohiṇyā meva satataṁ

baddhapremā rarāma ha . dṛṣṭvā taditarāstānu taptāḥ pitaramabruvan .

asmākaṁ kāmadastāta . jāmātā tava rohiṇīm . ramayatyeva satataṁ

tena taptā vayaṁ pitaḥ! . tat śrutvā cāpriyaṁ dakṣaḥ somamāha

bhajasva bhoḥ . premṇā samena sarvāstvaṁ duhitṝrmama mānada! .

jagṛhe ta dvaconaiva somaḥ saprema rohiṇīm . tathaiva ramayāmāsa

śrutvā dakṣaścukopa ha . śaśāpa tena bhavitā’pakṣīṇo’smadvacātigaḥ .

yakṣmaṇā ca parigrasto bhava tvaṁ kṣīṇaretakaḥ . aya kṣayamite tasmin

sarvāstāḥ sahitāḥ striyaḥ . pitaraṁ śaraṇaṁ prāptāḥ kṣīyate naḥ patiḥ

pitaḥ! . na vayaṁ tena vartāmo vinā sukhanirākṛtāḥ . uvāca dakṣa stāḥ

sarvā śāpo me nānyathā bhavet . māsamadhye pakṣamekaṁ vardhatāṁ

sa krameṇa vai . kṣayaṁ krameṇa prāpnotu pakṣamekaṁ vyavasthayā .

evaṁ śāpaṁ varañcaiva lebhe tasya vyavasthayā . tathaiva rājate vyomni

kṣayavṛddhī dadhadvidhuḥ . jyotiṣoktatatkāraṇantu induśabde 933 pṛ°

darśitam . 2 āhlādajanakadravyamātre trikā° . 3 karpūre 4 svarṇe 5 jale 6

kāmpille pu° medi° . 7 dvīprabhede śabdamā° . 8 visargavarṇe

tantrasaṁketaḥ cadi–dīptau rak . 9 kamanīye tri° 10 mayūra picche

mecake hemaca° . 11 śoṇamuktāphale vyāḍiḥ . antyapadalope 12

candragupte nṛpe ca . krūragrahaḥ saketuḥ

candramasaṁpūrṇamaṇḍalamidānīm mudrārā° . candraṁ gatā

padmaguṇānna bhuṅkte kumā° . badhūjanaścandramadhaścakāra nāghaḥ

. candracandanarolambarutādyuddīpanaṁ matam sā° da° tasya

śṛṅgārarasoddīpakatvamuktam . svarṇe candrarathaḥ hotā mandraḥ

śṛṇuvaccandrarathaḥ ṛ° 1 . 141 . 12 . 13 hīrake . candrāghiṣṭhātṛke 14

mṛgaśironakṣatre 15 ekāṅke ca .

jala m. (g. “jvalādi”) a stupid man

jala m. N. of a man (with the patr. Jātūkarṇya)

jala n. (also pl.) water, any fluid &c. (ifc. f. “ā”)

jala n. a kind of Andropogon

jala n. the 4th mansion (in astrol.)

jala n. a cow’s embryo (“go-kalaka” or “-lana”)

jala n. (= “jaḍa”) frigidity (moral or mental or physical)

jala Nom. “-lati”, to become water

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jala a. [jal ac ḍasya lo vā]

(1) Dull, cold, frigid = jaḍa q. v.

(2) Stupid, idiotic. –laṁ

(1) Water; tātasya kūpoyamiti bruvāṇāḥ kṣāraṁ jalaṁ kāpuruṣāḥ

pibaṁti . Pt. 1. 322.

(2) A kind of fragrant medicinal plant or perfume (hrīvera).

(3) The embryo or uterus of a cow.

(5) The constellation called pūrvāṣāḍhā.

— Comp.

–aṁcalaṁ 1. a spring. –2. a natural water-course. –3. moss.

–aṁjaliḥ 1. a handful of water. –2. a libation of water presented

to the manes of a deceased person; kuputramāsādya kuto jalāṁjaliḥ

Chāṇ. 69; mānasyāpi jalāṁjaliḥ sarabhasaṁ loke na datto yathā Amaru.

97 (where, jalāṁjaliṁ dā means ‘to leave or give up’).

–aṭanaḥ a heron.

–aṭanī a leech.

–aṇukaṁ, –aṁḍakaṁ the fry of fish.

–aṁṭakaḥ a shark.

–atyayaḥ autumn (śarad). –adhidaivataḥ, –taṁ an epithet of

Varuṇa. (

–taṁ) the constellation called pūrvāṣāḍhā. –adhipaḥ an epithet of

Varuṇa.

–aṁbikā a well.

–arkaḥ the image of the sun reflected in water.

–arṇavaḥ 1. the rainy season. –2. the ocean of sweet water.

–arthin a. thirsty.

–avatāraḥ a landing-place at a river side.

–aṣṭhīlā a large square pond.

–asukā a leech.

–ākaraḥ a spring, fountain, well.

–ākāṁkṣaḥ, kāṁkṣaḥ, –kāṁkṣin m. an elephant.

–ākhuḥ an otter.

–āḍhya a watery, marshy.

–ātmikā a leech.

–ādhāraḥ a pond, lake, reservoir of water.

–āyukā a leech.

–ārdra a. wet. (

–rdraṁ) wet garment or clothes. (

–rdrā) a fan wetted with water.

–ālokā a leech.

–āvartaḥ eddy, whirl-pool.

–āśaya a. 1. resting or lying in water. –2. stupid, dull, apathetic. (

–yaḥ) 1. a pond, lake, reservoir. –2. a fish. –3. the ocean. –4. the

fragrant root of a plant (uśīra). –āśrayaḥ 1. a pond. –2. water-house.

–āhvayaṁ a lotus.

–iṁdraḥ 1. an epithet of Varuṇa. –2. N. of Mahādeva. –3. the

ocean.

–iṁdhanaḥ the submarine fire.

–ibhaḥ a waterelephant.

–īśaḥ, –īśvaraḥ 1. an epithet of Varuṇa. –2. the ocean.

–uchvāsaḥ 1. a channel made for carrying off excess of water,

drain, (cf. parīvāha). –2. overflow of a river.

–udaraṁ dropsy.

–udbhava a. aquatic. (

–vā) benzoin.

–uragā, –okas m.,

–okasaḥ a leech.

–kaṁṭakaḥ a crocodile

–kapiḥ the Gangetic porpoise.

–kapotaḥ a water-pigeon.

–kara a. making or pouring forth water. (

–raḥ) tax for water.

–karaṁkaḥ 1. a shell. –2. cocoa-nut. –3. a cloud. –4 a wave. –5.

a lotus.

–kalkaḥ mud.

–kalmaṣaḥ the poison produced at the churning of the ocean.

–kākaḥ the diver-bird.

–kāṁtaḥ the wind.

–kāṁtāraḥ an epithet of Varuṇa.

–kirāṭaḥ a shark.

–kukkuṭaḥ a water-fowl. (

–ṭī) the black-headed gull.

–kuṁtalaḥ, –kośaḥ moss.

–kūpī 1. a spring, well. –2. a pond. –3. a whirlpool.

–kūrmaḥ the porpoise.

–keliḥ, m. or f.,

–krīḍā playing in water, splashing one another with water.

–keśaḥ moss.

–kriyā presenting libations of water to the manes of the deceased.

–gulmaḥ 1. a turtle. –2. a quadrangular tank. –3. a whirlpool.

–cara a. (also jalecara) aquatic. (

–raḥ) 1. an aquatic animal. –2. a fish. –3. any kind of water-fowl.

-ājīvaḥ, -jīvaḥ a fisherman.

–catvaraṁ a square tank.

–cārin m. 1. an aquatic animal. –2. a fish.

–ja a. born or produced in water. (

–jaḥ) 1. an aquatic animal. –2. a fish. –3. sea-salt. –4. a

collective name for several signs of the zodiac. –5. moss. –6. the moon.

(

–jaḥ, –jaṁ) 1. a shell. –2. the conch-shell; adharoṣṭhe niveśya

dadhmau jalajaṁ kumāraḥ R. 7. 63, 10. 60. (

–jaṁ) a lotus. -ājīvaḥ a fisherman. -āsanaḥ an epithet of Brahmā;

vācaspatiruvācedaṁ prāṁjalirjalajāsanaṁ Ku. 2. 30. -kusumaṁ the lotus.

-dravyaṁ a pearl, shell or any other thing produced from the sea.

–jaṁtuḥ 1. a fish. –2. any aquatic animal.

–jaṁtukā a leech.

–janman a lotus.

–jihvaḥ a crocodile.

–jīvin m. a fisherman.

–ḍiṁbaḥ a bivalve shell.

–taraṁgaḥ 1. a wave. –2. a metal cup filled with water producing

harmonic notes like a musical glass.

–tāḍanaṁ (lit.) ‘beating water’; (fig.) any useless occupation.

–trā an umbrella.

–trāsaḥ hydrophobia.

–daḥ 1. a cloud; jāyaṁte viralā loke jaladā iva sajjanāḥ Pt. 1. 29.

–2. camphor. -aśanaḥ the Sāla tree.

–āgamaḥ the rainy season. -ābha a. black, dark. -kālaḥ the rainy

season. -kṣayaḥ autumn.

–darduraḥ a kind of musical instrument.

–devaḥ the constellation pūrvāṣāḍhā. –devatā a naiad, water-

nymph.

–droṇī a bucket.

–dharaḥ 1. a cloud. –2. the ocean.

–dhārā a stream of water.

–dhiḥ 1. the ocean. –2. a hundred billions. –3. the number ‘four’.

-gā a river. -jaḥ the moon. -jā Lakṣmī, the goddess of wealth. -raśanā the

earth.

–nakulaḥ an otter.

–naraḥ a merman.

–nāḍī, –lī a water-course.

–nidhiḥ 1. the ocean. –2. the number ‘four’.

–nirgamaḥ 1. a drain, water-course. –2. a water-fall, descent of a

spring &c. into a river below.

–nīliḥ moss.

–pakṣin m. a water-fowl.

–paṭalaṁ a cloud.

–patiḥ 1. the ocean. –2. an epithet of Varuṇa.

–pathaḥ a sea voyage; R. 17. 81.

–paddhatiḥ f. a gutter, drain.

–pātraṁ ‘a water-pot’ drinking-vessel.

–pārāvataḥ a waterpigeon.

–pittaṁ fire.

–puṣpaṁ an aquatic flower.

–pūraḥ 1. a flood of water. –2. a full stream of water.

–pṛṣṭhajā moss.

–pradānaṁ presenting libations of water to the manes of the

deceased.

–pralayaḥ destruction by water.

–prāṁtaḥ the bank of a river.

–prāyaṁ a country abounding with water; jalaprāyamanūpaṁ syāt

Ak.

–priyaḥ 1. the Chātaka bird. –2. a fish. (

–yā) an epithet of Dakṣayaṇi.

–plavaḥ an otter.

–plāvanaṁ a deluge, an inundation.

–baṁdhaḥ, –baṁdhakaḥ a dam, dike, rocks or stones impeding a

current.

–baṁdhuḥ a fish.

–bālakaḥ, –vālakaḥ the Vindhya mountain.

–bālikā lightning.

–biḍālaḥ an otter.

–biṁbaḥ, –baṁ a bubble.

–bilvaḥ 1. a (quadrangular) pond, lake. –2. a tortoise. –3. a crab.

–bhītiḥ f. hydrophobia

–bhū a. produced in water.

–bhūḥ m. 1. a cloud. –2. a place for holding water. –3. a kind of

camphor.

–bhūṣaṇaḥ wind.

–bhṛt m. 1. a cloud. –2. a jar. –3. camphor.

–makṣikā a waterinsect.

–maṁḍūkaṁ a kind of musical instrument; (= jaladardura). —

madguḥ a king-fisher.

–masiḥ 1. a cloud. –2. camphor.

–mārgaḥ a drain, canal.

–mārjāraḥ an otter.

–muc m. 1. a cloud; Me. 69. –2. a kind of camphor.

–mūrtiḥ an epithet of Śiva.

–mūrtikā hail.

–modaṁ a fragrant root (uśīra). –yaṁtraṁ 1. a machine for

raising water. –2. a water-clock, clepsydra. –3. a fountain. -gṛhaṁ, –

nikatenaṁ, -maṁdiraṁ a house erected in the midst of water (a

summer-house) or one supplied with artificial fountains; kvacidvicitraṁ

jalayaṁtramaṁdiraṁ Rs. 1. 2.

–yātrā a voyage.

–yānaṁ a ship.

–raṁkuḥ a kind of gallinule.

–raṁḍaḥ, –ruṁḍaḥ 1. a whirlpool. –2. a drop of water, drizzle,

thin sprinkling. –3. a snake.

–rasaḥ sea-salt.

–rāśiḥ the ocean.

–ruh, –haṁ a lotus.

–rūpaḥ a crocodile.

–latā a wave, billow.

–varaṁṭaḥ a watery pustule.

–vādyaṁ a kind of musical instrument.

–vāyasaḥ a diver-bird.

–vāsaḥ residence in water. (–saṁ) = uśīra. q. v.

–vāhaḥ 1. a cloud. –2. a water-bearer. –3. a kind of camphor.

–vāhakaḥ, –naḥ a water-carrier.

–vāhanī an aqueduct.

–viṣuvaṁ the autumnal equinox.

–vṛścikaḥ a prawn.

–vaikṛtaṁ any change in the waters of rivers indicating a bad

omen.

–vyālaḥ 1. a water-snake. –2. a marine monster.

–śayaḥ, –śayanaḥ, –śāyin m. an epithet of Viṣṇu.

–śuktiḥ f. a bivalve shell.

–śuci a. bathed, washed.

–śūkaṁ moss.

–śūkaraḥ a crocodile.

–śoṣaḥ drought.

–samudraḥ the ocean of fresh water.

–saṁparkaḥ mixture or dilution with water.

–sarpiṇī a leech.

–sūciḥ f. 1. the Gangetic porpoise. –2. a kind of fish. –3. a crow.

–4. a water-nut. –5. a leech.

–sthānaṁ, –sthāyaḥ a pond, lake, reservoir.

–haṁ a small waterhouse (rather summer-house) furnished with

artificial fountains.

–hastin m. a water-elephant.

–hāriṇī a drain.

–hāsaḥ 1. foam. –2. cuttlefish-bone considered as the foam of the

sea.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

jala (jala m. = jāla ! gaṇa jvalādi zu P. 3, 1, 140) 1) adj. = jaḍa H. an. 2,

487. MED. l. 18. Vgl. jalāśaya. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Mannes mit dem

patron. Jātukarṇya ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 16, 29, 6. — 3) f. ā N. pr. eines Flusses

MBH. 3, 10556. Vgl. upajalā. — 4) n. a) “Wasser, Nass” NAIGH. 1, 12. AK.

1, 2, 3, 3. TRIK. 1, 2, 10. H. 1069. H. an. MED. M. 4, 46. 5, 77 u.s.w. ARJ.

3, 16. HIḌ. 1, 52. SUŚR. 1, 100, 18. 152, 16. RAGH. 2, 6. VID. 294.

jalarodha SUŚR. 1, 106, 15. -stambhana Verz. d. B. H. No. 905. pl. YĀJÑ.

1, 17. KATHĀS. 13, 33. netrajairjalaiḥ BHĀG. P. 1, 11, 30. N. 24, 16.

māṁsajalaiḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 28. 26. plakṣāśvattha -saṁbhavaiḥ

kaṣāyajalaiḥ 59, 8. tadaṅganisyandajalena RAGH. 3, 41. Am Ende eines

adj. comp. f. ā MBH. 1, 1523. R. 1, 44, 15. 3, 79, 40. BHARTṚ. 3, 11. ŚĀK.

143. BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 9. syandatsvedajalā BRAHMA-P. in LA. 59, 5. — b)

“eine best. wohlriechende Arzeneipflanze” (hrīvera) H. 1158. H. an. MED.

SUŚR. 2, 275, 19. — c) “Kuh-Embryo” (gokalala, -kalana) H. an. MED.

jala 1) und zugleich 4) a) Spr. 4647, v. l.

jala 1) und zugleich 4) a) auch Spr. (II) 6919.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

jala A deity of water. In Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 11, Stanza

20 it is mentioned that this deva was a luminary in the durbar of Brahmā.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

jala jala (cf. jaḍa),

I. n.

1. Water, Man. 4, 46.

2. A fragrant plant, Suśr. 2, 275, 19.

II. f. lā, The name of a river, MBh. 3, 10556.

— Comp. ati-, adj., f. lā, abounding in water, Rām. 4, 44, 64. gandha-, f.

lā, fragrant water, Bhāg. P. 1, 11, 15. netra-, n. tears, Rām. 5, 25, 55.

rajanī-, n. frost, hoarfrost, dew. sa-, adj. humid, Megh. 23.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

jala [1] n. water (also pl.); abstr. -tā f.

jala [2] a. = jaḍa.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

jala 1. jal-a, n. (sts. pl.) water.

jala 2. jala, a. (= jaḍa) stupid, foolish.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

jala ka pidhāne . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curāṁparaṁ-sakaṁ-seṭ .)

pidhānamācchādanam . ka, jālayati candraṁ meghaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

jala ja dhānye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvāṁparaṁ-sakaṁ-seṭ . akaṁ iti

kecit .) ja, jālaḥ jalaḥ . dhīyate aneneti dhānaṁ tasya bhāvaḥ dhānyaṁ

jīvanopayogikriyā . jalati lokān jalam . jīvayatītyarthaḥ . dhīyate

ācchādyate aneneti dhānaṁ tasya bhāvaḥ dhānyaṁ ācchādanakriyā .

jalati jālena matsyān jālika iti vā . govindabhaṭṭastu dhanasya bhāvaḥ

dhānyaṁ samṛddhiḥ . jalati dhanī samṛddhaḥ syādityartha ityāha . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

jala ācchādādane curā° ubha° saka° seṭ . jālayati te ajījalat ta .

jala tīkṣṇībhavane jīvanopayogikriyāyāṁ ca aka° bhvā° para° seṭ . jalati

ajālīt jajāla jelatuḥ . jvalādi jalaḥ jālaḥ .

jala tri° jala–ac ḍasya lovā . 1 jaḍe . 2 udake, 3 hrīvere gandhadravye,

jyotiṣokte lagnāvadhike 4 caturthasthāne, 5 pūrvāṣāḍānakṣatre ca na°

śabdārthaci° . jalañca pañcabhūtāntargatabhūtabhedaḥ

tadbhedaguṇādikaṁ suśrutoktaṁ ambuśabde 32930 pṛṣṭhe darśitam

ghanaśabde 2786 pṛṣṭhe ca tasya vivṛtiḥ . apāṁ śaityaṁ tathā kledo

dravatvaṁ snehasaumyatā . jihvābhiṣyandanañcāpi bhaumānāṁ

śrapaṇaṁ tathā . caturthamāpo vijñeyaṁ jihvādhyātmaṁ pracakṣate .

adhibhūtaṁ rasāstatra somastatrādhidaivatam bhā° āśva° a° .

tadaṅganiṣyandajalena locane jalābhilāṣī jalamādadānām raghuḥ . na

tajjalaṁ yanna sucārupaṅkajam bhaṭṭiḥ tṛṣitāya roniṇe’pi jalaṁ deyaṁ

tathā ca pānīyaṁ prāṇināṁ prāṇāstadāyattaṁ hi jīvanam . tasmāt

sarvāsvavasthāsu na kvacit vāri vāryate . annenāpi vinā jantuḥ prāṇān

dhārayate ciram . toyābhāve pipāsārtaḥ kṣaṇāt prāṇairvimucyate . tṛṣito

mohamāyāti mohyat prāṇān vimuñcati . tasmājjalamavaśyaṁ hi

dātavyaṁ bheṣajaiḥ samamiti rājavallabhaḥ . pādena ghaṭamutthāpya

bhājane pūrayejjalam . tajjalaṁ madirātulyaṁ bhāṇḍasthaṁ surayā

samam iti karmalocanaḥ tasya dānamāhātmyaṁ yathā . anne datte

nareṇeha prāṇā dattā bhavantyuta . prāṇadānāddhi paramaṁ na

dānamiha vidyate . annaṁ cāpi prabhavati pānīyāt kurusattama! .

nīrajātena hi vinā na kiñcit saṁpravartate . annauṣadhyo mahārāja!

vīrudhaśca jaledbhavāḥ . yataḥ prāṇabhṛtāṁ prāṇāḥ sambhavanti

viśāmpate! . tasmāt pānīyadānādvai na paraṁ vidyate kvacit . tacca

dadyānnaro nityaṁ yadīcchedbhūtimātmanaḥ . dhanyaṁ

yaśasyamāyuṣyaṁ jaladānamihocyate . śatrūṁścāpyavi kautteya! sadā

tiṣṭhati toyadaḥ . sarvakāmānavāpnoti kīrtiñcaiveha śāśvatīm . pretya

cānantyamaśnāti pāpebhyaśca pramucyate . toyado manujavyāghra!

svargaṁ gatvā mahādyute! . akṣayān samavāpnoti lokānityabravīn manuḥ

bhā° śā° dā° a° hemādrau dā° khaṇḍe viśeṣo dṛśyaḥ pānīyaṁ prāṇinaḥ

prāṇāḥ pārnāyaṁ pāvana mahat . pānīyasya pradānena tṛptirbhavati

śāśvatī jaladānamantraḥ jalavarṣaṇajñānāya

varṣādyadhiparājādyānayanaṁ tatphalañca kṛśisaṁgrahe darśitaṁ yathā

vṛṣṭimūlā kṛṣiḥ sarvā vṛṣṭimūlañca jīvanam . tasmādādau prayatnena

vṛṣṭijñānaṁ samācaret . tato varṣasya rājānaṁ mantriṇaṁ meghameva

ca . āḍhakaṁ salilañcāpi vṛṣṭijñānāya śodhayet . śākaṁ triguṇitaṁ kṛtvā

dviyutaṁ muninā (7) haret . bhāgaśiṣṭo nṛpojñeyo nṛpānmalī caturthakaḥ

. atha nṛpādiphalam . cittalā’rke nāpe vṛṣṭirvṛṣṭirugrā niśāpatau .

vṛṣṭirmandā sadā bhaume candraje vṛṣṭiruttamā . gurau ca śobhanā

vṛṣṭirbhārgave vṛṣṭiruttamā . pṛthivī dhūlisampūrṇā vṛṣṭihīnā śanau nṛpe .

yasmit saṁvatsare caiva arko rājā bhaviṣyati . śasyahānirbhavettatra

nityaṁ rogaśca jāyate . yasminnavde vidhūrājā śasyapūṇā ca medinī .

nairujyañca suvṛṣṭiśca subhikṣaṁ kṣitimaṇḍaṇḍale . yasminnavde kujo

rājā sasyaśūnyā ca medinī . nairujya vinivṛttiśca durbhikṣaṁ kṣatimaṇḍale

. yatrāvde candrajo rājā sarvaśasyā ca bhūrbhavet . dharme

sthitirmanaḥsthairpyaṁ vṛṣṭikāraṇamuttamam . yatrāvde ca gurūrājā

sarvā ramavatī mahī . nṛpāṇāṁ vardhanaṁ nityaṁ dhanadhānyādikaṁ

phalam . rājā daityaguruḥ kuryāt sarvaśasyaṁ dharātalam . saṁgrāmo

vātavṛṣṭiśca rogopadrava eva ca . mandā vṛṣṭiḥ sadā vāto rājā

saṁvatsare śaniḥ . śākasya kālaṁ triguṇīkṛtañca

dvivāṇavasvabdhisamanvitañca . rājā ca mantrī ca jalādhipaśca

śasyādhipaḥ syānmunibhājitena . (śākasya kālaṁ triguṇīkṛtañca pakṣaṇa

yuktaṁ muninā harecca . sūryādi varṣādhipatiśca śeṣo mantrī caturtho

bhavati prasiddhaḥ .) pāṭhāntaram . yathā vṛṣṭiphalaṁ proktaṁ vatsare

grahabhūpatau . tathā vṛṣṭiphalaṁ jñeyaṁ vijñairvatsaramantriṇi . atha

meghānayanam . śākaṁ vahnisamāyuktaṁ vedena bhāgamāharet .

śeṣaṁ meghaṁ vijānīyādāvartādi yathākramam . āvartaścaiva saṁvartaḥ

puṣkaro droṇa eva ca . catvāro jaladāḥ proktā āvartādyā manīṣibhiḥ .

ekadeśena cāvarte saṁvarte sarvato jalam . puṣkare duṣkaraṁ bāri

droṇe bahujalā mahī . atha jalāḍhakanirṇayaḥ . śatayojanavistīrṇaṁ

triṁśadyojanamucchritam . āḍhakasya bhavenmānaṁ munibhiḥ

parikīrtitam . yugmā’jagomīnagate śaśāṅke raviryadā karkaṭakaṁ prayāti

. śatāḍhakaṁ kaṁ harikārmuke’rdhaṁ vadanti kanyāmṛgayoraśītim .

kulīrakumbhālitulābhidhāne jalāḍhakaṁ ṣaṇṇavatiṁ vadanti . anena

mānena tu vatsarasya nirūpya nīraṁ kṛṣikarma kāryam . etatsarvaṁ

viṁśatyā haraṇīyam . samudre daśa bhāgāṁśca ṣaḍbhāgānapi parbate .

pṛthivyāṁ caturobhāgān sadā varṣati vāsavaḥ . atha

pauṣādimāsīyavṛṣṭilakṣaṇam . sārdhaṁ dinadvayaṁ mānaṁ kṛtvā

pauṣādinā budhaḥ . gaṇayenmāsikīṁ vṛṣṭimavṛṣṭiṁ vānilakramāt .

saumyavāruṇayorvṛṣṭiravṛṣṭiḥ pūrvayāmyayoḥ . nirvāte vṛṣṭihāniḥ syāt

saṅkule saṅkulaṁ jalam . ekaikaṁ pañcadaṇḍena māsasya divaso mataḥ

. pūrvārdhe vāsarī vṛṣṭiruttarārdhe ca naiśikī . dattvā daṇḍe patākāntu

vātasyānukrameṇa ca . vijñeyā māsikī vṛṣṭirdṛṣṭvā vātaṁ divāniśam .

dhūlībhireva śavalīkṛtamantarīkṣaṁ

vidyucchaṭācchuritavāruṇadigvibhāgam . pauṣe yadā bhavati māsi site ca

pakṣe toyena tatra sakalā plavate dharitrī . pauṣe māsi yadā vṛṣṭiḥ

kujjhaṭirvā yadā bhavet . tadādau saptame māsi tāṁ tithiṁ plāvyate mahī

. atha māghādiphalam .

māghasya sitasaptamyāṁ vṛṣṭirvā meghadarśanam . tadā saṁvatsaro

dhanyaḥ sarvaśasyaphalapradaḥ . saptamyāṁ svātiyoge yadi patati jalaṁ

mātha kṣa’ndhakāre vāyurvā caṇḍavegaḥ sajalajaladharau garjito vāsare

vā . vidyunmālākulaṁ vā yadi bhavati nabho naṣṭacandrārkatāraṁ

tāvadvarṣanti meghāḥ platadharaṇitale yāvadākārtikāntam . māghe

bahulasapamyāṁ tathaiva phālgunasya ca . caitra śuklavṛtīyāyāṁ

vaiśākhe prathame’hani . etāsu caṇḍavāto vā taḍidvṛṣṭirathāpi vā . tadā

syāt śobhanā prāvṛṭ bhavet śasyavatī kṣitiḥ . dhanurmakarakumbheṣu

yadā varṣati vāsavaḥ . tadādi saptame māsi vāripūrṇā bhavenmahī .

atha caitralakṣaṇam . pratipadi madhumāse bhānuvāraḥ sitāyāṁ yadi

bhavati tadā syāccittalā vṛṣṭaravade .

aviralapṛthudhārāsāndravṛṣṭipravāhairdharaṇitalamaśeṣaṁ plāvyate

somavāre . avanitanayavāre nāsti vṛṣṭirna śasyaṁ kavigurubhṛgujānāṁ

vāsare śasyapūrtiḥ . jalanidhirapi śoṣaṁ yāti vāreṇa śaurerbhavati khalu

dharitrī dhūlijālairadṛśyā . caitrādyabhāge citrāyāṁ bhavecceccittalā kṣitiḥ

. śeṣe’pi caiva cātyarthaṁ kṣmā madhye bahuvarṣiṇī

atha vaiśākhalakṣaṇam . pravāhayuktanadyāntu daṇḍaṁ nyasya jale

niśi . vaiśākhaśuklapratipathithau vṛṣṭiṁ nirūpayat . oṁ siddhiriti

mantreṇa mantrayitvā śatadvayam . aṅkayitvā tu taṁ daṇḍamaṅkatulye

jale kṣipet . prātarutthāya sahasā tadaṅkantu nirūpayet . samaṁ

caivādhika nyūnaṁ bhaviṣyajjalakāṅakṣayā . gatavatsaravadvāri vanyā

caiva same bhavet . hīne hīnaṁ bhavedvāri bhavedvanyā ca tādṛśī

aṅkādhikye ca dviguṇā vṛṣṭirvanyā ca jāyate . idaṁ parāśareṇoktaṁ

bhaviṣyadvṛṣṭilakṣaṇam . sūryodaye viṣuvato jagatāṁ vipattirmadhyaṁ

gate dinakare bahuśasyahāniḥ . astaṁ gate dinakare tu

tadardhaśasyamaiśvaryabhogamatulaṁ khala cārdharātrau . tadā

saṁvatsaro dhanyo bahuśasyaphalapradaḥ .

atha jyaiṣṭhalakṣaṇam . jyeṣṭhādau ca site pakṣe ārdrādau daśaṛkṣake

. sajalā nirjalā yānti nirjalāḥ sajalā iva . rekhātrayaṁ samullikhya

tābhistāśca vivardhayet . triśṛṅgaṁ sarvakoṇeṣu parvataṁ tatra dāpayet .

īśānāti dakṣiṇāṅkān saṁlikhedanalāditaḥ . yena yenājasaṁkrānti stena

prāvṛṭphalaṁ bhavet . ativṛṣṭiḥ samudre syādanāvṛṣṭistu parvate .

kakṣayościttalā vṛṣṭiḥ suvṛṣṭiḥ śailasandhiṣu . (matāntare .

rekhātūryakamullikhya tāḍitam veda sambhavaiḥ īśānadakṣiṇe śṛṅgaṁ

likhedanalabhāditaḥ . yena yenājasaṁkrāntistena prāvṛṭphalaṁ vadet .

aśvinyādau samudreṣu nakṣatrañca dvayaṁ dvayam . kakṣaparvatatīreṣu

ekaikaṁ parikīrtitam .) citrāsvātiviśākhāsu jyaiṣṭhe māsi nirabhratā .

tāsveva śrāvaṇe mā sa yadi varṣati, varṣati . atha āṣāḍhalakṣaṇam .

āṣāṇāṁ paurṇamāsyāṁ surapatikakubhaṁ vāti vātaḥ, suvṛṣṭiḥ,

śasyadhvaṁsaṁ prakuryāddahanadiśi gate, mandavṛṣṭiryamena .

nairṛtyāṁ śasyahāni, rbaruṇadiśi jalaṁ, vāyunā vāyukopaḥ, kauveryāṁ

śasyapūrṇāṁ prathayati niyataṁ medinīṁ, śasyamīśe . āṣāḍhasya site

pakṣe navamyāṁ yadi varṣati . varṣatyeva tadā devastatrāvṛṣṭau kuto

jalam . śuklāṣāḍhīnavamyāmudayagiritaṭīnirmalatvaṁ prayāte svīyaṁ

kālaṁ vidhatte kharatarakiraṇo maṇḍalā kāramukhyam .

jīmūtairveṣṭito’sau yadi bhavati ravirgamyamāne’staśaile tāvat

paryantameva praṇadati jalado yāvadastaṁ tulāyāḥ .

atha śrāvaṇalakṣaṇam . rohiṇyāṁ śrāvaṇe māsi yadi varṣati vāsavaḥ .

tadā vṛṣṭirbhavettāvadyāvannottiṣṭhate hariḥ . karkaṭe rohiṇīṛkṣe yadi

vṛṣṭirna jāyate . tadā parāśaraḥ prāha hāhā lokasya kā gatiḥ . śrāvaṇe

māsi rohiṇyāṁ na bhavedvarṣaṇaṁ yadi . viphalārambhasaṁkleśāstadā

syuḥ kṛṣivṛttayaḥ .

atha bhādralakṣaṇam . siṁhe ca bhaumavāre ca parvaphalguni ṛkṣake

. vyatīpāte ca nandāyāṁ tulāyāṁ varṣayedraviḥ . atha sadyāvṛṣṭijñānam .

jalahastī jalastho vā vikaṭe ‘tha jalasya vā . dṛṣṭvā pṛcchati vṛṣṭyarthaṁ

vṛṣṭiḥ saṁjāyate ‘cirāt . akasmādannamādāya uciṣṭhati pipālikā . bhekaḥ

śabdāyate’kasmāttadā vṛṣṭirbhaveddhruvam . viḍālā nakulāḥ sarpā ye

cānye vā vileśayāḥ . dhāvanti śarabhā matāḥ sadyo vṛṣṭirbhaveddhruvam

. kurvanti bālakā mārge dhūlībhiḥ setubandhanam . mayūrāścaiva nṛtyanti

sadyo vṛṣṭiḥ prajāyate . avātavātaduṣṭānāṁ nṛṇāmaṅgavyathā yadi .

vṛkṣādyārohaṇañcāheḥ sadyo varṣaṇalakṣaṇam . pakṣayoḥ śoṣaṇaṁ

raudre khagānāmambucāriṇām . jhillīravastathākāśe sadyo vṛṣṭiḥ

prajāyate .

atha grahasañcāre vṛṣṭilakṣaṇam . calatyaṅgārake vṛṣṭirdhruvā vṛṣṭiḥ

śanaiścare . vāripūrṇāṁ mahīṁ kṛtvā paścāt sañcarate guruḥ .

grahāṇāmudaye cāste tathā vakrāticārayoḥ . prāyo varṣanti jaladā

nṛpāṇāmudyame’pi ca . citrāmadhyagate jīve bhinnabhāṇḍamiva khavet .

tataḥ svātīṁ samāsādya mahāmegha na vimuktati .

prāyeṇopacitānmeghān svātirekā’pyapohati . śravaṇe janitaṁ varṣaṁ

revatyāñca vimuñcati . atha anāvṛṣṭilakṣaṇam . dhruve ca vaiṣṇave haste

mūle śakre caran kujaḥ . sadyaḥ karotyanāvṛṣṭiṁ kṛttikāsu maghāsu ca .

kajapṛṣṭhagato bhānurbhānupṛṣṭhagataḥ kujaḥ . sūryeṇa ca yuto

bhaumaḥ samudramaṁpa śoṣayet . sadyo nikṛntayedvṛṣṭiṁ

citrāmadhyagato bhṛguḥ . aṅgārako yadā siṁhe tada ṅgāramayī mahī . sa

eva raviṇā yuktaḥ samudramapi śoṣayet . jyo° ta° kaścidviśeṣa ukto

yathā

bhujabalabhīme vrajati yadi kajaḥ pataṅgamārge ghaṭa iva bhinnatalo

jalaṁ dadāti . atha bhavati divākarāgrataścet pralayaghanānapi

śoṣayatyavaśyam . yāvanmāttaṇḍasūnuścarati dhanuratho manmathaṁ

mīnakanye tāvaddurbhikṣapīḍā bhavati ca maraṇaṁ kṣutpipāsādighoram .

urvī nistūryaśabdā śavaśirapaṭalairnartayante piśācāḥ grāmāḥ śūnyā

bhaveyarnarapatirahitā hyasti kaṅkālamālā . vakraṁ karoti ravijo

dharaṇīsuto vā mūlarkṣahastamadharevatimaitrabhaṣu .

chatropabhaṅgapatanādi ca sainikānāṁ sarvatra lokamaraṇaṁ

jaladhautadeśaḥ . yadā ca sauriḥ surarājamantriṇā sametya tiṣṭhet

kacidṛkṣamaṇḍale . tadāṅgavaṅgāndhakakośaleṣu tribhāgaśeṣāṁ kurute

vasundharām . tiṣṭhetāṁ yāvadekarkṣe vākpatyavanijau . pade tāvat

kṣudrogasaṁgrāmāt prajānāṁ kṣayamādiśet . ārabhya śuklapatipattithiṁ

mārgāttu caitrakaṁ garbhanīhāraijaladairiti prāvṛṭparīkṣaṇam .

yannakṣatraṁ gatavati vidhau jāyate tatra garbhaḥ

paścādasmānnavatiśatake 19 cāhni tasya prasūtiḥ . garbhaśabde ca 2551

ambugarbhovṛhatsaṁhitokto darśitaḥ . varṣaṇasūcakanimittāni vṛ° saṁ°

24 a° uktāni yathā jyaiṣṭhyāṁ samatītāyāṁ pūrvāṣāḍhādisampravṛṣṭena .

śubhamaśubhaṁ vā vācyaṁ parimāṇaṁ cāmbhasastajjñaiḥ .

hastaviśālaṁ kuṇḍakamadhikṛtyāmbupramāṇanirdeśaḥ .

pañcāśatpalamāḍhakamanena minuyājjalaṁ patitam . yena dharitrīmudrā

janitā vā vindavastṛṇāgreṣu . vṛṣṭena tena vācyaṁ parimāṇaṁ vāriṇaḥ

prathamam . kecidyathābhivṛṣṭaṁ daśayojanamaṇḍalaṁ vadantyanye .

gargavaśiṣṭhaparāśaramatametaddvādaśānna param . yeṣu ca

bheṣvabhivṛṣṭaṁ bhūyasteṣveva varṣati prāyaḥ . yadi nāpyā(20)diṣu

vṛṣṭaṁ sarveṣu tadā tvanātuṣṭiḥ . hastāpya20 saumya5 citrāpauṣṇa° 7

dhaniṣṭhāsu ṣoḍaśa droṇāḥ . śatabhiṣagaindra18 svātiṣu catvāraḥ

kṛttikāsu daśa . śravaṇe pradhānurādhābharaṇīmūleṣu daśa caturyuktāḥ .

phalgunyāṁ pañca katiḥ 25 punarvasau viṁśatirdroṇāḥ . aindrāgnākhya

16 vaiśve 21 ca viṁśatiḥ sārpa9 bhe daśa tryadhikāḥ . 25

ahirbudhnāryamṇa14 prājāpatyeṣu pañcakṛti 25 . pañcadaśāje 4 puṣye ca

kīrtitā vāji 1 bha daśa dvau ca . raudraṁ 6 ‘ṣṭādaśa kathitā droṇā

nirupadraveṣveṣu raviravisutaketupīḍite bhe

kṣititanayatrividhādbhutāhate ca . bhavati hi na śivaṁ na cāpi vṛṣṭiḥ

śubhasahite nirupadravaṁ śivaṁ ca .

varṣāpraśne jalavarṣaṇanirṇayaḥ tatraiva 28 a° yathā varṣāpraśne

salilanilayaṁ rāśimāśritya candro lagnaṁ yāto bhavati yadi vā kendragaḥ

śuklapakṣe . saumyairdṛṣṭaḥ pracuramudakaṁ pāpadṛṣṭo’lpamambhaḥ

prāvṛṭkāle sṛjati na cirāccandravadbhārgavo’pi . ārdraṁ dravyaṁ spṛśati

yadi vā vāri tatsañajñakaṁ vā toyāsanno bhavati yadibā

toyakāryonmukho vā . praṣṭā, vācyaṁ salilamacirādasti niḥsaṁśayena

pṛcchākāle salilamiti vā śrūyate yatra śabdaḥ .

atha sadyavṛṣṭinimittam udayaśikharisaṁstho durnirīkṣyo’tidīptyā

drutakanakanikāśaḥ snigdhavaidūryava ntiḥ . tadahani

kurute’mbhastoyakāle vivasvān pratapati yadi voccaiḥ khaṁ gato’tīva

tīkṣṇam . virasasudakaṁ gonetrābhaṁ viyadvibhalā diśo lavaṇavikṛtiḥ

kākāṇḍābhaṁ yadā ca bhavennabhaḥ . pavananigamaḥ poplūyante jhaṣāḥ

sthalagāmino rasanamasakṛnmaṇḍūkānāṁ jalāgamahetavaḥ . mārjārā

bhṛśamavaniṁ nakhairlikhanto lohānāṁ malanicayaḥ savisragandhaḥ .

rathyāyāṁ śiśunicitāśca setubandhā . samprāptaṁ

jalamacirānnivedayanti . girayo’ñjanapuñjasannibhā yadi vā bāṣpa

niruddhakandarāḥ . kṛkavāku valocanopamāḥ pariveṣāḥ śaśinaśca

vṛṣṭidāḥ . vinopaghātena pipīlikānāmaṇḍopasaṁkrāntirahivyavāthaḥ .

drumādhirohaśca bhujaṅgamānāṁ vṛṣṭernimittāni gavāṁ plutaṁ ca .

taruśikharopagatāḥ kṛkalāsā gaganatala sthatavṛṣṭinipātāḥ . yadi ca

gavāṁ ravivīkṣaṇamūrdhvaṁ nipatati vāri tadā nacireṇa . yecchanti

vinirgamaṁ gṛhāddhunvanti śravaṇān khurānapi . pahavaḥ

paśavaccakukurā yaṭi cāmbhaḥ patatīti nirdiśet . yadā sthitā gṛhapaṭaleṣu

kurkurā bhavanti vā yadi vitataṁ divonmukhāḥ . divā taḍidyadi ca

pinākidigabhavā tadā kṣamā bhavati samātivāriṇā .

śukakapotavilocanasannibho madhu nabhaśca yadā himadīdhitiḥ .

pratiśaśī ca yadā divi rājate patati vāri tadā nacirāddivaḥ . sta nataṁ niśi

vidyuto divā, rudhiranibhā yadi daṇḍavat sthitāḥ . pavanaḥ parataśca

śītalo yadi salilasya tadāgamo bhavet . vallīnāṁ gaganatalonmukhāḥ

prabālāḥ snāyante yadi jalapāṁśubhirvihaṅgaḥ . sevante yadi ca

sarīsṛpāstṛṇāgrāṇyāsanno bhavati tadā jalasya pātaḥ .

mayūraśukacāmacātakasamānavarṇā yadā,

japākusumapaṅkajadyutimuṣaśca sandhyāthanāḥ .

jalorminaganakrakacchapavarāhamīnopabhāḥ prabhūtapuṭasañcayā na tu

cireṇa yacchantyapaḥ . paryanteṣu sudhāśaśāṅkadhavalā

madhye’ñjanālitviṣaḥ snigdhā naikapuṭāḥ kṣarajjalakaṇāḥ

sopānavicchedinaḥ . māhendrīprabhavāḥ prayāntyaparataḥ prāk

cāmbupāśīdbhavā ye te vārimucastyajanti nacirādambhaḥ prabhūtaṁ

bhuvi . śakracāpaparighapratisūryā rohito’tha taḍitaḥ pariveṣāḥ .

udgabhāstasamaye yadi bhānorādiśet pracuramambu tadāśu . yadi

tittiripatranibhaṁ gaganaṁ muditāḥ pravadanti ca pakṣigaṇāḥ .

udayāstamaye saviturdyuniśaṁ visṛjanti dhanā nacireṇa jalam .

yadyamothakiraṇāḥ sahasragorastabhūdharakarā ivocchratāḥ .

bhūsamaṁ ca rasate yadāmbudastanmahadbhavati vṛṣṭilakṣaṇam .

prāvṛṣi śītakaro bhṛguputrāt maptamarāśigataḥ śubhadṛṣṭaḥ .

sūyasūtānnavapañcamago vā saptamagaśca jalāgamanāya . prāyo

grahāṇāmudayāstakāle samāgame maṇḍalasaṁkrame ca . pakṣakṣaye

tīkṣṇakarāyanānte vṛṣtirgate’rke niyamena cārdrām . samāgame patati

jalaṁ jñaśukrayorjñajīvayorgurusitayośca saṅgame yamārayoḥ

pavanahutāśajaṁ bhayaṁ na dṛṣṭayorasahitayośca sadgrahaiḥ . agrataḥ

pṛṣṭhato vāpi grahāḥ sūryāvalambinaḥ yadā tadā prakurvanti

mahīmekārṇavāmiva

kṛṣau kedārājjalamocanakāla ukto yathā nairujyārtha hi dhānyānāṁ

jalaṁ bhādre vimocayet . mūlama trantu saṁsthāpya

kārayejjalamokṣaṇam . bhādre ca jalasampūrṇaṁ dhānyaṁ

vividhabādhakaiḥ . prapīḍitaṁ kṛṣāṇānāṁ na dhatte phalamuttamam .

kṛṣiparāśaraḥ .

m. the ocean

m. Cyperus rotundus

m. N. of a prince, VP. ii, 4, 60

m. of a Varsha in śāka-dvipa

jalada “jala-da” m. pl. N. of a school of the

jalada “jala-da” n. v.l. for “-ja” q.v.

jalada “jala-da” n. “-kāla” m. “cloud-season”, the rainy season “-kṣaya”

m. cloud-disappearance”, autumn 3825

jalada “jala-da” n. “-paṅkti” f. a line of clouds

jalada “jala-da” n. “-saṁhati” f. the gathering of clouds

jalada “jala-da” n. “-samaya” m. = “-kāla” “-dāgama” m. “approach of

clouds”, id.,

jalada “jala-da” n. “-dātyaya” m. = “-da-kṣaya”

jalada “jala-da” n. “-dābha” mfn. cloud-like, dark

jalada “jala-da” n. “-dāśana” m. “cloud-enjoyer”, Shorea robusta

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

jalada (jala + da) “Wasser gebend”, m. 1) “Regenwolke” H. 164. an. 3,

332. MED. d. 29. MBH. 3, 1638. R. 3, 58, 25. SUŚR. 1, 334, 3. MEGH. 13.

95. 113. PAÑCAT. I, 35. PRAB. 95, 1. GHAṬ. 3. 4. -paṭalāni PAÑCAT. V,

29. — 2) als Synonym von “Wolke” N. “eines Cyperus” (s. mustaka) H. an.

MED. — 3) pl. N. einer Schule des AV. Ind. St. 3, 278. sg. 1, 296. — 4) N.

pr. eines Varsha in Śākadvīpa MBH. 6, 425.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

jalada A mountain in Śāka island. The famous country known as

Kumudottaravarṣa is near this mountain. (M.B. Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 11,

Stanza 25).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

jalada jala-da, m.

1. A cloud, Kir. 5, 48.

2. The name of a varṣa, or division of the known continent, MBh. 6,

425.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

jalada m. a cloud (rain-giver).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

jalada jala-da, m. (water-giver), cloud: -kāla, m. rainy season;

-kṣaya, m. (disappearance of clouds), autumn;

-taskara, m. robber of a cloud;

-samaya, m. rainy season;

-āgama, m. (arrival of clouds), rainy season;

-atyaya, m. autumn.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

jalada pu° jalaṁ dadāti dā–ka . 1 meghe, 2 karpūre ca 3 jaladātari tri°

medi° . anaticirojjhitasya jaladena cirasthitabahuvudvudasya

payaso’nukṛtim . prauḍhadhvāntaṁ dinamiha jaladāḥ māghaḥ sandeśaṁ

me tadanujalada! śroṣyasi śrotrapeyam megha° .

n. a kind of diagram, Tantr.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

jalaviṣuva (jala + vi-) n. 1) “Herbst-Aequinoctium” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. —

2) = cakraviśeṣa SAMAYĀMṚTA im ŚKDR.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

jalāṁśu m. = jaḍāṁśu “der Mond”; s. zu Spr. 1079.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

jalāṁśu jala+aṁśu, m. (cool-rayed), moon (= jaḍāṁśu);

-āgama, m. rain;

-añjali, m. two handfuls of water in honour of the dead; farewell for

ever (fig.);

-atyaya, m. (cessation of the rain), autumn;

-ādhāra, m. reservoir, pond.

m. love

m. time

m. autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

titha UṆĀDIS. 2, 12. m. 1) “Feuer.” — 2) “Liebe” UJJVAL. — 3) “Zeit”

TRIK. 1, 1, 103. — 4) “Herbst” UṆĀDIVṚ. im SAṁKṢIPTAS. ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

titha pu° tija–thak ni° jalopaḥ . 1 vahnau 2 kāme ca si° kau° 3 kāle trikā°

. 4 prāvṛṭmāle saṁkṣiptasā° .

tithaḥ

(1) Fire.

(2) Love.

(3) Time.

(4) The rainy season or autumn.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

tithaḥ puṁ, (tejayatīti . tija + tithapṛṣṭhagūthayūthaprothāḥ . uṇāṁ . 2 .

12 . iti thakpratyayena nipātanāt sādhuḥ .) agniḥ . kāmaḥ . iti

siddhāntakaumudyāmuṇādivṛttiḥ .. kālaḥ . iti trikāṇḍaśeṣaḥ .. prāvṛṭkālaḥ

. iti saṁkṣiptasāre uṇādivṛttiḥ ..

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

toyakaṇa m. drop of water.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

toyakaṇa toya-kaṇa, m. drop of water;

-kar-man, n. libation of water to the dead;

-kriḍā, f. sporting in the water;

-cara, a. moving in the water; m. aquatic animal;

-ja, a. growing or living in the water; n. lotus;

-akṣī, f. lotus-eyed maiden;

-da, n. rain-cloud: -atyaya, m. autumn;

-dhara, a. water-bearing;

-dhāra, m., ā, f. stream of water;

-dhi, m. ocean;

-maya, a. (ī) consisting of water;

-mātra+avaśeṣa, a. having nothing but water left (in them);

-muc, m. cloud;

-yantra, n. water-clock;

-rāj, m. ocean (lord of waters);

-rāśi, m. pond, lake; sea;

-vat, a. supplied with or surrounded by water;

-vāha, m. rain-cloud.

m. Cyperus rotundus

m. ghee

toyada “toya-da” m. “-dātyaya” m. “cloud-departure”, the autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

toyada (toya + da “gebend”) 1) m. a) “Regenwolke” MED. d. 30. R. 5,

40, 10. RAGH. 6, 65. VIKR. 14. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 36. vyanadatsaṁkhye

satoya iva toyadaḥ BHĀG. P. 8, 11, 23. gaganaṁ gatatoyadam R. 1, 44,

22. toyadātyaye “im Herbst” 2, 72, 19. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43 (34), 24. — b)

(wie alle Wörter für “Wolke) eine Art Cyperus” (mustaka) MED. — 2) n.

“Opferschmalz” (ājya) MED.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

toyada toya-da, m. A cloud, Rām. 5, 40, 10.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

toyada m. cloud (lit. giving water).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

toyada pu° toyaṁ dadāti dā + ka . 1 meghe, 2 mustake ca . 3 ghṛte na°

medi° . 4 vidhinā jaladātari tri° . toyadastṛptimāptoti purā° .

taddānamāhātmyaṁ bhā° śā° dānadharme yathā anne datte nareṇeha

prāṇā dattā bhavantyuta . prāṇadānāddhi paramaṁ na dānamiha vidyate

. annaṁ vāpi prabhavati pānīyāt kurusattama! . nīrajātena hi vinā na

kiñcit saṁpravartate . annauṣadhyo mahārāja! vīrudhaśca jalodbhavāḥ .

yataḥ prāṇabhṛtāṁ prāṇāḥ sambhavanti viśāmpate! . tasmāt

pānīyadānāṁdvai na paraṁ vidyate kvacit . tacca dadyānnaronitya

yadīcched bhūtimātmanaḥ . dhanyaṁ yaśasyamāyuṣyaṁ

jaladānamihocyate . śatrūṁścāpyadhi kaunteya! sadā tiṣṭhati toyadaḥ .

sarvakāmānavāptoti kīrtiñcaiveha śāśvatīm . pretya cānantyamaśnāti

pāpebhyaśca pramucyate . toyado manuja vyāghra! svargaṁ gatvā

mahādyute! . akṣayān samavāptoti lokānityavravīn manuriti .

toyadātyaya m. autumn (end of the clouds).

toyam

(1) Water; S. 7. 12.

(2) The constellation pūrvāṣāḍhā or its regent.

— Comp.

–adhivāsinī trumpet-flower.

–ātman m. the Supreme Being.

–ādhāraḥ, –āśayaḥ a lake, well, any reservoir of water;

toyādhārapathāśca valkalaśikhāniṣyaṁdarekhāṁkitāḥ S. 1. 14.

–ālayaḥ the ocean, sea.

–īśaḥ ‘lord of waters’ an epithet of Varuṇa. (

–śaṁ) the constellation called pūrvāṣāḍhā. –utsargaḥ discharge of

water, raining; Me. 37.

–karman n. 1. ablutions of various parts of the body performed

with water. –2. libations of water to the deceased.

–kāma a. 1. fond of water. –2. thirsty. (

–maḥ) a sort of crane.

–kṛcchraḥ, –cchraṁ a kind of penance, drinking nothing but water

for a fixed period.

–krīḍā sporting in water; Me. 33.

–garbhaḥ the cocoanut.

–caraḥ an aquatic animal.

–ḍiṁbaḥ, –ḍiṁbhaḥ hail.

–daḥ a cloud; R. 6. 65; V. 1. 14. -atyayaḥ the autumn.

–daṁ ghee.

–dharaḥ a cloud.

–dhāraḥ 1. a cloud. –2. raining.

–dhiḥ, –nidhiḥ 1. the ocean. –2. the number ‘four’ -priyaṁ cloves.

–nīvī the earth.

–pāṣāṇajamalaṁ oxide of zinc.

–puṣpī, –praṣṭhā trumpet-flower.

–prasādanaṁ the clearing-nut tree or its nut, see. aṁbuprasādana

or kataka. –malaṁ sea-foam

–muc m. a cloud.

–yaṁtraṁ 1. a waterclock. –2. an artificial jet or fountain of

water.

–rasaḥ moisture.

–rāj m. 1. the ocean. –2. Varuṇa, the regent of waters.

–rāśiḥ the ocean.

–velā the edge of water, shore.

–vyatikaraḥ confluence (as of rivers); R. 8. 95.

–śuktikā an oyster.

–sarpikā, –sūcakaḥ a frog.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

toyam adv. v.l. für tūyam (s. u. tūya) NAIGH. 2, 15.

and autumn”, vii)

triyuga “tri-yuga” mfn. appearing in the first 3 Yugas (Kṛiṣṇa)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

triyuga (tri + yuga) n. oxyt. “ein Zeitraum von drei Perioden” oder

“Altern” NIR. 9, 28. yā oṣadhīḥ pūrvā jātā devebhyastriyugaṁ purā “um

drei Alter vor den Göttern” ṚV. 10, 97, 1. Nach DURGA: “vor den drei”

(letzten) Juga d. i. “im ersten” J.; nach ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 4, 26 und

MAHĪDH. zu VS. 12, 75 “im Frühling, in der Regenzeit, im Herbst.”

triyuga (wie eben) adj. als Beiw. von Kṛṣṇa “in drei” Juga “zur

Erscheinung kommend” MBH. 12, 504. BHĀG. P. 3, 24, 26. 5, 18, 35. 7, 9,

38. triyugau – vāsudevadhanaṁjayau MBH. 3, 8280.

triyuga vgl. u. yuga 4).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

triyuga n. three periods or ages.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

triyuga pu° trīṇi yugāni āvirbhāvakālo’sya . 1 yajñapuruṣe tasya kṛtayuye

āvirbhāvābhāvāt kalau channatvāt vā . itthaṁ

nṛtiryagṛṣidevajhaṣāvatārairlokān vibhāvayasi haṁsi jagat pratīpān .

dharmaṁ mahāpuruṣa! pāsi yugānuvṛttaṁ channaḥ kalau

yadabhavastriyugo’tha sa tvam bhāga° 7 . 9 . 38 kalau tu tanna karosi

yatastadā tvaṁ channo’bhavaḥ yatastriṣveva yugeṣvāvirbhāvāt sa

evambhūtastvaṁ triyuga iti prasiddhaḥ śrīdharasvāmī . 2

vasantādikālatraye . yā oṣadhīḥ pūrvā jātā devebhyastriyugaṁ purā yaju°

12 . 75 yugaśabdaḥ kālavācī trayāṇāṁ yugānāṁ samāhārastriyugaṁ

trikālaṁ vasante prāvṛṣi śaradi ca . vedadī° .

dhārādhara “dhārā-dhara” m. “-rāgama” m. “cloud-coming”, the rainy

season

dhārādhara “dhārā-dhara” m. “-rātyaya” m. “cloud-ceasing”, autumn

dhārādhara “dhārā-dhara” m. “-rodyāna” n. “cloud-garden”, N. of a

grove, Priyad.

dhārādhara “dhārā-dhara” m. sword

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dhārādhara (1. dhārā + dhara) m. “Wolke” AK. 1, 1, 2, 8. TRIK. 3, 3, 357.

H. 164. an. 4, 259. MED. r. 270. MBH. 4, 2039. HARIV. 11851. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 19, 16. KATHĀS. 24, 20. CĀT. 4. 7. ŚATR. 10, 185.

dhārādhara (2. dhārā + dhara) m. “Schwert” TRIK. 3, 3, 357. H. ś. 145

(fälschlich dharā-). H. an. 4, 259. MED. r. 270.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dhārādhara m. cloud (water-bearer).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dhārādhara dhārā-dhara, m. cloud: -āgama, m. rainy season;

-atyaya, m. (departure of the clouds), autumn.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dhārādhara pu° dhārāṁ dharati dhṛ–ac . 1 meghe 2 khaḍge ca medi° .

dhārādhara! dharā vāridhārayā paripūryate . khagacañcupuṭadroṇīpūraṇe

tava kaḥ śramaḥ cātakāṣṭakam pratyagṛhṇāt prahṛṣṭātmā

dhārādharamivācalaḥ bhā° vi° 64 a0

with its tusks)

mfn. bent down or inclined by (comp.)

mfn. changed or transformed into (instr. or comp.)

mfn. developed, ripened, mature, full-grown, perfect

mfn. full (as the moon)

mfn. set (as the sun) &c.

mfn. advanced (“vayasā”, in age ; also impers. “-taṁ vayasā”, “life is

advanced, old age has come”

mfn. digested (as food)

mfn. elapsed (as time)

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. capital, wealth accumulated for the sake of profit

(?)

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. “-dik-karika” mfn. containing mythical elephants

(see “dik-karin”) stooping to strike with their tusks

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. “-dvirada” m. an elephant stooping &c.

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. “-prajṇa” mfn. of mature understanding

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. “-pratyaya” mfn. (an action) whose results are

matured

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. “-vayas” mfn. advanced in age

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. “-śarvad” f. the latter part of the autumn

pariṇata “pari-ṇata” n. “-tāruṇa” m. the setting sun

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pariṇata p. p.

(1) Bent or bowed down, stooping; Me. 2.

(2) Declining, old (as age); pariṇate vayasi K. 35, 62, 63.

(3) Ripe, matured, ripened, fully developed or formed; śa

bdabrahmavidaḥ kaveḥ pariṇataprajñasya vāṇīmimāṁ U. 7. 21; 1. 39, 6.

13; Me. 23; pariṇatamakaraṁdamārmikāste Bv. 1. 8; Śi. 11. 49.

(4) Full-grown, advanced, perfected; pariṇataśaraccadraṁkriraṇaiḥ

Bh. 3. 49; Me. 110.

(5) Digested (as food).

(6) Transformed or changed into (with instr.); V. 4. 28.

(7) Ended, come to a close, terminated.

(8) Set (as the sun); S. 1. 32. –taḥ An elephant stooping to strike

with his tusks, or giving a side-blow with his tusks;

(tiryagdaṁtaprahāraśca gajaḥ pariṇato mataḥ Halāy.); Śi. 4. 29; Ki. 6. 7.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pariṇata a. bent outwards or aside, altered, changed into (instr. or –°),

developed, ripe, mature, abundant, advanced (age), full (moon), setting

(sun), digested (food), faded, passed.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pariṇata tri° pari + ṇama–kta . 1 paripakve amaraḥ . 2 pariṇāmayukte

tirygdantaprahāraśca gajaḥ pariṇatomataḥ halāyudhokte 3gajabhede

māghaḥ 4.29 11.35 sarvatonate ca 5 śeṣayute ca.

pron. when implying relative position whether in place or time, but not

necessarily in abl. loc. sg. m. n. and nom. pl. m.; see being before or in

front fore, first &c. &c.

mf (“ā”) n. eastern, to the east of (abl.)

mf (“ā”) n. former, prior, preceding, previous to, earlier than (abl. or

comp.) (“gaja-pūrva”, preceding the number “eight” i.e. seven, the

seventh ; “māsena p-” or “māsa-p-“, earlier by a month ; ifc. often =

formerly or before e.g. “strī-p-“, formerly a wife; “āḍhya-p-“, formerly

wealthy; esp. after a pp. e.g. “kṛta-p-“, done before, “dṛṣṭa-p-“, seen

before; ifc. also preceded or accompanied by, attended with e.g. “smita-

pūrvā-vāk”, speech accompanied by smiles; sometimes not translatable

e.g. “mṛdu-pūrvā vāk”, kind speech)

mf (“ā”) n. ancient, old, customary, traditional &c. &c.

mf (“ā”) n. first (in a series), initial, lowest (opp. to “uttara”; with

“dama” or “sāhasa” “the lowest fine”)

pūrva mf (“ā”) n. (with “vayas”) “first age”, youth

mf (“ā”) n. foregoing, aforesaid, mentioned before (abl.)

pūrva m. an ancestor, forefather (pl. the ancients, ancestors) &c. &c.

pūrva m. an elder brother

pūrva m. N. of a prince

pūrva mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. (with or sc. “diś”) the east

pūrva m. N. of a country to the east of Madhya-deśa

pūrva m. of the Nakshatras Pūrva-phalgunt, Pūrvāṣāḍhā and

Pūrvabhadrapadā collectively

pūrva n. the fore part (cf.

pūrva n. a partic. high number (applied to a period of years)

pūrva n. N. of the most ancient of Jaina writings (of which 14 are

enumerated)

pūrva n. N. of a Tantra

pūrva n. an ancient tradition

pūrva mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. before (also as a prep. with abl.), formerly,

hitherto, previously (sometimes with pres.) &c. &c. (often ibc. e.g.

“pūrva-kārin”, active before, “pūrvokta”, said before; also ifc. in the sense

of “with” e.g. “prīti-pūrvam”, with love; “mati-pūrvam” with intention,

intentionally; “mṛdu-pūrva-bhāṣ”, to speak kindly; cf. above; also with an

ind. p. e.g. “pūrva-bhojam”, or “-bhuktvā”, having eaten before ; “adya-

p-“, until now, hitherto; previously “-tataḥ”, first-then; “pūrva-paścāt”,

previously-afterwards; “pūrva-upari”, previously-subsequently; “pūrva-

adhūnā” or “adya”, formerly-now)

pūrva mf (“ā”) n. (“eṇa”) ind. in front, before

pūrva n. eastward, to the east of (opp. to “apareṇa”, with gen. or acc.;

cf. &c. &c.

pūrva n. (with “tataḥ”) “to the east of that”

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pūrva a. (Declined like a pronoun when it implies relative position in time

or space, but optionally so in nom. pl.; and abl. and loc. sing.)

(1) Being in front of, first, foremost.

(2) Eastern, easterly, to the east of; grāmātparvataḥ pūrvaḥ Sk.

(3) Previous to, earlier than.

(4) Old, ancient; pūrvasūribhiḥ R. 1. 4; idaṁ kavibhyaḥ pūrvebhyo

namovākaṁ praśāsmahe U. 1. 1.

(5) Former, previous, interior, prior, antecedent (opp. uttara); in this

sense often at the end of comp. and translated by ‘formerly’ or ‘before’;

śrutapūrva &c.

(6) A foresaid. before-mentioned.

(7) Initial.

(8) Established, customary, of long standing.

(9) Early, prime. pūrve vayasi Pt. 1. 165 ‘in early age or prime of life.’

(10) (At the end of comp.) Preceded by, accompanied by, attended with;

saṁbaṁdhamābhāṣaṇapūrvamāhuḥ R. 2. 58; puṇyaḥ śabdo muniriti

muhuḥ kevalaṁ rājapūrvaḥ S. 2. 14; tānsmitapūrvamāha Ku. 7. 47;

bahumānapūrvayā 5. 31; daśapūrvarathaṁ yamākhyayā

daśakaṁṭhāriguruṁ vidurbudhāḥ R. 8. 29; so matipūrvaṁ Ms. 11. 147

‘intentionally’, ‘knowingly’; 12. 89; abodhapūrvaṁ ‘unconsciously’, S. 5. 2

&c. –rvaḥ An ancestor, a forefather; pūrvaiḥ kilāyaṁ parivardhito naḥ R.

13. 3; payaḥ pūrvaiḥ saniśvāsaiḥ kavoṣyamupabhujyate 1. 67; 5. 14;

anukāriṇi pūrveṣā yuktarūpamidaṁ tvāyi S. 2. 16. –rvaṁ The forepart;

anavaratadhanurjyāsphālanakrūrapūrvaṁ (gātraṁ) S. 2. 4. –rvā 1 The

east

(2) N. of a country to the east of Madhydeśa. –rvaṁ ind.

(1) Before (with abl.); māsātpūrvaṁ.

(2) Formerly, previously, at first, antecedently, before-hand; taṁ

pūrvamabhivādayet Ms. 2. 117; 3. 94; 8. 205; R. 12. 35; praṇipātapūrvaṁ

K.; bhūtapūrvakharālayaṁ U. 2. 17 ‘which formerly was the abode’, &c.;

samayapūrvaṁ S. 5 ‘after a formal agree ment.’

(3) Immemorially. (pūrveṇa ‘in front, before’, to she east of’, with gen.

or acc.; adya pūrvaṁ ’tillnow’, hitherto’; pūrvaṁḥ -tataḥ -paścāta upari

‘first-then, first-afterwards’, ‘previously, subsequently’, pūrvaṁadhutā or

adya ‘formerly-now.’

— Comp.

–agniḥ the sacred fire kept in the house (āvasathā). –acalaḥ, —

adriḥ the eastern mountain behind which the sun and moon are supposed

to rise.

–adhikārin m. the first occupant, a prior owner.

–aṁtaḥ the end of a preceding word.

–apara a. 1. eastern and western. katamo’yaṁ

pūrvāparasamudrāvagāḍhaḥsānumānālokyata S 7; pūrvāparau toyanidhī

vagāhya Ku. 1. 1. –2. first and last. –3 prior and subsequent, preceding

and following. –4. connected with another. (

–raṁ) 1. what is before and behind. –2. connection. –3. the proof

and the thing to be proved. -virodhaḥ inconsistency, incongruity.

–abhimukha a. turned towards or facing the east.

–abhyāsaḥ former practice or experience.

–aṁbudhiḥ the eastern ocean.

–arjita a. attained by former works. (

–taṁ) ancestral property.

–ardhaḥ –rdhaṁ 1. the first half; dinasya

pūrvārdhaparārdhabhinnā chāyeva naitrī khalasajjanānāṁ Bh. 2. 60;

samāptaṁ pūrva rdhaṁ &c. –2. the upper part (of the body); śakuṁtalā

pūrvārdhena śayanādutthāya S. 3; R. 16. 6. –3. the first half of a

hemistich.

–ahṇa; the earlier part of the day, forenoon, Ms. 4. 96; 152.

(pūrvāhṇatana, pūrvāhṇikaḥ pūrvāhṇatana a. relating to the forenoon).

–āvedakaḥ a plaintiff.

–āṣāḍhā N. of the 20th lunar mansion consisting of two stars.

–itara a, western.

–ukta, –udita a. beforementioned, aforesaid.

–uttara a. north-eastern. (

–rā) the northeast. (

–re dual) the preceding and following, antecedent and

subsequent.

–karman n. 1. a former act or work. –2. the first thing to be done,

a prior work. –3. actions done in a former life. –4. preparations,

preliminary arrangements.

–kalpaḥ former times.

–kāyaḥ 1. the fore-part of the body of animals; paścārdhena

praviṣṭaḥ śarapatanabhayādbhūyasā pūrvakāyaṁ S. 1. 7. –2. the upper

part of the body of men; spṛśan kareṇānatapūrvakāyaṁ R. 5. 32;

paryaṁkabaṁdhasthirapūrvakāyaṁ Ku. 3. 45.

–kāla a. belonging to ancient times. (

–laḥ) former or ancient times.

–kālika, -kālīna a. ancient.

–kāṣṭhā the east, eastern quarter.

–kṛta a. previously done. (

–taṁ) an act done in a former life.

–koṭiḥ f. the starting point of a debate, the first statement or

pūrvapakṣa q. v.

–gaṁgā N. of the river Narmadā.

–codita a. 1. aforesaid, above-mentioned. –2. previously stated or

advanced (as an objection).

–ja a. 1. born or produced before or formerly, first-produced,

first-born. –2. ancient, old. –3. eastern. (

–jaḥ) 1 an elder brother; Śi. 6. 44; R. 15. 36. –2. the son of the

elder wife. –3. an ancestor, a forefather: sa pūrvajānāṁ kapilena roṣāt R.

16. 34. –4. (pl.) the progenitors of mankind. –5. the Manes living in the

world of the moon. (

–jā) an elder sister.

–janman n. a former birth. (–m.) an elder brother; R. 14. 44; 15.

95.

–jātiḥ f. a former birth.

–jñānaṁ knowledge of a former life.

–dakṣiṇa a. south-eastern. (

–ṇā) the south-east.

–dikpatiḥ Indra, the regent of the east.

–dina the forenoon.

–diś f. the east.

–diśya a. situated towards the east, eastern.

–diṣṭaṁ the award of destiny.

–devaḥ 1. an ancient deity. –2. a demon or Asura. –3. a

progenitor (pitṛ). –4. (dual) an epithet of Nara-Nārāyaṇa.

–devatā a progenitor (pitṛ) of gods or of men: akrodhanāḥ

śaucaparāḥ satataṁ brahmacāriṇaḥ . nyastaśastrā mahābhāgāḥ pitaraḥ

pūrvadevatāḥ … –deśaḥ the eastern country, or the eastern part of India.

–nipātaḥ the irregular priority of a word in a compound; cf.

paranipāta –pakṣaḥ 1. the fore-part or side. –2. the first half of a lunar

month. –3. the first part of an argument, the prima facie argument or

view of a question. –4. the first objection to an argument. –5. the

statement of the plaintiff. –6. a suit at law. –7. an assertion, a

proposition. -pādaḥ the plaint, the first stage of a legal proceeding.

–padaṁ the first member of a compound or sentence.

–parvataḥ the eastern mountain behind which the sun is supposed

to rise.

–pāṁcālaka a. belonging to the eastern Panchālas.

–pāṇinīyāḥ (m. pl.) the disciples of Pāṇini living in the east.

–pālin m. an epithet of Indra.

–pitāmahaḥ a forefather, an ancestor.

–puruṣaḥ 1. an epithet of Brahmā. –2. any one of the first three

ancestors, beginning with the father (pitṛ, pitāmaha, and prapitāmaha);

Pt. 1. 89. –3. an ancestor in general.

–pūrva a. each preceding one. (

–rvāḥ) m. pl. forefathers.

–phalgunī the eleventh lunar mansion containing two stars –

bhavaḥ an epithet of the planet Jupiter.

–bhāgaḥ 1. the forepart. –2. the upper part.

–bhā (bha) drapadā the twenty fifth lunar mansion containing two

stars.

–bhāvaḥ 1. priority. –2. prior or antecedent existence; yena

sahaiva yasya yaṁ prati pūvabhāvo’vagamyate Tarka K. –3. (Rhet.)

disclosing an inten tion.

–bhāṣin a. willing to speak first; hence polite, courteous.

–bhuktiḥ f. prior occupation or possession.

–bhūta a. preceding, previous.

–mīmāṁsā ‘the prior or first Mīmāmsā’, an inquiry into the first or

ritual portion of the Veda, as opposed to the uttaramīmāṁsā or vedāṁta;

see mīmāṁsā. –raṁgaḥ the commencement or prelude of a drama, the

prologue; yannāṭyavastunaḥ pūrvaṁ raṁgavighnopaśāṁtaye . kuśīlavāḥ

prakurvaṁti pūrvaraṁgaḥ sa ucyate .. D. R.; pūrvaragaṁ vidhāyaiva

sūtradhāro nivartate S. D. 283; pūrvaraṁgaḥ prasaṁgāya nāṭakīyasya

vastunaḥ Śi. 2. 8 (see Malli. thereon).

–rāgaḥ the dawning or incipient love, love between two persons

which springs (from some previous cause) before their meeting;

śravaṇāddarśanādvāpi mithaḥ saṁrūḍharāgayoḥ . daśāviśeṣo’yo prāptau

pūrvarāga sa ucyate … S. D. 214.

–rātraḥ the first part of the night.

–rūpaṁ 1. indication of an approaching change. –2. a symptom of

occurring disease. –3. the first of two concurrent vowels or consonants

that is retained. –4. (in Rhet.) a figure of speech which consists in

describing anything as suddenly resuming its former state.

–lakṣaṇaṁ a symptom of coming sickness.

–vayas a. young. (–n.) youth.

–vartin a. existing before, prior, previous.

–vādaḥ the first plea or commencement of an action at law.

–vādin m. the complainant or plaintiff.

–vṛttaṁ 1. a former event; R. 11. 10. –2. previous conduct.

–vairin a. one who first commences hostilities, an aggressor.

–śārada a. relating to the first half of autumn.

–śailaḥ see pūrvaparvata. –sakthaṁ the upper part of the thigh.

–saṁdhyā daybreak, dawn; Śi. 11. 40.

–sara a. going in front.

–sāgaraḥ the eastern ocean; R. 4. 32.

–sāhasaḥ the first or heaviest of the three fines.

–sthitiḥ f. former or first state.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pūrva (pūrba AK. 3, 4, 21, 136. MED. b. 6 und auch sonst) 1) adj. (f. ā)

mit pronom. Decl.; abl. auch pūrvāt, loc. auch pūrve, nom. pl. auch

pūrvās gaṇa sarvādi zu P. 1, 1, 27. P. 7, 1, 16. 1, 1, 34. VOP. 3, 9. 12. 37.

mit einem abl. verbunden P. 2, 3, 29. VOP. 5, 21. mit seinem subst.

componirt P. 2, 1, 58. a) “der vordere; östlich” (pūrvā sc. diś “Osten”)

AK. 3, 4, 21, 136. H. 167. an. 2, 532. MED. b. 6. HALĀY. 1, 101.

yasminbrahmā rājani pūrva eti ṚV. 4, 50, 8. rathaṁ pūrvaṁ karadaparaṁ

jūjuvāṁsam 5, 31, 11. Fuss AV. 10, 4, 3. Zitzen TBR. 2, 1, 8, 1.

kaniṣṭhapūrvāḥ ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 4, 15, 8. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 2, 4.

pūrvapaścājjaṅghādideśau AK. 2, 8, 2, 8. H. 1228. subst. “Vordertheil”:

pūrvaṁ kāyasya P. 2, 2, 1, Sch. anavaratadhanurjyāsphālanakrūrapūrva

(gātra) ŚĀK. 37. nāsā- TRIK. 2, 8, 37. instr. pl. fem. etwa “vorn,

vorwärts”: pra pūrvābhistirate rāṣṭi śūraḥ ṚV. 1, 104, 4. 5, 48, 2. pūrvam

“voran” ĪŚOP. 4, R. 6, 1, 8. — pūrve ardhe rajasaḥ “östlich” ṚV. 1, 92, 1.

AV. 11, 2, 25. 5, 6. ŚAT. BR. 10, 6, 4, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 4, 3. 4, 7, 19.

uttara- 5, 9, 20. 8, 5, 5. dakṣiṇa- 4, 7, 10. 25, 13, 31. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 4.

pūrvo yajamānāt “östlich von” LĀTY. 4, 10, 25. tīra SUND. 2, 12. samudra

(vgl. pūrvasamudra, -sāgara, pūrvāmbudhi) M. 2, 22. diś MBH. 5, 3762.

3768. R. 1, 65, 1. ŚATR. 14, 128. SIDDH. K. zu P. 1, 1, 28. -yāyin

SŪRYAS. 1, 29. 54. pūrvapaścimā 3, 4. pūrvapaścāyatāvetau MĀRK. P.

54, 24. paścimottarapūrvaiḥ (puradvāraiḥ) M. 5, 92. vijitya pṛthivīṁ

sarvāṁ sa pūrvāparadakṣiṇām MBH. 3, 15255. — b) “früher, vorherig,

vorhergehend vor” (abl.); “all, herkömmlich, bisherig”; pl. subst. “die

Alten, Altvordern” (Gegens. apara, avara, upara, uttara, paścima,

navyaṁs, nūtna, dvitīya); = ādi, ādya, agra, pūrvaja AK. 3, 2, 30. 3, 4, 21,

136. H. 1459. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 22. tānpūrvayā nividā hūmahe

vayam ṚV. 1, 89, 3. 96, 2. pūrvā viśvasmādbhuvanādabodhi 123, 2. āsāṁ

pūrvāsāmahasu svasṝṇāmaparā pūrvāmabhyeti paścāt 124, 9. 126, 5.

141, 5. jaritāraḥ 175, 6. karaṇāni 4, 19, 10. mānuṣātpūrvaḥ 2, 3, 3.

pitaraḥ 6, 22, 2. ṛṣayaḥ 7, 29, 4. 5, 25, 2. na te pūrve madhavannāparāso

na vīryaṁ1 nūtanaḥ kaścanāpa 42, 6. pūrvaḥ pūrvo yajamāno vanīyān 5,

77, 2. 6, 69, 6. 7, 22, 9. 8, 20, 15. 27, 10. 10, 15, 2. agneḥ pūrve bhrātaro

arthametamanvāvarīvuḥ 10, 51, 6. AV. 9, 5, 27. 10, 3, 3. 11, 5, 5. VS. 13,

31. 31, 20. rākāṁ pūrvāṁ śaṁset AIT. BR. 3, 37. 6, 20. 7, 33. ŚAT. BR. 1,

6, 1, 3. na pūrve nāpare janāḥ 13, 5, 4, 14. 12, 1, 3, 23. 3, 5, 1. 14, 4, 2,

2. 7, 1, 1. 9, 1, 10. KĀTY. ŚR. 2, 8, 1. 1, 1. 9, 13, 3. M. 1, 10. asamṛddhi

4, 137. -bhukti 8, 252. HIḌ. 3, 18. MBH. 5, 1063. R. 1, 25, 9. 31, 3. janana

KUMĀRAS. 1, 54. nāsamīkṣya paraṁ sthānaṁ pūrvamāyatanaṁ tyajet

Spr. 905. ŚĀK. 41, 11. -cintana RĀJA-TAR. 5, 200. abde pūrve AK. 3, 5,

20. saṁdhyā M. 2, 101. fgg. 4, 93. MBH. 1, 657. pūrve manīṣiṇaḥ M. 2,

89. 3, 37. 9, 267. BHAG. 4, 15. MBH. 1, 7178. RAGH. 1, 4. KATHĀS. 4, 10.

dhriyamāṇe tu pitari pūrveṣāṁ nirvapet M. 3, 220. R. 1, 42, 2. 2, 2, 4. 73,

17. 18. RAGH. 1, 67. 5, 14. ŚĀK. 49. KATHĀS. 32, 116. MĀRK. P. 21, 92.

matpūrvaiḥ puruṣaiḥ kṛtam “die vor mir gelebt haben” 133, 14. matpūrvaḥ

“mein älterer Bruder” R. GORR. 2, 93, 14. māsena pūrvaḥ und

māsapūrvaḥ “um einen Monat früher” P. 2, 1, 31. SIDDH. K. zu P. 1, 1,

30. pūrvasmiñchūnye devagṛhe “in dem früher leeren Tempel” VID. 171.

In comp. mit dem praed., das seinen Accent bewahrt, P. 6, 2, 22. āḍhya-,

darśanīya- “der früher reich, hübsch war”, Sch. strī- “der früher ein Weib

gewesen ist” MBH. 5, 5939. 6, 4483. 4967 (wo wohl -pūrvaḥ zu lesen ist).

Ueberaus häufig nach einem partic. praet. pass.: dṛṣṭa- “früher gesehen”

N. 1, 13. 28. 23, 7. MBH. 2, 2344. R. 1, 9, 21. 3, 49, 25. 52, 36. adṛṣṭa- N.

16, 22. R. 1, 9, 27. MṚCCH. 90, 11. śruta- R. GORR. 1, 69, 22. ŚĀK. 95, 5.

ukta- R. 1, 58, 19. vanaṁ na gatapūrvaṁ te SĀV. 4, 20. pariṇīta- ŚĀK. 65,

23. ūḍha- 79, 15. 110, 17. carita- 96. aparijñāta- MBH. 13, 1591.

anāsvādita- R. 1, 9, 36. RAGH. 3, 54. ānamita- 11, 72. kṛta- HIT. ed.

JOHNS. I, 114. vidita- PRAB. 91, 6. na nivartitapūrvaśca

kadācidraṇamūrdhani MBH. 5, 7311. bhūta- P. 5, 3, 53. 6, 2, 22. ARJ. 8,

21. BRĀHMAṆ. 1, 22. ajantabhūtapūrva P. 3, 1, 97, Sch. abhūta- R. 1, 9,

20. pītasomapūrva M. 11, 8. — compar. pūrvatara ṚV. 1, 113, 11. kāla

MBH. 5, 3768. abde pūrve pūrvatare yati AK. 3, 5, 20. pūrvataraḥ

kaścitsakhā BHĀG. P. 4, 28, 51. pitāmahāḥ pūrvatarāśca teṣām R. GORR.

2, 118, 30. tvatto janāḥ pūrvatare R. SCHL. 2, 109, 34. — pūrvam adv.

“vormals, früher, zuerst, zuvor, vorher”: yamu pūrvamāhuve tamidaṁ

huve ṚV. 2, 37, 2. 1, 30, 9. AV. 4, 35, 2. 37, 1. 8, 1, 10. AIT. BR. 3, 32. M.

8, 354. fg. BRĀHMAṆ. 1, 20. MBH. 2, 1423. R. 1, 1, 22. SŪRYAS. 1, 44.

RAGH. 4, 2. ŚĀK. 82, 9. 143. KATHĀS. 2, 68. 32, 172. MĀRK. P. 62, 15.

PAÑCAT. 45, 2. pūrvaṁ hyapi sakhā me ‘si (praes.!) saṁbandhī ca

janādhipa. ata ūrdhvaṁ tu bhūyastvaṁ prītimāhartumarhasi.. N. 25, 11.

kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam R. 1, 65, 16. padmo

nāma nidhiḥ pūrvaṁ mayasya bhavati MĀRK. P. 68, 8. taṁ

pūrvamabhivādayet M. 2, 117. 3, 94. 204. YĀJÑ. 1, 247. R. 2, 72, 9. ahaṁ

pūrvamahaṁ pūrvamityanyo’nyaṁ nijaghnatuḥ SUND. 4, 18. MBH. 7,

1807. PAÑCAT. 51, 18. H. 318. pūrvaṁ doṣānabhikhyāpya M. 8, 205.

pūrvaṁ bhojaṁ (oder bhuktvā) vrajati P. 3, 4, 24. pūrvam – tatas M. 2,

60. 5, 139. SĀV. 3, 13. R. 1, 12, 21. ŚĀK. 189. pūrvam – paścāt 179. M. 4,

125. pūrvam – upari Spr. 2351. pūrvam – adhunā 2831. pūrvam – adya

ŚĀK. 184. adya pūrvam “bis jetzt” R. 1, 32, 8. pūrvam mit dem abl. “vor”

KAṬHOP. 4, 6. BRĀHMAṆ. 2, 22. jyeṣṭhābhigamanāt RAGH. 12, 35. am

Ende eines comp. “nach”: devatātithipūrvaṁ (“so dass Götter und Gäste

vorangehen”) ca sadā prāśnīta vāgyataḥ MBH. 14, 1272. pitṛpūrvaṁ

visarjayet (v. l. visarjanam) YĀJÑ. 1, 246 (“nachdem er vorher die Väter

angerufen” STENZLER). Das adv. ohne Flexionszeichen häufig am

Anfange eines comp. vor einem adj., namentlich vor einem partic. praet.

pass.: pūrvāpakārin R. 2, 97, 25; vgl. -kārin, -kṛt u. s. w. pūrvokta M. 2,

185. 3, 256. 7, 200. -codita 3, 26. 8, 160. pūrvacoditatva PĀR. GṚHY. 2,

17. – M. 6, 15. 8, 37. 9, 87. 281. MBH. 14, 524. R. 1, 31, 21. R. GORR. 1,

70, 13. ŚĀK. 172. KUMĀRAS. 7, 47. KATHĀS. 25, 182. 32, 26. PAÑCAT.

20, 7. 129, 1. pūrvānubhūta Schol. zu CAURAP. Einl. compar. pūrvataram

BHAG. 4, 15. sa dadarśa sītāṁ sītā ca taṁ pūrvataraṁ dadarśa “hatte ihn

früher erblickt” R. 3, 48, 19. — c) “der erste in der Reihenfolge”: sāhasa

so v. a. “die niedrigste Strafe” M. 8, 120. 121. 276. 9, 281. dama 287.

trayaścāśramiṇaḥ pūrve (nach KULL. der brahmacārin, gṛhastha und

vānaprastha) 12, 114. — d) “vorhergehend, früher” so v. v. a. “zuerst

genannt, – ausgesprochen u.s.w.” (Laut, Wort); Gegens. uttara M. 10, 68.

HIT. I, 8. P. 8, 2, 104. Kār. zu P. 4, 1, 18. H. 17. pūrva – para P. 6, 1, 84.

pūrvaṁ pūrvaṁ vivarjayet M. 2, 184. 7, 52. 9, 295. 10, 114.

pūrvapūrvatamābhāve MBH. 1, 4674. -vidhi P. 1, 1, 57.

pūrvottarasūtrayoḥ P. 1, 4, 106, Sch. pūrvataraśloke KULL. zu M. 1, 20.

pūrvākṣara M. 2, 125. dīrghaplutayoḥ pūrvā mātrā AV. PRĀT. 1, 38. 56.

alo ‘ntyātpūrva upadhā P. 1, 1, 65. Vārtt. zu P. 1, 1, 46. 47. sarvaṁ

pūrvam “alle vorangehenden Wörter” AK. 2, 9, 9. nāmi- “dem ein” Nāmin

“vorangeht” ṚV. PRĀT. 1, 20. 21. 2, 10. gajapūrva “Elephanten” d. i. “der

Zahl acht vorangehend” so v. a. “der siebente” ŚRUT. 13. pūrve “die

folgenden Wörter” AK. 2, 6, 2, 7. puṇyaḥ śabdo muniriti kevalaṁ

rājapūrvaḥ “wenn” rājan “ihm vorangeht” ŚĀK. 47. daśapūrvaratha d. i.

daśaratha RAGH. 8, 29. jñā ityetasmādanupūrvāt P. 1, 3, 58, Sch. AK. 3,

6, 2, 16. 8, 43. pūrvam adv.: sravatyanoṁkṛtaṁ pūrvaṁ parastācca

viśīryate M. 2, 74. bhavatpūrvaṁ caredbhaikṣamupanīto dvijottamaḥ.

bhavanmadhyaṁ tu rājanyo vaiśyastu bhavaduttaram.. “so dass mit” bha-

“die Rede beginnt” 49. — e) am Ende adjectivischer Compp. erblasst bei

pūrva häufig die Bedeutung “des Frühern, Vorangehenden” und das Wort

lässt sich hier durch “begleitet von, verbunden mit” (vgl. puraskṛta unter

puras, und puraskāra) wiedergeben; auch werden solche Composita mit

der Endung des acc. oft als Adverbia gebraucht.

saṁbandhamābhāṣaṇapūrvamāhuḥ “man sagt, die Freundschaft beginne

mit einem Gespräche”, RAGH. 2, 58. Hier hat pūrva noch seine

ursprüngliche Bedeutung; so auch in bahumānapūrvā saparyā “auf

Hochachtung beruhend” KUMĀRAS. 5, 31 und saṁskārapūrvaṁ grahaṇaṁ

śruteḥ AK. 2, 7, 40. H. 842. Dagegen ist mṛdupūrvā vāk einfach “eine

freundliche Rede” N. 11, 32. mṛdupūrvaṁ ca bhāṣate so v. a. “freundlich”

R. 2, 1, 8. N. 22, 2. prītipūrvam MBH. 1, 5135. smitapūrvaṁ vaco ‘bravīt

INDR. 4, 5. HIḌ. 2, 23. smitapūrvābhibhāṣin N. 3, 19. Spr. 2769.

KUMĀRAS. 7, 47. uvāca madhuraṁ vākyaṁ sāntvapūrvāmadaṁ śanaiḥ

HIḌ. 4, 26. upāyapūrva ārambhaḥ AK. 3, 4, 23, 142. praṇāmapūrvam

KATHĀS. 2, 52. tatra nāmānvayākhyānapūrvaṁ caitāmadarśayat 29, 32.

pradānapūrvaṁ saṁtoṣya tām “mit einem Geschenke” 3, 56. yadi vā

buddhipūrvāṇi yadyabuddhyāpi kānicit. mayā kṛtānyakāryāṇi “mit oder

ohne Wissen” N. 25, 9. R. 2, 22, 8. matipūrvam (Gegens. ajñānāt) M. 11,

146. abodhapūrvam “ohne Wissen” ŚĀK. 99. vadho jñānapūrvakṛtaḥ DAŚ.

2, 22. M. 12, 89. vidhi- R. 1, 11, 17. aprekṣāpūrvakārin RĀJA-TAR. 4, 610.

aprekṣāpūrvakāritā 58. sā galamoṭanapūrvaṁ vināśitā ŚUK. in LA. 43, 1.

mṛdupūrveṇa = mṛdupūrvam MBH. 4, 119. tryabdapūrva entspricht

daśābdākhya M. 2, 134. hayapūrveṇa karmaṇā so v. a. hayamedhena R.

1, 11, 9. putrikāpūrvapūtrāḥ sind wohl “Söhne durch Vermittelung einer”

putrikā MBH. 13, 1591. gaṇa- (u. d. Worte falsch erklärt) wohl “zu einer

Körperschaft gehörend” ebend. strī- (bedeutet auch “früher Weib

gewesen”; s. u. b) wohl “der viel mit Weibern zu thun hat” oder “sich von

seinem Weibe beherrschen lässt” 1593. sakhipūrva n. scheint “das Jmd-

Freund-Nennen, Freundschaft” zu bedeuten: na daridro vasumato

nāvidvānviduṣaḥ sakhā. na śūrasya sakhā klīvaḥ sakhipūrvaṁ kimiṣyate

MBH. 1, 5142. 5144. tato drupadamāgamya sakhipūrvamahaṁ prabho.

abruvaṁ puruṣavyāghra sakhāyaṁ (so ist zu lesen st. sakhā ‘yaṁ) viddhi

māmiti.. 5194; hier ist das Wort adv. “ich sprach ihn mit ‘Freund’ an.” — f)

fehlerhafte Variante für pūrṇa “voll, ganz” SVĀMIN zu AK. 3, 2, 15. ŚKDR.

— 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten BHĀG. P. 9, 2, 19. — 3) f. ā a) “Osten”; s. u.

1,a. Bez. “des im Osten von” Madhyadeśa “gelegenen Landes” LIA. I, 93.

— b) zusammenfassende Bezeichnung der Nakshatra pūrvaphālgunī,

pūrvāṣāḍhā und pūrvabhadrapadāḥ -traya VARĀH. BṚH. S. 15, 28. 97, 8.

-yukte niśākare WEBER, GJOT. 34. — 4) n. a) “eine best. grosse Zahl von

Jahren” H. 133; vgl. den Schol. und COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 208. — b) N.

der “ältesten” Schriften der Jaina, deren 14 aufgezählt werden, H. 247.

fg. = śrutibheda H. an. — c) N. eines Tantra Verz. d. Oxf. H. 109,a,14. —

Nach gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31 ist pūrva m. und n. Das Wort ist wohl

etymologisch verwandt mit purā, puras. Vgl. a-, anu-, abhi-, uttara-,

yathāpūrvam; pūrveṇa s. besonders.

pūrva 1) e) Sp. 843, Z. 3 v. u. vgl. janaughaṁ vipramukhyānāṁ

vittapūrvaṁ “(reich beschenkt)” visṛjya R. 7, 99, 5. Sp. 844, Z. 5. fgg.

NĪLAK. zu MBH. 13, 1591. fgg.: asyāmutpannaḥ putro madīya iti

niyamena yā dīyate tasyāṁ ca yo jātaḥ sa putrikāpūrvaputraḥ; gaṇapūrvā

grāmaṇyaḥ (vgl. oben u. gaṇapūrva); strīpūrvāḥ strījitāḥ strīpaṇyopajīvino

vā. Z. 9. fg. NĪLAK.: pūrvaṁ sakhā iti sakhipūrvaṁ jīrṇaṁ sakhyam. — 4)

b) vgl. WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 285. 303.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pūrva pūrva, i. e. pura + va (see purā), also pārba, adj., f. vā (bā).

1. Fore, Śāk. d. 37.

2. Former, prior, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 905.

3. First, Man. 1, 10.

4. Lowest, Man. 8, 120.

5. Eastern, Man. 2, 22.

II. adv. vam.

1. Before, Chr. 3, 2; first, Pañc. 51, 18.

2. Formerly, Chr. 16, 20.

3. Immemorially, Man. 9, 87.

III. pūrveṇa, instr. adv. To the east, Rām. 2, 70, 11.

IV. An ancestor, Pañc. iii. d. 216; Man. 3, 220.

V. f. vā, The cast.

— Comp. a-, adj. 1. new, Pañc. ii. d. 16; unknown, 68, 13. 2.

incomparable. a-dṛṣṭa- (vb. dṛś),

I. adj. not seen before, Rām. 5, 54, 3. adya-, adv. till to-day, Rām. 1, 32,

8. an-āmaya-praśna-, adv. after having inquired for a person’s health.

anya-, f. vā, a woman previously promised to one and married to another.

a-bodha-, adv. without having perceived before, Śāk. d. 99. aham-, adj.

desiring to be the first, Rām. 2, 12, 92. tri-abda-, adv. less than three

years, Man. 2, 134. dakṣiṇa-, adj., f. vā, south-eastern. pava-, f. a woman

formerly married, having belonged formerly to another man, Chr. 6. 8.

pūrva-pūrva,

I. adj. every preceding one.

II. m. pl. ancestors, MBh. 3, 12408. bhūta-, adj. prior; °vam, adv.

formerly. a-bhūta-, adj. not having existed before. mṛdu-, adj. mild,

friendly. adv. mildly, gently at first, Rām. 2, 1, 8. yathā-pūrvam, adv. 1. as

before, Pañc. 36, 18. 2. formerly. 3. in order or succession. sakhi-, adj.

more excellent than a friend, MBh. 1, 5142. strī-, one who has been

before a wife. smita-, adv. smiling first.

— Cf. pūrvedyus.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pūrva a. being before (sp. & t.), fore, first, eastern, to the east of (abl.);

prior, preceding, ancient, previous to, earlier than (abl. or –°, often °– or

–° w. pp. in the sense of an adv., e.g. pūrvokta or uktapūrva spoken

before or already); accompanied by, following; with, under, according to

(–°); w. vayas n. youth; w. āyus n. old age. –m. elder brother, pl. the

ancestors or ancients. f. pūrvā (±diś) the east. n. forepart, as adv. in

front, before (as prep. w. abl.), first, previously, already, long since; –°

accompanied by etc. (cf. adj. –°). pūrva uttara former-latter, n. adv.

first-last; adya pūrvam until now, hitherto.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pūrva pūr-va, a. being in front, fore; fronting, eastern; being to the east

of (ab.); preceding; former, earlier; prior to (ab. or -°); ancient,

traditional, of the olden time; first (in succession); lowest (fine);

previously or first mentioned or named; very commonly -° after a pp. =

previously or before (e. g. dṛṣṭa-pūrva, seen before);

e vayasi, in youth; -° a. having as the preceding thing = preceded or

accompanied by, based on, with: -m, ad. before, beforehand, previously,

already; first; formerly, long ago (sts. with pr.); -° (also pūrveṇa), in

accordance with, amid, after, with (or when the privative negation

precedes = without); m. pl. the ancient, forefathers, ancestors; sg. elder

brother; n. fore part;

ā, f. east.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

pūrva ka niketane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°para°-nimantraṇe saka

°-nivāse aka°-seṭ .) ṣaṣṭhasvarī . niketanamiha nimantraṇaṁ nivāso vā .

ka, pūrbayati dvijān bhoktuṁ gṛhī . pūrbayati tīrtheṣu sādhuḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ .. vargyabānto’yam ..

pūrva ka niketane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°paraṁ0-nimantraṇe

saka°-nivāse aka°-seṭ .) ṣaṣṭhasvarī . niketanamiha nimantraṇaṁ nivāso

vā . ka, pūrvayati dbijān bhoktuṁ gṛhī . pūrvayati tīrtheṣu sādhuḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ .. antyavānto’yam ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pūrva nimantraṇe saka° nivāse aka° cu° ubha° seṭ . pūrbayati te

apupūrbat ta . oṣṭhyānto’yam .

pūrva nivāse aka° nimantraṇe saka° bhvā° pa° seṭa . antyasthānto’yam .

pūrvati apūrvīt .

pūrva(rva) tri° pūrba (rva)–ac . 1 prathame ādye yasyāṁ diśi yeṣāṁ

sūryasya prathamaṁ dṛṣṭiḥ teṣāṁ tasyāṁ 2 diśi strī tadupalakṣite 3 deśe

yasya yadapekṣayā prathamaṁ janmādi tasya 4 tādṛśakāle 5

tadupalakṣite ca . tasya digdeśakālavyavasthāvācitve sarvanāmakāryaṁ

pūrvasmai ityādi jasi ṅiṅasyostu vā pūrbe pūrbāḥ pūrbasmāt pūrvāt pūrba

pūrbasmin . striyāṁ tu na vibhāṣā pūrbasyai ṣūrbasyām ityādi .

sarvanāmatvena vṛttimātre’sya puṁvadbhāvaḥ . pūrbasyāṁ sthitaṁ

pūrbasthitam . pūrbasyā rūpaṁ pūrbarūpam ityādi .

on

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pūrvaśārada (von pūrva + śarad) adj. “auf die erste Hälfte des Herbstes

bezüglich u.s.w.” P. 1, 1, 72, Vārtt. 12, Sch.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pūrva(rba)śārada tri° pūrbaṁ śaradaḥ ekadeśisa° . tatra bhavaḥ ṛtvaṇ

avayavādṛtoḥ pā° uttaraṣadavṛddhiḥ . śaradaḥ pūrvabhave .

mfn. gladsome (said of the autumn)

pramudita “pra-mudita” w.r. for “pracudita” (which m.c. for “pra-codita”)

pramudita “pra-mudita” n. gladness, gaiety

pramudita “pra-mudita” n. N. of one of the 8 Sāṁkhya perfections

pramudita “pra-mudita” n. “-pralamba-sunayana” m. N. of a Gandharva

prince

pramudita “pra-mudita” n. “-vat” mfn. pleased

pramudita “pra-mudita” n. “-vadanā” f. N. of a metre

pramudita “pra-mudita” n. “-hṛdaya” mfn. delighted in heart

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pramudita p. p. Delighted, glad, pleased, happy.

— Comp.

–hṛdaya a. delighted at heart.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pramudita 1) partic. adj. s. u. mud mit pra. — 2) f. ā Bez. einer der 10

Bhūmi bei den Buddhisten VYĀḌI zu H. 233. — 3) n. N. einer der 8

Vollkommenheiten im Sāṁkhya GAUḌAP. zu SĀṁKHYAK. 51. Vgl.

pramoda, pramodamāna, sadāpramudita.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pramudita a. glad, merry, gay; n. joy, delight.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pramudita tri° pra + muda–kartari kta . 1 hṛṣṭe 2 harṣayukte amaraḥ .

of the wind in the rainy season, of the bile in the autumn, and of the

phlegm in the spring)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

prākṛtajvara pu° varṣāśaradvasanteṣu vātādyaiḥ prākṛtaḥ kramāt

jvarādhikāre mādhavokte jvarabhede .

autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

prāvṛḍatyaya (prāvṛṣ + a-) m. “Herbst” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

prāvṛḍatyaya pu° 6 ta° . 1 varṣātikrame varṣāpagame ba° va° . 2

śaratkāle rājani° .

phalam [phal-ac]

(1) Fruit (fig. also) as of a tree; udeti pūrvaṁ kusumaṁ tataḥ phalaṁ

S. 7. 30; R. 4. 33; 1. 49.

(2) Crop, produce; kṛṣiphalaṁ Me. 16.

(3) A result, fruit, consequence, effect; atyutkaṭaiḥ pāpapuṇyairihaiva

phalamaśnute H. 1. 83; phalena jñāsyasi Pt. 1; na navaḥ

prabhurāphalodayāt sthirakarmā virarāma karmaṇaḥ R. 8. 22; 1. 33.

(4) (Hence) Reward, recompense, meed, retribution (good or bad);

phalamasyopahāsasya sadyaḥ prāpsyasi paśya māṁ R. 12. 37.

(5) A deed, an act (opp. words); bruvate hi phalena sādhavo na tu

kaṁṭhena nijopayogitāṁ N. 2. 48 ‘good men prove their usefulness by

deeds, not by words’.

(6) Aim, object, purpose; pareṁgitajñānaphalā hi buddhayaḥ Pt. 1.

43; kimapekṣya phalaṁ Ki. 2. 21 ‘with what object in view’; Me. 54.

(7) Use, good, profit, advantage; jagatā vā viphalena kiṁ phalaṁ Bv.

2. 61.

(8) Profit or interest on capital.

(9) Progeny, offspring; R. 14. 39. (10) A kernel (of a fruit).

(11) A tablet or board (śāriphala).

(12) A blade (of a sword).

(13) The point or head of an arrow, dart &c.; barb; Mu. 7. 10.

(14) A shield.

(15) A testicle.

(16) A gift.

(17) The result of a calculation (in Math.).

(18) Product or quotient.

(19) Menstrual discharge. (20) Nutmeg.

(21) A ploughshare.

(22) Loss, disadvantage.

(23) The second term in a rule-of-three sum.

(24) Correlative equation.

(25) The area of a figure.

(26) The three myrobalans (triphalā).

(27) A point on a die.

— Comp.

–adanaḥ = phalāśana q. v.

–anubaṁdhaḥ succession or sequence of fruits or results.

–anumeya a. to be inferred from the results or consequences;

phalānumeyāḥ prāraṁbhāḥ saṁskārāḥ prāktanā iva R. 1. 20.

–anusaraṇaṁ

(1) rate of profits. –2. following or reaping consequences. –aṁtaḥ a

bamboo. –anveṣin a. seeking for reward or recompense (of actions). —

apekṣā expectation of the fruits or consequences (of acts), regard to

results. –apeta a. useless, unfertile, unproductive. –amlaḥ a kind of

sorrel. (–mlaṁ) tamarind. –aśanaḥ a parrot. –asthi n. a cocoa-nut. —

ākāṁkṣā expectation of (good) results; see phalāpekṣā. –āgamaḥ 1.

production of fruits, load of fruits; bhavaṁti namrāstaravaḥ phalāgamaiḥ

S. 5. 12. –2. the fruit season, autumn. –āḍhya a. full of or abounding in

fruits. (–ḍhyā) a kind of plantain. –ārāmaḥ a fruit-garden, orchard. —

āsakta a. 1. fond of fruits. –2. attached to fruits, fond of getting fruit (of

actions done). –āhāraḥ feeding or living on fruits, fruit-meal. –uccayaḥ a

collection of fruits. –uttamā 1 a kind of grapes (having no stones). –2. =

triphalā. –utpattiḥ f. 1. production of fruit. –2. profit, gain. (–ttiḥ) the

mango tree (sometimes written phalotpati in this sense). –udayaḥ 1.

appearance of fruit, production of results or consequences, attainment of

success or desired object; āphalodayakarmaṇāṁ R. 1. 5; 8. 22. –2. profit,

gain. –3. retribution, punishment. –4. happiness, joy. –5. heaven. —

udgamaḥ appearance of fruits; S. 5. 12 (v. l.). –uddeśaḥ regard to

results; see phalāpekṣā. –upajīvin a. living by cultivating or selling fruits.

–upeta a. yielding fruit, fruitful, fertile. –kāmanā desire of fruits or

consequences. –kālaḥ fruit-season. –kesaraḥ the cocoanut tree. –kośaḥ

–ṣaḥ, –kośakaḥ the scrotum (covering of the testicles). –khaṁḍanaṁ

frustration of fruits or results, disappointment. –grahaḥ deriving benefit

or advantage. –grahi, grāhin a. (also phalegrahi and phalegrāhin) fruitful,

yielding or bearing fruit in season; ślādhyatāṁ kulamupaiti paitṛkaṁ

syānmanorathataruḥ phalegrahiḥ Kīr. K. 3. 60; Māl. 9. 39. (–m.) a fruit-

tree. –grahiṣṇu a. fruitful. –chadanaṁ a house built of wooden boards.

–trayaṁ, –trikaṁ the three myrobalans (triphalā). –da, –dātṛ, –prada a.

1. productive, fruitful, bearing fruit; Ms. 11. 143. –2. bringing in gain or

profit. –3. giving a reward, rewarding. (–daḥ) a tree. –nirvṛtti f. final

consequence or reward. –nivṛttiḥ f. cessation of consequences. —

niṣpattiḥ f. production of fruit. –pariṇatiḥ f. –pariṇāmaḥ, –pākaḥ

(phalepākaḥ also) 1. the ripening of fruit. –2. the fulness of

consequences. –pākāṁtā, –pākāvasānā an annual plant. –pātanaṁ

knocking down or gathering fruit. –pādapaḥ a fruit-tree. –pūraḥ, —

pūrakaḥ the common citron tree. –pradānaṁ 1. the giving of fruits. –2. a

ceremony at weddings. –prāptiḥ f. attainment of the desired fruit or

object. –priyā the Priyangu plant. –vaṁdhyaḥ a tree barren of fruit. —

baṁdhin a. forming or developing fruit. –bhāgaḥ a share in any product or

profit. –bhāgin –bhāj a. partaking of a reward or profit. –bhūmiḥ f. a

place where one receives the reward or recompense of his deeds (i. e.

heaven or hell). –bhṛt a. bearing fruit, fruitful. –bhogaḥ 1. enjoyment of

consequences. –2. usufruct. –matsyā the aloe plant. –yogaḥ 1. the

attainment of fruit or the desired object, Mu. 7. 10. –2. wages,

remuneration. –rājan m. a water-melon. –vartulaṁ a watermelon. —

vikrayin a. a fruit-seller. –vṛkṣaḥ a fruit-tree. –vṛkṣakaḥ the bread-fruit

tree. –śāḍavaḥ the pomegranate tree. –śālin a. 1. bearing fruit, fruitful.

–2. sharing in the consequences. –śaiśiraḥ the Badara tree. –śreṣṭhaḥ

the mango tree. –saṁstha a. bearing fruit. –saṁpad f. 1. abundance of

fruit. –2. success. –sādhanaṁ a means of effecting any desired object,

realization of an object. –siddhiḥ f. 1. reaping fruit, attainment or

realization of the desired object. –2. a prosperous result. –snehaḥ a

walnut tree. –hārī an epithet of Kālī or Durgā. –hīna a. yielding no fruit or

profit. –hetu a. acting with a view to results.

m. the fruit season, autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

phalāgama (phala + ā-) m. “die Ankunft der Früchte” d. i. “die Zeit der

Früchte, der Herbst” Spr. 3887.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

phalāgama m. autumn (arrival of fruits).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

phalāgama phala+āgama, m. advent of fruit, i. e. time when the fruit is

ripe, autumn;

-āḍhya, a. rich in (= thickly bestrewn with) fruit;

-anubandha, m. consequences of (-°).

mud cl.1.ā. ( ii, 15) “modate” (ep. and m.c. also P. “-ti”; pf. “mumoda” ;

“mumude” &c.; aor. “amodiṣṭa” Gr.; Pot. “mudīmahi” ; Prec.

“modiṣīṣṭhās” ; fut. “moditā” Gr.; “modiṣyate” ; ind. p. “-modam” , to be

merry or glad or happy, rejoice, delight in (instr. or loc.) &c. &c.: Caus.,

“modayati, -te” (aor. “amumudat”), to gladden, give pleasure, exhilarate

Desid, of Caus. “mumodayiṣati” Desid. “mumodiṣate” or “mumudithate”

Intens. “momudyate, momudīti, momotti” Gr.

mud f. joy, delight, gladness, happiness (also pl.) &c. &c.

f. Joy personified (as a daughter of Tuṣṭi)

f. intoxication, frenzy

f. a species of drug (= “vṛddhi”)

f. a woman (?)

mud pl. N. of a class of Apsaras

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

mud I. 10 U. (modayati-te)

(1) To mix, blend.

(2) To cleanse, purify. –II. 1 A. (modate, mudita; desid. mumudiṣate

or mumodiṣate) To rejoice, be glad or happy, be joyful or delighted;

yakṣye dāsyāmi modiṣya ityajñānavimohitāḥ Bg. 16. 15; Ms. 2. 232, 3.

191; Bk. 15. 97. –Caus. To please, delight, give pleasure, gratify.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

mud 1 modate DHĀTUP. 2, 15. mumude, amodiṣṭa, (anu) mudīmahi ved.,

modiṣye; aus metrischen Rücksichten bisweilen auch act. “lustig –,

fröhlich sein, sich freuen” (vgl. 1. mad, manda): tāsāmadhvaryurāgatau

yavo vṛṣṭīva modate ṚV. 2, 5, 6. ŚAT. BR. 3, 6, 1, 10. ṚV. 5, 47, 6. 9, 71,

3. mumoda garbho vṛṣabhaḥ kakudmān 10, 8, 2. yābhiḥ somo modate

harṣate ca 30, 5. 85, 42. VS. 3, 41. oṣadhībhirhīdaṁ sarvaṁ modate ŚAT.

BR. 9, 4, 1, 7. strībhiḥ saha modamānaḥ 14, 7, 1, 14. ŚĀÑKHY. GṚHY. 1,

22. KAUŚ. 40. modamānastiṣṭhati CHĀND. UP. 6, 11, 1. KAṬHOP. 1, 12.

devavaddivi modate M. 2, 232. MBH. 1, 1050. 3, 8044. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 209.

BHĀG. P. 3, 14, 50. mādyati modate ‘bhiramate Spr. 635. 3015. 3843.

3997. mumude tatpuraṁ parayā mudā MBH. 1, 6630. 3, 16707. R. GORR.

1, 35, 50. fg. 46, 35. KATHĀS. 27, 131. 29, 174. 36, 135. 45, 114. LA. (II)

88, 4. MĀRK. P. 135, 4. mumudire R. 1, 10, 33. amodiṣṭa BHAṬṬ. 15, 97.

modiṣye BHAG. 16, 15. MBH. 1, 5945. 2, 505.

vilasadvismayamodamānacittāḥ KATHĀS. 3, 79. vṛṣalyā saha modate M.

3, 191. MBH. 3, 2605. Spr. 2919. putrapautraiśca modasva “erfreue dich

an” MĀRK. P. 132, 41. tasminna modāmahe Spr. 5283. modanti MBH. 3,

7000. modet 8042. 5, 28. modasi 12, 11. modati Inschr. in Journ. of the

Am. Or. S. 6, 540, Śl. 3. amodan R. 2, 48, 3. mumoda 1, 46, 17. R. GORR.

1, 46, 34. mudita “erfreut, froh” MBH.3,2230. 2234. 3004. 3066.5,6076.

7517. R.1,65,20. R. GORR.1,46,35. RAGH. 12,7. 14,29. VARĀH. BṚH.

S.5,44. 98. KATHĀS. 46,211. 60,254. BRAHMA-P. in LA. (II) 54,6. 55,17.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 129,b,19. -mānasa MBH. 1, 5572. PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 21.

kośalo nāma muditaḥ sphīto janapado mahān R. 1, 5, 5 (1 GORR.). 2, 53,

11. HARIV. 3060. sarvaiḥ sumuditā guṇaiḥ “sich gar sehr erfreuend an” so

v. a. “besitzend” 9951. In comp. mit dem, woran man sich erfreut:

svadhṛtivanitāsaṅga- Spr. 2156. jaladaninada- 2281. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8,

36. 18, 2. vāridhārāpramuditamuditā (urvī) 27, 6.

dhvastāśeṣatamaḥpramoda- Spr. 757, v. l. 2526, v. l. — muditā (vgl.

pramoditā u. pra caus.) f. “Freude” MATHUREŚA zu AK. ŚKDR.

JOGAS.1,33.3,24 (Verz. d. Oxf. H. 230,b,23. 25). PRAB. 68,11. mudita n.

Bez. “einer Art von Umarmung” oder “Verschlingung der Geliebten”

ŚKDR. nach dem KĀMAŚĀSTRA. mudita fehlerhaft für nudita (so die ed.

Bomb.) MBH. 3, 12225. für sūdita (so die ed. Bomb.) 5, 7184.

caus. “Jmd erfreuen”: śobhayeyuḥ puravaraṁ modayeyuśca sarvaśaḥ

MBH. 12, 2655. modayadhvaṁ raghūttamam BHAṬṬ. 7, 101.

anu “in die Freude eines Andern einstimmen” R. 2, 69, 6.

muditāmanumodate BHĀG. P. 4, 25, 61. anu stomaṁ mudīmahi “wir

stimmen jubelnd ein in” ṚV. 8, 1, 14. “Jmd zujubeln”: taṁ maṇḍūkā

anvamodanta NIR. 9, 6. “Jmd seinen Beifall bezeugen, Jmd aufmuntern”:

ke cainamanvamodanta ke cainaṁ pratyaṣedhayan MBH. 2, 1787. “sich

freuen über Jmd” oder “Etwas” (acc.): yaṁ prajā anvamodanta pitā

putrānivaurasān 7, 2224. saṁpadamanunandanti vipadaṁ nānumodanti

GAUḌAP. zu SĀṁKHYAK. 48. brāhmaṇāste ‘nvamodanta śivena kuśalena

ca MBH. 3, 11535. “sich über Etwas freuen” so v. a. “sich mit Etwas

einverstanden erklären, Etwas gutheissen”: vivādāṁścānvamodata 1,

137. vācaṁ tām 1198. sairindhryāḥ sūtaputreṇa saha dāham 4, 800.

KATHĀS. 43, 72. BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 19. 3, 19, 37. yūyaṁ tadanumodadhvam

– kartuḥ śāsturanujñātustulyaṁ yatpretya tatphalam 4, 21, 25. 7, 14, 6. 8,

6, 24. 7, 41. 9, 23, 37. akhādannanumodaṁśca MBH. 13, 5634. yo

‘numodati hantavyaṁ (hanyantam ed. Bomb.) so ‘pi doṣeṇa lipyate “wer

es gut heisst, dass” (ein lebendes Wesen) “getödtet wird”, ebend. BHĀG.

P. 2, 7, 53. ye cānvamodaṁstadavācyatāṁ dvijāḥ 4, 2, 20. — caus.

“erfreuen”: madhudhārāḥ supārśvaśikharātpatantyaḥ –

ilāvṛtamanumodayanti BHĀG. P. 5, 16, 23. anumodita “erfreut”:

sāmodairanumoditā mṛgamadairānanditā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 253,a,5.

“gewonnen, günstig gestimmt”: evaṁ nidhipatiḥ

śrīmāndaivatairanumoditaḥ HARIV. 6277. “Jmdes” (instr. oder im comp.

vorangehend) “Zustimmung –, Einwilligung habend”: vibhāvaryāḥ

kalāvatyāḥ snigdhadṛṣṭyā- numoditaḥ MĀRK. P. 64, 18. gāndharveṇa

vivāhena bahvyo rājarṣikanyakāḥ. śrūyante pariṇītāstāḥ

pitṛbhiścānumoditāḥ.. ŚĀK. 71, v. l. KATHĀS. 44, 91. BHĀG. P. 1, 5, 25. 8,

21, 32. vāsudevānumoditaḥ 1, 9, 49. 4, 1, 2. 9, 10, 29. 10, 33, 39. “mit

Beifall aufgenommen, mit Freude begrüsst, gutgeheissen”:

uccaiḥpramodamanumoditadarśanaḥ Spr. 3686. tvayā caiva naraśreṣṭha

tanme prītyānumoditam MBH. 5, 7458. 9, 3034. JOGAS. 2, 34.

UTTARARĀMAC. 29, 10. PRAB. 102, 2. 110, 7.

abhyanu caus. “Jmd seine Zustimmung geben”: āmantrya prayayau

rājā taiścaivābhyanumoditaḥ MBH. 1, 4447. “zu Etwas seine Zustimmung

geben”: anyaiśca dānamidamabhyanumodanīyam Inschr. in COLEBR.

Misc. Ess. II, 311, 9.

abhi s. abhīmodamud.

ā s. āmoda; davon adj. āmodita (wohl nicht partic. des caus.) “mit

Wohlgeruch erfüllt, wohlriechend gemacht”: tadantare sundare cāmodite

puṣpavāyunā PAÑCAR. 1, 10, 41. puṣpāsavāmoditavaktrapaṅkaja ṚT. 5,

5. BHĀG. P. 8, 9, 16. PRAB. 19, 12. = saṁtuṣṭa und abhinandita die

Scholien.

ud, partic. unmudita “frohlockend” BHĀG. P. 4, 26, 24.

saṁpari “weit und breit frohlocken”: hṛṣṭāḥ saṁparimodadhvaṁ

devebhyastyajyatāṁ bhayam HARIV. 13758.

pra “lustig werden, sich freuen, jubeln”: paśavastatpra modante maho

vai no bhaviṣyati AV. 11, 4, 5. tāḥ sarvā devatāḥ prāmodanta

māmabhipratyapādīti AIT. BR. 2, 18. MBH. 12, 6393. 13, 3315. 14, 1188.

R. 5, 3, 66. KATHĀS. 56, 32. BHĀG. P. 5, 13, 7. pramumude R. GORR. 2,

5, 9. pramumoda R. SCHL. 1, 1, 84. 44, 61 (45, 55 GORR.).

uccaiḥpramodam absol. Spr. 3686. janaiḥ pramuditaṁ (impers.)

dhārādhare varṣati 1972. pramudita “ausgelassen, erfreut, froh” AK. 3, 2,

52. VS. 19, 11. MBH. 1, 5364. 7648. 7650. R. 1, 1, 87. 90. 9, 39 (38

GORR.). 2, 30, 46. 52, 79. RAGH. 6, 86. KATHĀS. 13, 139. 25, 294.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 45. 8, 9. 18, 2. BHĀG. P. 3, 16, 28. 8, 18, 26. -pika

DHŪRTAS. in LA. 69, 9. -hṛdaya GĪT. 5, 15. -manas PAÑCAT. 48, 24.

taddarśana- BHĀG. P. 9, 20, 10. PAÑCAT. 238, 22. n. “Lustigkeit, frohe

Laune”: vāridhārāpramuditamuditā (urvī) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 27, 6.

pramuditavati rāṣṭre KATHĀS. 6, 165. In der Stelle śaravarṣaiḥ –

astrapramuditaiḥ ARJ. 10, 39 liest die ed. Calc. u. Bomb. des MBH. 3,

12235 pracuditaiḥ(!) st. pramu-. Vgl. pramud, pramuditā, pramoda,

pramodana, pramodamāna. — caus. “erfreuen”: yadi hi strī na roceta

pumāṁsaṁ na pramodayet M. 3, 61 (= MBH. 13, 2487). MBH. 3, 10077.

HARIV. 14744. pramodamānā und pramoditā f. Bez. “zweier der acht

Vollkommenheiten” (siddhi) “im” Sāṁkhya TATTVAS. 41. Vgl. pramodaka,

pramodana, pramodita, pramodin.

anupra caus. “Jmd” (acc.) “seine Einwilligung, die Erlaubniss geben”:

ādvāramanugaccheccāgaccheccānupramoditaḥ MĀRK. P. 31, 59.

saṁpra s. saṁpramoda.

prati “entgegenjubeln, zujauchzen, mit Freude auf Jmd” oder “Etwas

zugehen” oder “Etwas entgegennehmen”: pratīdaṁ viśvaṁ modate ṚV.

5, 83, 9. 10, 97, 3. ghṛtāni prati modase 118, 2. VS. 11, 47. 20, 46. viśvā

bhūtāni pratimodamānaḥ TBR. 3, 1, 2, 10 in Z. f. d. K. d. M. 7, 273. 3, 1,

1, 2 ebend. 266. taṁ prajāḥ pratimodantyaḥ sarvāḥ pratyudgatāstadā

MBH. 1, 6781. mit gen.: tasyaiva loke pratimodatīha yo yasyānuṣaktaḥ

MAITRJUP. 4, 6. — caus. “erheitern, lustig machen”: pramodayiṣyāmahe

ŚAT. BR. 3, 2, 4, 6. — desid. vom caus. “erheitern wollen”:

pramumodayiṣati ŚAT. BR. 3, 3, 4, 18.

sam s. saṁmoda fgg.

mud (= 1. mud) f. 1) “Lust, Fröhlichkeit, Freude” AK. 1, 1, 4, 2. H. 312.

316. HALĀY. 1, 123. ṚV. 1, 145, 4. yuṣmākaṁ smā rathāṁ anu mude

dadhe 5, 53, 5. 8, 39, 7. yatrānandāśca modāśca mudaḥ pramuda āsate

9, 113, 11. ŚAT. BR. 9, 4, 1, 7. 14, 7, 1, 11. apsaraso mudo nāma VS. 18,

38. parāṁ mudamabhigamya MBH. 1, 1188. mudaṁ paramikāṁ lebhe

4858. 3, 1876. 3006. mudaṁ paramikāṁ prāptāḥ 1, 7602. 12, 10449.

parāṁ mudamavāpa 3, 2807. piturmudaṁ tena tatāna RAGH. 3, 25.

viṣāde kartavye vidadhati jaḍāḥ pratyuta mudam (tasmin) Spr. 193.

mudaṁ viṣādaḥ – hanti 2217. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 89, 10. tau jagmatuḥ

parayā mudā MBH. 1, 7655. R. 1, 4, 22. Spr. 4729. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 88,

36. MĀRK. P. 116, 43. liṅgairmudaḥ RAGH. 7, 27. sa śrīpārśvo mude ‘stu

vaḥ ŚATR. 1, 4. KIR. 5, 25. Spr. 2579. teṣāṁ na bhinnā mudaḥ (v. l.

mudā) 2526. kasya na hṛdaye mudaḥ padaṁ dadhati 3786.

dviparaṇamudā GĪT. 11, 34. krīḍāmudo yātanāḥ 9, 10.

madamudāmuditam “der Liebesgenüsse Anfang” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 77, 37.

mudbhāj 18, 6. Personificirt ist die Mud eine Tochter der Tuṣṭi BHĀG. P.

4, 1, 50. — 2) “ein best. Heilkraut”, = vṛddhi RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 3)

“Weib” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILS.; beruht vielleicht auf Missverständniss,

da strī oder striyām einfach das Geschlecht des Wortes bezeichnen kann.

mud 3 modayati “mischen” (saṁsarge) DHĀTUP. 33, 66. modayati

saktūnghṛtena MĀDHAVA bei WEST. modayati ghṛtenānnaṁ lokaḥ

DURGĀD. im ŚKDR.

mud 1 mudita m. Bez. “einer Art von Dienern” R. 7, 37, 18.

pra caus. SĀH. D. 309, 21.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

mud 1. mud, i. 1, Ātm. (in epic poetry also Par., Rām. 1, 46, 17), To be

delighted, to rejoice, Man. 2, 232. Ptcple. of the pf. pass. mudita,

Delighted, Pañc. i. d. 458; Chr. 14, 24. n. Pleasure. Caus. To exhilarate

(also Ātm.), Bhaṭṭ. 7, 171.

— With the prep. anu anu,

1. To approve, to permit, MBh. 2, 1787.

2. To rejoice, MBh. 3, 11535. Caus. To celebrate, Chr. 55, 3.

anumodita, Agreed, Utt. Rāmac. 38, 18.

— With abhyanu abhi-anu, To dismiss, MBh. 1, 4447.

— With pra pra, To be delighted, Rām. 1, 1, 84. pramudita, Pleased,

happy, Pañc. 238, 23. Caus. To exhilarate, Man. 3, 61. pramodita, Happy.

m. A name of Kuvera.

— With prati prati, To expect with delight, MBh. 1, 6781.

mud 2. mud, i. 10, Par. To mix.

mud 3. 1. mud, f.

1. Pleasure, joy, Pañc. 159, 20; Kir. 5, 25.

2. Intoxication.

3. A wife.

— Comp. krīḍā-, f. the pleasure of love, Gīt. 9, 10.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

mud modate1 v (modati), pp. mudita (q.v.) be glad or merry, rejoice at,

have pleasure in (loc. or instr.). C. modayati (-te) gladden. —

anu rejoice after, with, or at (acc. of pers. & th.); agree to, approve

of, applaud, permit. C. gladden; approve of etc. = S.

pra become or be joyful, exult. C. gladden.

prati meet or welcome with joy, rejoice at (acc., r. gen.). C. delight,

exhilarate. — Cf. pramudita.

mud [2] f. joy, delight.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

mud MUD, I.Ā. (P. metr.) moda (V., C.), be merry or glad, rejoice, delight

in (in., lc.): pp. mudita, joyful, glad, rejoicing in (in., -°); cs. P. modaya,

gladden.

anu, rejoice with (ac.); rejoice in or at (ac.); encourage (any one);

approve, sanction; permit any one (ac.) to (d. of vbl. N.); cs. gladden;

receive with approval: pp.

anu-modita, delighted; won over, rendered favourable; having the

sanction of (in., -°); received with approval, joyfully welcomed. ā, be

fragrant; cs. pp. āmodita, rendered fragrant with (-°).

pra, grow merry, rejoice, exult: pp. exultant, delighted, joyful;

exuberant, gorgeous (autumn); cs. gladden.

prati, exult at, receive joyfully (ac.); cs. Ā. gladden, exhilarate.

mud mud, f. joy, delight, gladness (sts. pl.).

meghaḥ [mehati varṣati jalaṁ, mih-ghañ kutvam]

(1) A cloud; kurvannaṁjanamecakā iva diśo meghaḥ samuttiṣṭhate

Mk. 5. 23, 2, 3 &c.

(2) A mass, multitude.

(3) N. of one of the six Rāgas (in music).

(4) A fragrant grass. –ghaṁ Talc.

— Comp.

–adhvan m.,

–pathaḥ, –mārgaḥ ‘the path of clouds’, atmosphere.

–aṁtaḥ the autumn.

–ariḥ the wind.

–asthi n. hail.

–ākhyaṁ talc.

–āgamaḥ the approach of rains, the rainy season.

–āṭopaḥ a dense or thick cloud.

–āḍaṁbaraḥ thunder.

–ānaṁdā a kind of crane.

–ānaṁdin m. a peacock.

–ālokaḥ the appearance or sight of clouds; meghāloke bhavati

sukhinopyanyathāvṛtti cetaḥ Me. 3.

–āspadaṁ the sky, atmosphere.

–udakaṁ rain.

–udayaḥ the rising of clouds.

–kaphaḥ hail.

–kālaḥ the rains, rainy season.

–garjanaṁ, –garjanā thunder.

–ciṁtakaḥ the Chātaka bird.

–jaḥ a large pearl.

–jālaṁ 1. a dense mass of clouds. –2. talc.

–javikaḥ, –jīvanaḥ the Chātaka bird.

–jyotis m. n. lightning.

–ḍaṁbaraḥ thunder.

–dīpaḥ lightning.

–dūtaṁ N. of a celebrated poem by Kālidāsa.

–dvāraṁ the sky, atmosphere.

–nādaḥ 1. the roar of clouds, thunder. –2. an epithet of Varuṇa.

–3. N. of Indrajit, son of Rāvaṇa. –4. the Palāśa tree. -anulāsin, –

anulāsakaḥ a peacock. -jit m. an epithet of Lakṣmaṇa.

–nāman m. a kind of grass.

–nirghoṣaḥ thunder.

–paṁktiḥ, –mālā –rāji f. a line of clouds; prathamaṁ megharājiḥ

paścādvidyullatā V. 2.

–puṣpaṁ 1. water. –2. hail. –3. river-water.

–prasavaḥ water.

–bhūtiḥ a thunderbolt.

–maṁḍalaṁ the firmament, sky.

–māla, –mālin a. cloudcapt.

–yoniḥ fog, smoke.

–ravaḥ thunder.

–rāvaḥ a kind of waterbird.

–rekhā, –lekhā a line of clouds.

–varṇā the Indigo plant.

–vartman n. the atmosphere.

–vahniḥ lightning.

–vāhataḥ

(1) an epithet of Indra; śrayati sma meghamiva meghavāhataḥ Śi. 13.

18. –2. an epithet of Śiva. –visphūrjitaṁ 1. thunder, rumbling of clouds.

–2. N. of a metre; see App. 1. –veśman n. the atmosphere. –sāraḥ a

kind of camphor. –suhṛd m. a peacock. –stanitaṁ thunder.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

meghaḥ puṁ, (mehatīti . mih + ac . nyaṅkvādīnāñca . 7 . 3 . 53 . iti

kutvam .) mustakaḥ . rākṣasaḥ . iti śabdaratnāvalī ..

svanāmakhyātadravyapadārthaḥ . mehati siñcati yaḥ . tatparyāyaḥ .

abbhram 2 vārivāhaḥ 3 stanayitnuḥ 4 valāhakaḥ 5 dhārādharaḥ 6

jaladharaḥ 7 taḍitvān 8 vāridaḥ 9 ambubhṛt 10 ghanaḥ 11 jīmūtaḥ 12

mudiraḥ 13 jalamuk 14 dhūmayoniḥ 15 . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 3 . 7 .. abhram 16

payodharaḥ 17 ambhodharaḥ 18 vyomadhūmaḥ 19 ghanāghanaḥ 20

vāyudāruḥ 21 nabhaścaraḥ 22 kandharaḥ 23 kandhaḥ 24 nīradaḥ 25

gaganadhvajaḥ 26 vārimuk 27 vārmuk 28 vanamuk 29 abdaḥ 30 parjanyaḥ

31 nabhogajaḥ 32 madayitnuḥ 33 kadaḥ 34 kandaḥ 35 gaveḍuḥ 36

gadāmaraḥ 37 khatamālaḥ 38 vātarathaḥ 39 śvetanīlaḥ 40 nāgaḥ 41

jalakaraṅkaḥ 42 pecakaḥ 43 bhekaḥ 44 darduraḥ 45 . iti śabdaratnāvalī ..

ambudaḥ 46 toyadaḥ 47 ambuvāhaḥ 48 . iti ratnamālā .. pāthodaḥ 49

gadāmbaraḥ 50 gāḍavaḥ 51 vārimasiḥ 52 . iti trikāṇḍaśeṣaḥ ..

tadvaidikaparyāyāḥ . adriḥ 1 grāvā 2 gotraḥ 3 balaḥ 4 aśnaḥ 5 purubhojāḥ

6 valiśānaḥ 7 aśmā 8 parvataḥ 9 giriḥ 10 vrajaḥ 11 caruḥ 12 varāhaḥ 13

śambaraḥ 14 rauhiṇaḥ 15 raivataḥ 16 phaligaḥ 17 uparaḥ 18 upalaḥ 19

camamaḥ 20 ahiḥ 21 abhram 22 valāhakaḥ 23 mevaḥ 24 dṛtiḥ 25 odanaḥ

26 vṛṣandhiḥ 27 vṛtraḥ 28 asuraḥ 29 kośaḥ 30 . iti triṁśanmeghanāmāni .

iti vedanighaṇṭau . 1 . 10 .. (yathā, uttararāmacarite . 2 .

meghamāleva yaścāyamārādapi vibhāvyate ..) meghanāyakā yathā —

triyute śākavarṣe tu caturbhiḥ śodhite kramāt .

āvartaṁ viddhi sambartaṁ puṣkaraṁ droṇamambudam .. eṣāṁ

phalāni .

āvarto nirjalo meghaḥ sambartaśca bahūdakaḥ .

puṣkaro duṣkarajalo droṇaḥ śasyaprapūrakaḥ .. iti jyotistattvam .. * ..

tretāyuge tasyotpattiryathā —

apāṁ siddhe pratigate tadā meghāmbunā tu vai .

medhebhyastanayitnubhyaḥ pravṛttaṁ vṛṣṭisarjanam ..

sakṛdeva tayā vṛṣṭyā saṁpṛkte pṛthivītale .

prādurāsaṁstadā tāsāṁ vṛkṣā vai gṛhasaṅgitāḥ ..

sarvapratyupabhogastu tāsāṁ tebhyaḥ prajāyate .

vartayiṣyanti te svasthāstretāyugamukhe prajāḥ .. iti kaurme 26

adhyāyaḥ .. * .. pralayakālīnameghā yathā —

tato gajakulonnādāstanitaiḥ samalaṅkṛtāḥ .

uttiṣṭhanti sadā vyomni ghorāḥ sambartakā ghanāḥ ..

kecinnīlotpalaśyāmāḥ kecit kusumasannibhāḥ .

dhūmravaṁrṇāstathā kecittathā pītāḥ payodharāḥ ..

kecidraktābhravarṇāśca sthūlāḥ kṣāranibhāstathā .

śaṅkhakundanibhāścānye jātyāñjananibhāḥ pare ..

manaḥśilānibhāstvanye kapotasadṛśāḥ pare .

kecidrudrākṣavarṇābhāstathānye kṣīrasannibhāḥ ..

tathā karvūravarṇābhā bhinnāñjananibhāstathā .

indragopanibhāḥ kecit haritālanibhāstathā ..

kākāṇḍakanibhāḥ keciduttiṣṭhanti ghanā divi .

kecit parvatasaṅkāśāḥ kecidgajakulopamāḥ ..

kūṭāgāranibhāścānye kecinmīnakulodvahāḥ .

bahurūpā ghorarūpā ghorasvaraninādinaḥ .

tadā jaladharāḥ sarve pūrayanti nabhasthalam ..

tataste jaladā ghorā vāriṇā bhāskarātmajāḥ .

saptadhā saṁvṛtātmānastamagniṁ śamayantyuta ..

tataste jaladā varṣaṁ varṣantīha mahaughavat .

sughoramaśivaṁ sarbaṁ nāśayanti ca pāvakam ..

pravṛttena tadātyarthamambhasā pūryate kila .

adbhistejo’ṁśabhūtatvāttadāgniṁ praviśatyapi ..

naṣṭe cāgnau varṣaśataiḥ payodā jalasambhavāḥ .

plāvayanto’tha bhuvanaṁ mahājalaparisravaiḥ ..

dhārābhiḥ pūrayantīdaṁ codyamānāḥ svayambhuvā .

udyantaṁ salilaughaiśca velā iva mahodadheḥ ..

sādridbīpā tathā pṛthvī jalaiḥ saṁchādyate śanaiḥ .

ādityaraśmibhiḥ pītaṁ jalamabhreṣu tiṣṭhati ..

punaḥ patati tadbhūmau pūryante tena cārṇavāḥ .. iti kaurme

upavibhāge 42 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. meghasya utpattiryathā —

tejo ha sarvabhūtebhya ādatte raśmibhirjalam .

samudrāttvagbhasāṁ yogādraśmayaḥ pravahantyapaḥ ..

tato’yanavaśāt kāle parivṛtto divākaraḥ .

niyacchati payo meghe śuklāśuklairgabhastibhiḥ ..

abhrasthāḥ prapatantyāpo vāyunā samudīritāḥ .

sarvabhūtahitārthāya vāyubhūtāḥ samantataḥ ..

tato varṣati so’mbhāṁsi sarvabhūtavivṛddhaye .

vāyavyaṁ stanitañcaiva vidyudagnisamaprabham ..

merusānumihetyāto meghatvaṁ vyañjayanti ca .

bhramiṣyanti yathā cāpastadantaṁ kavayo viduḥ .. api ca .

meghānāṁ punarutpattau trividhā yonirucyate .

agnijā brahmajāścaiva pakṣajāśca pṛthagvidhāḥ .

tridhā tridhāyanātteṣāṁ vakṣyāmi vittasambhavam ..

āgneyāḥ svannajāḥ proktāsteṣāṁ dhūmaḥ pravartanam .

jātā durdinavātādye saguṇāste vyavasthitāḥ ..

mahiṣāśca varāhāśca mattamātaṅgarūpiṇaḥ .

bhūtvā dharaṇimabhyetya ramante vicaranti ca ..

jīmūtā nāma te meghā ye tebhyo jīvasambhavāḥ .

vidyudguṇavihīnāśca jaladhārāvalambinaḥ ..

mṛdusekā mahākāyā āvahasya ca sānugāḥ .

krośamātrācca varṣanti krośārdhādapi vā punaḥ .

parvatāgranitambeṣu varṣanti vipineṣu ca ..

balākā gardabhāścaiva balākāgarbhadhāriṇaḥ .

brahmajā nāma te meghā brahmaniśvāsasaṁbhavāḥ ..

dbitīyaṁ pravahaṁ vāyuṁ meghāste tu samāśritāḥ .

ito yojanamātrāśca sārdhārdhāt vikṛtādapi .

vṛṣṭisargāddivasteṣāṁ dhārāsārāḥ prakīrtitāḥ ..

śakreṇa pakṣā yacchinnāḥ parvatānāṁ mahaujasām .

kāmagānāṁ pravṛttānāṁ prajānāṁ śivamicchatā .

puṣkarāvartakāstane karaṇeneha viśrutāḥ ..

nānārūpadharāścaiva mahāghorasvanāśca te .

kalpāntavṛṣṭeḥ sraṣṭāraḥ sambartāgnerniyāmakāḥ .

varṣanti te yugānteṣu tṛtīyāste prakīrtitāḥ ..

anekarūpasaṁsthānāḥ pūrayanto mahīṁ jalaiḥ .

vāyuṁ parivahante syurāśritāḥ kalpasādhakāḥ ..

yo’nyasyāṇḍasya bhinnasya prākṛtaprabhavastadā ..

yasmādbrahmā samutpannaścaturvaktraḥ svayambhuvaḥ .

tasyaivāṇḍasya pālā hi sarve meghāḥ prakīrtitāḥ ..

teṣāmadhyāyanaṁ dhūmaḥ sarveṣāmaviśeṣataḥ .

teṣāṁ śreṣṭhastu parjanyaścatvāraścaiva diggajāḥ ..

gajānāṁ parvatānāñca meghānāṁ bhogibhiḥ saha .

kulamekaṁ pṛthagbhūtaṁ yonistvekā jalaṁ smṛtam ..

parjanyo diggajāścaiva hemante śītasaṁbhavām .

tuṣāravṛṣṭiṁ varṣanti himaśasyavivṛddhaye .. iti brahmāṇḍe 58

adhyāyaḥ .. * .. ṣaḍrāgāntargatarāgaviśeṣaḥ . yathā —

bhairavo’tha vasantaśca naṭo nārāyaṇastathā .

śrīrāgo megharāgaśca ṣaḍete puruṣāhvayāḥ .. tasya rāgiṇyo yathā —

lalitā mālasī gauḍī nāṭī devakirī tathā .

megharāgasya rāgiṇyo bhavantīmāḥ sumadhyamāḥ .. ayaṁ

hanūmanmate ṣaṣṭharāgo brahmaṇo mastakāt nirgataḥ . ākāśājjāta iti ca

vadanti . asya jātiḥ auḍavaḥ . arthāt dha na ṣa ṛ ga iti pañcasvaramilitaḥ .

asya gṛhaṁ dhaivatasvaraḥ . gharṣartau rātriśeṣe gānasamayaḥ .

asyākāraḥ . sundarapuruṣaḥ . śyāmavarṇaḥ . uṣṇīṣavadvaddhakeśaḥ .

śāṇitakhaḍ gahastaḥ . hanūmanmate asya pañcarāgiṇyo yathā . ṭaṅkā 1

mallārī 2 gurjarī 3 bhūpālī 4 deśakārī ca 5 . asyāṣṭaputtrā yathā .

jālandharaḥ 1 sāraḥ 2 naṭanārāyaṇaḥ 3 śaṅkarābharaṇaḥ 4 kalyāṇaḥ 5

gajadharaḥ 6 gāndhāraḥ 7 sahānā 8 .. kalānāthamate . asya rāgiṇyaḥ ṣaṭ

yathā . vaṅgālī 1 madhurā 2 kāmodā 3 dhanāśrīḥ 4 tīrthakī 5 devālī 6 .

etanmate’pi aṣṭau puttrāḥ kintu

naṭanārāyaṇaśaṅkarābharaṇakalyāṇasthāne kedārāmārujalabharatā

jñeyāḥ .. someśvaramate asya ṣaḍrāgiṇyo yathā . mallārī 1 sauraṭī 2

sāverī 3 kauśikī 4 gāndhārī 5 haraśṛṅgārī 6 . etanmate’pi puttrāḥ pūrbavat

. rāgiṇīsahitasyaitadrāgasya varṣartau gānasamayaḥ .. bharatamate

tasya pañca rāgiṇyo yathā . mallāraḥ 1 mūlatānī 2 deśī 3 ratiballabhā 4

kāverī 5 . tanamte aṣṭau puttrā yathā . kalāyaraḥ 1 vāgeśvarī 2 sahānā 3

purīyā 4 kānarā 5 tilakaḥ 6 stambhaḥ 7 śaṅkarābharaṇaḥ 8 . tanmate

aṣṭaputtrāṇāṁ bhāryā yathā . karaṇāṭī 1 kādavī 2 kadamanāṭaḥ 3 pāhārī

4 māṁjhaḥ 5 parajaḥ 6 naṭamañjarī 7 śuddhanaṭaḥ 8 . iti saṅgītaśāstram

..

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

meghānta (megha + anta) m. “der Herbst” (śarad) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

meghānta pu° meghānāmanto yatra . śaratkāle rājani°

meghātyayādayo’pyatra .

clouds, atmosphere, air, firmament (in Veda one of the divisions of the

world and distinguished from “div” or “svar”, “the sphere of light”, and

“rocanā divaḥ”, “the ethereal spaces”, which are beyond the “rajas”, as

ether is beyond the air; often “rajas”, = “the whole expanse of heaven or

sky”, divided into a lower and upper stratum, the “rajas uparam” or

“pārthivam” and the “rajas uttamam” or “paramam” or “divyam”; hence

du. “rajasī”, “the lower and higher atmospheres”; sometimes also three

and pl. “rajāṁsi”, “the skies”)

n. vapour, mist, clouds, gloom, dimness, darkness

n. impurity, dirt, dust, any small particle of matter &c. &c. (cf. “go-

r-“)

n. the dust or pollen of flowers

n. cultivated or ploughed land (as “dusty” or “dirty”), arable land,

fields

n. the impurity i.e. the menstrual discharge of a woman &c.

n. the “darkening” quality, passion, emotion, affection &c.

rajas n. (in phil.) the second of the three Guṇas or qualities (the other

two being “sattva”, goodness, and “tamas”, darkness; cf. 85; “rajas” is

sometimes identified with “tejas” q.v.; it is said to predominate in air,

and to be active, urgent, and variable) &c.

n. “light” or “day” or “world” or “water”

n. a kind of plant (= “parpaṭa”)

n. tin

n. autumn

n. sperm

n. safflower

rajas m. N. of a ṛiṣi (son of Vasiṣṭha) ‘riqis’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

rajas n. [raṁjṁ-asun nalopaḥ]

(1) Dust, powder, dirt; dhanyāstadaṁgarajasāṁ malinībhavaṁti S. 7.

17; ātmoddhatairapi rajobhiralaṁghanīyāḥ 1. 8; R. 1. 42; 6. 33.

(2) The dust or pollen of flowers; bhūyātkuśeśayarajomṛdureṇurasyāḥ

(paṁthāḥ) S. 4. 10; Me. 33, 65.

(3) A mote in a sun-beam, any small particle (of matter); cf. Ms. 8.

132 and Y. 1. 362.

(4) A ploughed or cultivated land, arable field.

(5) Gloom, darkness.

(6) Foulness, passion, emotion, moral or mental darkness; apathe

padamarpayaṁti hi śrutavaṁto’pi rajonimīlitāḥ R. 9. 74.

(7) The second of the three Guṇas or constituent qualities of all

material substances (the other two being sattva and tamas; rajas is

supposed to be the cause of the great act ivity seen in creatures; it

predominates in men, as Sattva and Tamas predominate in gods and

demons); aṁtargatamapāstaṁ me rajasopi paraṁ tamaḥ Ku. 6. 60; Bg.

6. 27; rajojuṣe janmani K.; Māl. 1. 20.

(8) Menstrual discharge, menses; Ms. 4. 41; 5. 66.

(9) Safflower. (10) Tin.

(11) Ved. Air, atmosphere.

(12) A division of the world.

(13) Vapour.

(14) Cloud or rain-water.

— Comp.

–guṇaḥ see

(7) above. –tamaska a. being under the influence of both rajas and

tamas. –tokaḥ –kaṁ, –putraḥ 1. greediness, avarice. –2. ‘the child of

passion’, a term applied to a person to show that he is quite insignificant.

–darśanaṁ the first appearance of the menstrual excretion, first

menstrual flow. –nimīlita a. blinded by passion; R. 9. 74. –paṭalaṁ a

coating of dust. –baṁdhaḥ suppression of menstruation. –rasaḥ –valaṁ

darkness. –śuddhiḥ f. pure condition of the menses. –haraḥ ‘dirt-

remover’. a washerman.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

rajas (von raj = 5. arj wie arjuna und rajata) 1) n. UṆĀDIS. 4, 216. P. 6,

4, 24, Vārtt. 5. VOP. 26, 68. a) “Dunstkreis, Luftkreis”, sofern darin

“Nebel, Wolken” u. a. sich bewegen; pl. “die Lüfte”; jenseits ist “der

Lichtraum des Himmels” (rocanā divaḥ), wie greek jenseits des greek.

ṚV. 1, 56, 5. divo raja uparamastabhāyaḥ 62, 5. yatsravantīḥ śyeno na

bhīto ataro rajāṁsi 32, 14. na te vivyaṅmahimānaṁ rajāṁsi 7, 21, 6.

ātmā te vāto raja ā navīnot 87, 2. rajaḥ sūryo na raśmibhiḥ (āpṛṇakti) 1,

84, 1. aptya 124, 5. ayaṁ diva iyarti viśvamā rajaḥ 9, 68, 9. 7, 66, 15. yo

vāṁ rajāṁsyaśvinā ratho viyāti rodasī 8, 62, 13. kva svidasya rajaso

mahasparaṁ kvāvaraṁ maruto yasminnāyaya 1, 168, 6. 187, 4. rajaso

vimānaṁ ratham 2, 40, 3. ya īṁ rājānāvṛtuthā vidadhadrajaso (eher abl.

als gen., wie SĀY. erklärt) mitro varuṇaściketat 6, 62, 9. yābhyāṁ rajo

yupitamantarikṣe AV. 4, 25, 2. yo antarikṣe rajaso vimānaḥ ṚV. 10, 121,

5. akṛṇutamantarikṣaṁ varīyo ‘prathataṁ jīvase no rajāṁsi 6, 69, 5.

asūrte sūrte rajasi niṣatte 10, 82, 4. AV. 7, 25, 1. 41, 1. 10, 3, 9. 13, 2, 8.

43. VS. 13, 44. ṢAḌV. BR. 1, 2. ŚAT. BR. 14, 8, 15, 4. TS. 3, 5, 4, 2. — Im

Besondern a) “eines der Weltgebiete”: divo vā pārthivādadhi. maho vā

rajasaḥ ṚV. 1, 6, 10. 149, 4. divi kṣayantā rajasaḥ pṛthivyām 7, 64, 1.

pārthivam, rajaḥ, divaḥ sadāṁsi VS. 34, 32. divo rajasaḥ pṛthivyāḥ

VĀLAKH. 9, 3. yā dhartārā rajaso rocanasyotādityā divyā pārthivasya ṚV.

5, 69, 4. 54, 4. 6, 7, 7. pārthivāni, rajāṁsi 31, 2. pārthivānyuru rajo

antarikṣam 61, 11. vīndra yāsi divyāni rocanā vi pārthivāni rajasā 10, 32,

2. 149, 2. AV. 13, 1, 7. 4, 1, 4. — b) “irdischer und himmlischer

Dunstkreis”; in manchen der folgenden Stellen kann aber pārthiva als

subst. gefasst werden: “Erdenraum”; vgl. die Stellen unter a). ā paprau

pārthivaṁ rajo badbadhe rocanā divi ṚV. 1, 81, 5. 90, 7. 9, 72, 8. na tvā

vivyāca raja indra pārthivam 8, 77, 5. 1, 154, 1. 6, 49, 3. ye pārthive

rajasyā niṣattāḥ 10, 15, 2. āprā rajāṁsi divyāni pārthivā 4, 53, 3. ṛbhavo

vājamaruhandivo rajaḥ 1, 110, 6. — g) drei “Dunstkreise”: antarikṣam, trī

rajāṁsi, trīṇi rocanā ṚV. 4, 53, 5. je drei rocanā, dyāvaḥ, rajāṁsi 5, 69, 1.

AV. 13, 3, 21. tṛtīye rajasi ṚV. 10, 45, 3. 123, 8. 9, 74, 6. AV. 13, 1, 11.

sechs ṚV. 1, 164, 6. — d) du. “die untere und die obere Region” (über der

Erde) NAIGH. 3, 30. ṚV. 1, 160, 4. vivartayantī rajasī samante 7, 80, 1.

ubhe te vidma rajasī 99, 1. mahī apāre rajasī vivevidat 9, 68, 3. ahaśca

kṛṣṇamahararjunaṁ ca vi vartete rajasī vedyābhiḥ 6, 9, 1. dūto devānāṁ

rajasī samīyase 15, 9. 4, 42, 3. 6. urvī gabhīre rajasī sumeke avaṁśe

dhīraḥ śacyā samairat 56, 3. — e) “die obere und untere Grenze des

Dunstkreises” (pāra und budhna): (tvametān) ayodhayo rajasa indra pāre

ṚV. 1, 33, 7. kṣayantamasya rajasaḥ parāke 7, 100, 5. yo asya pāre

rajaso viveṣa 10, 27, 7. dūre pāre rajaso ro canākaram 49, 6. yā sisratū

rajasaḥ pāre adhvanaḥ VĀLAKH. 11, 2. apo vṛtvī rajaso budhnamāśayat

ṚV. 1, 52, 6. taṁ devā budhne rajasaḥ sudaṁsasaṁ divaspṛthivyoraratiṁ

nyerire 2, 2, 3. 4, 1, 11. 17, 14. antau 5, 47, 3. pūrve ardhe 1, 92, 7. 124,

5. — z) rajasaspatiḥ ṚV. 7, 35, 5 nach SĀY. Indra. — b) “Dust, Nebel;

Düsterkeit, Dunkel” (vgl. greek); = rātri NAIGH. 1, 7. ā kṛṣṇena rajasā

vartamāno niveśayannamṛtaṁ martyaṁ ca ṚV. 1, 35, 2. 4. jāhuṣaṁ

sugebhirnaktamūhathū rajobhiḥ “im Dunkel” 116, 20. 6, 62, 6. rathasya

bhānuṁ rurucū rajobhiḥ 2. rajastamo mopa gāḥ AV. 8, 2, 1. pārayāmi tvā

rajasa uttvā mṛtyorapīparam 9. ketumānudyansahamāno rajāṁsi viśvā

āditya pravato vi bhāsi 13, 2, 28. sūryasya cakṣū rajasaityāvṛtam ṚV. 1,

164, 14. sūryo na cakṣū rajaso visarjane 5, 59, 3. purūṇi cinni tatānā

rajāṁsi 10, 111, 4. tantuṁ tanvanrajaso bhānumanvihi “vom Dunst zum

Licht” 53, 6. dhūmenāgnī rajasā ca madhyamaḥ NIR. 12, 26. — c) “Dunst,

Staub” (AK. 2, 8, 2, 66. 3, 4, 3, 22. H. 970. MED. s. 30. fg. HALĀY. 2,

288); “Unreinigkeit, kleine Partikeln irgend eines Stoffes”: kṛṣṇā rajāṁsi

patsutaḥ prayāṇe jātavedasaḥ ṚV. 8, 43, 6. yasyāṁ vāto mātariśveyate

rajāṁsi kṛṇvan AV. 12, 1, 51. aśva iva rajo dudhuve vi tāṁ janān 57. 10,

1, 32. rajaḥ sparśe medhyam M. 5, 133. 11, 110. pārthivaṁ rajaḥ MBH. 1,

6021. R. 1, 28, 14. 2, 33, 19. praśaśāma mahīrajaḥ 40, 33. 72, 31. 3, 76,

33. 4, 39, 9. rajodhūmākulā diśaḥ SUŚR. 1, 22, 2. 118, 5. rajaḥkaṇa

RAGH. 1, 85. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 9. 38. 9, 41. 16, 40. 30, 2.

dhūtādhvarajas adj. KATHĀS. 18, 113. 244. PRAB. 77, 9. BHĀG. P. 3, 17,

5. 4, 5, 7. rajobhisturagotkīrṇaiḥ RAGH. 1, 42. 4, 29. 6, 33. 12, 82. ŚĀK. 8.

Spr. 2700. 2816. PAÑCAR. 1, 14, 100. ayo- KAUŚ. 8. malayaja- Spr. 3268.

“Staubkörnchen”: jalāntaragate bhānau yatsūkṣmaṁ dṛśyate rajaḥ.

prathamaṁ tatpramāṇānāṁ trasareṇuṁ pracakṣate.. M. 8, 132. YĀJÑ. 1,

361. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 58, 1. 2. Ind. St. 8, 436. yaḥ pārthivānyapi

kavirvimame rajāṁsi BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 40. 8, 23, 19. Vgl. loha-. — d)

“Blüthenstaub” MED. sumano- AK. 2, 4, 1, 17. padmapuṣpa- R. 3, 79, 29.

MEGH. 34. 66. ŚĀK. 86. 131. VIKR. 26. MĀLAV. 44. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 22.

ajāta- adj. Spr. 135. — e) “das Staubige” d. i. “das aufgerissene und

bebaute Land”: ukṣantyasmai maruto hitā iva purū rajāṁsi payasā

mayobhuvaḥ ṚV. 1, 166, 3. ghṛtairgavyūtimukṣataṁ madhvā rajāṁsi 3,

62, 16. pari jrayāṁsi bharate rajāṁsi “sie fährt über die Flächen, die

Felder” 10, 75, 7. — f) “die menses” (eig. “Unreinigkeit”) NIR. 4, 19. AK.

2, 6, 1, 21. 3, 4, 30, 233. H. 536. MED. arajovittā kumārī KAUŚ. 37.

GṚHYASAṁGR. 2, 31. SUŚR. 1, 30, 16. rasādeva striyā raktaṁ

rajaḥsaṁjñaṁ pravartate 43, 16. 44, 18. rajasābhiplutāṁ nārīm M. 4, 41.

rajasā samabhiplutām 42. rajasyuparate 5, 66. 108. rajasābhipariplutā

MBH. 3, 523. asaṁprāptarajā gaurī prāpte rajasi rohiṇī Spr. 282. 2907.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 74, 9. ajāta- adj. Spr. 135. adṛṣṭa- HALĀY. 2, 329. — g)

in der Philosophie “die mittlere der drei Qualitäten” (sattva, rajas oder

tejas und tamas), “die den Geist verdüsternde Leidenschaft” (wobei an

raj, rañj, rāga angeknüpft wird) AK. 1, 1, 4, 7. 3, 4, 30, 233. MED.

MAITRJUP. 5, 2. M. 12, 24. rāgadveṣau rajaḥ smṛtam 26. yattu

duḥkhasamāyuktamaprītikaramātmanaḥ. tadrajo ‘pratighaṁ vidyāt 28.

tamaso lakṣaṇaṁ kāmo rajasastvartha ucyate. sattvasya lakṣaṇaṁ

dharmaḥ 38. kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajoguṇasamudbhavaḥ 3, 37.

SĀṁKHYAK. 13. 54. MADHUS. in Ind. St. 1, 23, 17. SUŚR. 1, 81, 7. 2, 537,

18. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 66, 9. BṚH. 2, 7. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 289. 324.

BHĀG. P. 3, 8, 13. rajo’dhika “in dem das” Rajas “vorherrscht” VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 69, 8. “Leidenschaft” überh. MBH. 3, 1086. śānta- adj. BHAG. 6,

27. rajoviriktamanāḥ śaśāsa RAGH. 14, 85. antargatamapāstaṁ me

rajaso ‘pi paraṁ tamaḥ KUMĀRAS. 6, 60. KATHĀS. 20, 128. BHĀG. P. 3,

15, 20. roṣarajobhiḥ (zugleich “Staub”) Spr. 2816. — h) “Zinn” H. ś. 159

(kein Fehler st. raṅga, da dieses im Text sich findet). — i) = jyotis, udaka,

loka, ahan NIR. 4, 19. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Sohnes des Vasiṣṭha VP. 83. —

Vgl. a-, danta-, nī-, paro-, pāda-, puṣpa-, bhṛṅga-, mahī-, vi-, sa-, rājasa.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

rajas rajas,

I. i. e. rañj + as, n. (the original signification was probably ‘Dimness;’ cf.

rajani and Goth. riquis).

1. Sky, Chr. 289, 7 = Rigv. i. 50, 7.

2. Dust, Man. 11, 110.

3. The pollen of a flower, Vikr. d. 26.

4. The menses, Man. 4, 41.

II. i. e. perhaps ṛj + as (cf. [greek]), n. The quality of passion, Vedāntas.

in Chr. 207, 8.

— Comp. a-, adj. free from dust, Nal. 24, 42. nīrajas, i. e. nis-, adj. 1. free

from dust, Rām. 2, 87, 21 Gorr., 2. free from passion, Rām. 4, 44, 41.

parorajas, see s. v. paras. Vi-,

I. adj. free from passion, Chr. 16, 17.

II. f. a woman who has ceased to menstrnate. sa-, f. a woman during

menstruation.

— Cf. Goth. riquis.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

rajas n. atmosphere, air, esp. the lower region of clouds and vapours

(opp. div or rācana); the sky (conc. also as twofold, rajasī) mist, gloom

(i.g.); dust, pollen of flowers, any small particle of matter; foulness,

impurity, esp. the menstrual secretion, darkness or soul-darkening

passion (ph.).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

rajas raj-as, n. [dimness, region of clouds] 1. V.: sky, air, atmosphere

(distinguished from div or svar, region of light, heaven, which is beyond;

regarded as consisting of an upper and a lower stratum, hence often du.,

the lower an upper air: pl. the skies); vapour, mist, gloom; (dark =)

ploughed soil, cultivated field (RV., rare); 2. C.: dust; grain of dust; pollen

of flowers; menstrual discharge, menses; [quality inflaming or obscuring

the mind] passion (one of the three qualities, sattva, rajas, tamas, in

phil.).

varṣaḥ , –rṣam [vṛṣ bhāve ghañ kartari ac vā]

(1) Raining, rain, a shower of rain; vidyutstanitavarṣeṣu Ms. 4. 103;

Me. 35.

(2) Sprinkling, effusion, throwing down, a shower of anything; surabhi

suravimuktaṁ puṣpavarṣaṁ papāta R. 12. 102; so śaravarṣaḥ, śilāvarṣaḥ;

lājavarṣaḥ &c.

(3) Seminal effusion.

(4) A year (usually only n.); iyaṁti varṣāṇi tayā

sahogramabhyasyatīva vratamāsidhāraṁ R. 13. 67; na vavarṣa varṣāṇi

dbādaśa dakṣaśatākṣaḥ Dk.; varṣabhogyeṇa śāpena Me. 1.

(5) A division of the world, a continent; (nine such divisions are

usually enumerated:

(1) kuru; 2 hiraṇmaya; 3 ramyaka; 4 ilāvṛta; 5 hari; 6 ketumālā; 7

bhadrāśva, 8 kiṁnara; and 9 bhārata); etadūḍhagurubhāra bhārataṁ

varṣamadya mama vartate vaśe Śi. 14. 5.

(6) India (= bhāratavarṣa).

(7) A cloud (only m. according to Hemachandra).

— Comp.

–aṁśaḥ, –aṁśakaḥ, –aṁgaḥ a month.

–aṁbu n. rain-water.

–ayutaṁ ten thousand years.

–arcis m. the planet Mars.

–avasānaṁ the autumn or Śarat season.

–āghoṣaḥ a frog.

–āmadaḥ a peacock.

–upalaḥ hail.

–karaḥ a cloud. (

–rī) a cricket.

–kośaḥ, –ṣaḥ 1. a month. –2. an astrologer.

–giriḥ, –parvataḥ ‘a Varsha mountain’, i. e. one of the mountain-

ranges supposed to separate the different divisions of the world from one

another; (they are seven:

–himavān hemakṭaśca niṣadho merureva ca . caitraḥ karṇī ca

śṛṁgī ca saptaite varṣaparvatāḥ). –ja a. (varṣeja also) produced in the

rainy season.

–dharaḥ 1. a cloud. –2. a eunuch, an attendant on the women’s

apartments; M. 4; (varṣadharṣa in the same sense).

–pākin m. the hog-plum.

–pūgaḥ a series or collection of years.

–pratibaṁdhaḥ a drought.

–priyaḥ the Chātaka bird.

–varaḥ a eunuch, an attendant on the women’s apartments.

–vṛddhiḥ f. birth-day.

–śataṁ a century, one hundred years.

–sahasraṁ a thousand years.

season, autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

varṣāvasāna m. (!) “Ende der Regenzeit, der Herbst” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

varṣāśarad f. du. the rainy season and autumn.

śaradau”).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vārikośa m. = kośavāri “das beim Gottesurtheil angewandte Weihwasser”

KATHĀS. 119, 39.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

vārikośa vāri-kośa, m. (= kośa-vāri) consecrated water used in ordeals;

-garbha+u-dara, a. (pregnant =) heavy with rain (cloud);

-cara, a. aquatic; m. aquatic animal; fish;

-ja, m. (produced in the water), shell; n. lotus: -akṣa, a. lotus-eyed;

-jāta, (pp.) m. shell;

-taraṁga, m. wave;

-tas, ad. by water;

-taskara, m. stealer of water, esp. of the sun (which draws up water

its rays);

-da, a. giving water or rain; m. rain-cloud: -āga-ma, m. (arrival of

clouds), rainy season, -anta, m. (end of the clouds), autumn;

-dha-ra, a. bearing or containing water; m. rain-cloud;

-dhānī, f. reservoir of water, water-butt;

-dhārā, f. sg. & pl. torrent of water;

-dhi, m. receptacle of water, ocean, sea (four or seven seas are

spoken of);

-nidhi, m. id.;

-pa, a. 1. drinking water; 2. guarding water;

-patha, m. water-way; sea-faring: -upa-jīvin, a. subsisting by maritime

trade;

-pūr-vam, ad. previously pouring out water;

-bandhana, n. damming up of water;

-bin-du, m. drop of water;

-mat, a. abounding in water;

-maya, a. (ī) consisting of water; peculiar to water;

-muc, a. discharging water or rain; m. rain-cloud;

-yantra, n. water-wheel;

-ra, m. (giving water), cloud;

-rāśi, m. volume of water; ocean;

-ruha, n. (growing in the water), lotus-flower;

-vāraṇa, m. water-elephant (a kind of monster);

-vāha, a. bringing water; m. rain-cloud; god of rain: -ka, a. bringing

water;

-vihāra, m. sporting in the water;

-śaya, a. living in the water;

-saṁbhava, a. produced in or obtained from water;

-stha, a. (situated =) reflected in the water (sun’s disc).

vārida “vāri-da” m. a rain-cloud &c.

vārida “vāri-da” m. Cyperus Rotundus &c. (in also n. or “ā”, f.)

vārida “vāri-da” n. a sort of perfume (= “vālā” or “bāla”)

vārida “vāri-da” n. “-dāgama” m. the rainy season

vārida “vāri-da” n. “-dānta” m. “end of the rainy season”, autumn

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vārida 1) adj. “Wasser gebend” M. 4, 229. “Regen gebend”: garbhāḥ

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 12. — 2) m. “Regenwolke” AK. 1, 1, 2, 8. H. 164,

Schol. MṚCCH. 86, 20. Spr. 1332. 1840. 2776. 4891. UTTARAR. 93, 6

(120, 14). WILSON, SĀṁKHYAK. S. 64. — 3) m. (wie alle Wörter für

“Wolke”; vgl. AK. 2, 4, 5. 25) “Cyperus rotundus Lin.” SUŚR. 2, 224, 16.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 15. — 4) n. = vālā ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. = bāla “ein

best. vegetabilisches Parfum” WILSON nach ders. Aut.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

vārida vāri-da (vb. dā),

I. adj. Yielding water.

II. m. A cloud, Utt. Rāmac. 120, 14; Rājat. 5, 189.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

vārida a. giving water or rain; m. cloud.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

vārida na° vāri dadāti dā–ka . 1 meghe 2 mustake ca amaraḥ . 3

jaladātari tri° 4 vālāyāṁ strī śabdaca° .

viṣuvam The first point of Aries or Libra into which the sun enters at the

vernal or autumnal equinox, the equinoctial point.

— Comp.

–chāyā the shadow of the gnomon at noon.

–dinaṁ the day of the equinox.

–rekhā the equinoctial line.

–saṁkrāṁtiḥ f. the sun’s equinoctial passage.

branchless ; handless ; born under the constellation Viśākhā ; m. a

beggar ; a spindle ; a partic. attitude in shooting ; Boerhavia Procumbens

; N. of Skanda ; a manifestation of Skanda (regarded as his son) &c.; N.

of a demon dangerous to, children (held to be a manifestation of Skanda)

; of śiva ; of a Devarshi ; of a Dānava ; of a Daśa-pūrvin and other

persons &c.; = “viśākha-datta” below ; (“ā”) f. a species of plant (Dūrvā

grass ; = “kaṭhillaka” ; (also du. or pl.) the 14th (later 16th) lunar

asterism (figured by a decorated arch and containing four or originally

two stars under the regency of a dual divinity, Indra and Agni; it is

probably to be connected with the quadrangle of stars [characters]

Librae; see “nakṣatra”) &c. &c.; N. of a woman ; (“ī”) f. a forked stick ;

n. a fork, ramification ; “-ja” m. the orange-tree ; “-datta” m. N. of the

author of the Mudrā-rākṣasa (he was the son of Pṛithu and lived probably

in the 9th century) 507; “-deva” m. N. of a poet ; of another man ; “-

māhātmya” n. N. of wk.; “-yūpa” m. N. of a king ; m. or n. (?) N. of a

place ; “-vat” m. N. of a mountain

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

viśākha (2. vi + śākhā) 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “verästet, gegabelt”: vīrudhaḥ AV.

8, 7, 4. yūpa TS. 2, 1, 9, 3. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 16, 9, 26. vapāśrapaṇī KĀTY. ŚR.

6, 5, 7. 6, 27. GOBH. 3, 10, 25. — b) “astlos”: pādapa HARIV. 2753. — c)

“händelos” HARIV. 2755. — d) “unter dem Sternbilde” Viśākhā “geboren”

P. 4, 3, 34. — 2) m. a) “Bettler” H. an. 3, 114 (yācaka). MED. kh. 12

(tarkaka). “Spindel” (d. i. tarku) WILSON nach ŚABDAM. — b) Bez. “einer

best. Stellung beim Schiessen” (dhanvināṁ vitastyantareṇa pade

saṁsthānam) BHAR. zu AK. 2, 8, 2, 53 nach ŚKDR. — c) “Boerhavia

procumbens Roxb.” (punarnavā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) Bein. Skanda’s

AK. 1, 1, 1, 35. TRIK. 3, 3, 51. H. 209. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 19. MBH. 3,

14634. — e) “eine Manifestation” Skanda’s, “die als sein Sohn aufgefasst

wird”, MBH. 1, 2588. 3, 14384. 14532. fg. 9, 2487. fg. 13, 7636. HARIV.

157. 2966. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 46, 11. 48, 26. KATHĀS. 20, 92. 50, 183. fg.

VP. 120. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 14 (st. skandha ist mit der ed. Bomb. skanda zu

lesen). Verz. d. Oxf. H. 117,a,34 (?). — f) als “Manifestation” Skanda’s N.

“eines den Kindern gefährlichen Dämons” SUŚR.2,387,6. 394,8. ŚĀRÑG.

SAṁH.1,7,109. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 307,b,25. — g) Bein. Śiva’s MBH. 13, 1186.

skanda- (skandha- ed. Calc.) desgl. 907; vgl. skāndaviśākha P. 7, 3, 21,

Schol. — h) N. pr. eines Devarshi MBH. 2, 295. eines Dānava KATHĀS. 47,

18. eines Brahmanen RĀJA-TAR. 1, 204. – SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 270

(40). — 3) f. ā “eine best. Pflanze” KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 7, 17. = dūrvā Comm. =

kaṭhillaka H. an. MED. — b) du. Bez. “des 14ten” (später “des 16ten”)

Nakshatra COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 338. Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 335. fg.

P. 1, 2, 62. AV. 19, 7, 3. TS. 4, 4, 10, 2. TBR. 1, 5, 2, 2. 7. 3, 1, 1, 11.

ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 1, 10. AV. PARIŚ. bei WEBER, Nax. 1, 312. MBH. 3, 16970. R.

4, 33, 44. 5, 73, 56. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 6. pl. MBH. 13, 4262. R. 2, 41, 11.

ŚĀK. 35, 21. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 10, 19. 11, 58. 101, 9. sg. vedisch nach P.

1, 2, 62. AK. 1, 1, 2, 23. TRIK. H. 112. H. an. MED. GARGA bei WEBER,

Nax. 1, 309. MBH. 6, 95. 13, 3270. R. 6, 86, 43. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 9. 15,

30. 102, 4. 105, 3. MĀRK. P. 33, 12. ŚATR. 14, 6. unbestimmt ob. sg.

oder pl. MĀRK. P. 58, 33. im comp. LALIT. ed. Calc. 62, 14. fg. VET. in LA.

(III) 13, 11. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 12. 9, 3. 32, 12. 47, 18. 55, 31. saviśākha

98, 1. — b) ein Frauenname BURN. Intr. 24, N. 1. SCHIEFNER, Lebensb.

270 (40). HIOUEN-THSANG 1, 305. — 4) f. ī “eine gabelförmige Stange”

KĀTY. ŚR. 13, 3, 13. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 17, 1, 15. 10, 9. — 5) n. “Gabel,

Verzweigung” KĀTY. ŚR. 8, 5, 38. LĀṬY. 1, 5, 19. 7, 7. 10. Dasselbe Wort

vermuthen wir st. viśikha in der Stelle (sūtikāyāḥ)

viśākhāntaramabhyajyāt “das Innere der Gabel” d. h. “zwischen den

Schenkeln” SUŚR. 1, 368, 12. — Vgl. vaiśākha.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

viśākha 1 I One of the three brothers of Skandadeva. The other two were

Śākha and Naigameya. There is a story regarding them in Mahābhārata,

Śānti Parva, as follows:–

viśākha 2 II A hermit. Mention is made in M.B. Sabhā Parva, Chapter 7,

Stanza 19, that this hermit stays in the palace of Indra, glorifying him.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

viśākha

I. vi-śākha (cf. śākhā), adj. Branchless.

II. m.

1. Kārttikeya.

2. An attitude in shooting, standing with the feet a span apart.

3. A solieitor, a beggar.

4. A spindle.

III. f. khā, The sixteenth lunar asterism, Lass. 16, 18.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

viśākha a. branchless or having spreading branches, forked; f. ā sgl. du.

pl. N. of a lunar mansion, f. ī a forked pole (also -khikā f.); n. fork,

ramification.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

viśākha vi-śākha (AV. also-sākha), branched, forked (V.); branchless (E.);

handless (E.); m. (C.) cp. of Skanda; a manifestation of Skanda, regarded

as his son; N.; n. fork: ā, f. sg., du., pl. the fourteenth (later sixteenth)

lunar asterism;

-śākha-ka, a. (ikā) forked;

-śākha-datta, m. N. of the author of the Mudrākṣasa (seventh or

eighth cent, A. D.);

-śākhikā, f. forked pole: -daṇḍa, m. id.;

-śākh-ila, m. N. of a merchant;

-śātana, a. (ī) destroying; n. cutting off; hewing down, destroying;

-śāpa, a. freed from a curse;

-śārada, a. experienced, skilled, or proficient in, conversant with (lc.,

-°; ord. mg.); clever (speech); beautifully autumnal; lacking the gift of

speech; bold, impudent;

-śāla, a. [= *vi-śāra, extended: śṛ] extensive, spacious, broad, wide;

large, great; powerful (army); illustrious (family): -°, full of; m. N. of the

father of Takṣaka; N. of various kings; N. of an Asura: ā, f. N. of the town

of Ujjayinī;

-śāla-tā, f. great extent;

-śāla-locanā, f. large-eyed woman;

-śāla-varman, m. N.;

-śāla-vijaya, m. a kind of military array;

-śāla+akṣa, a. (ī) large-eyed; m. ep. of Śiva, sp. as author of a

Śāstra.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

viśākha pu° viśiṣṭā śākhā’sya . 1 kārtikeye 2 dhanvināṁ

vitastyantarālapādāvasthāne amaraḥ . 3 punarnavāyāṁ rājani° 4 yācake

ca medi° . 5 skandāṁśajāte devabhede tannāmaniruktiḥ mā° va° 226 a°

uktā yathā vajraprahārāt skandasya sajātaḥ puruṣo’paraḥ . yuvā

kāñcanasannāhaḥ śaktidhṛgdivyakuṇḍalaḥ . yadvajraveśanājjāto

viśākhastena kīrtitaḥ . 6 skandānujabhrātari agneḥ putraḥ kumārastu

śrīmān śaravanālayaḥ . tasya śākho viśākhaśca naigame yaśca pṛṣṭhajaḥ

bhā° ā° 66 a° . 7 śive bhā° ā° 17 a° .

conversant with (loc. or comp.; “-tva” n. &c.

mf (“ā”) n. learned, wise

mf (“ā”) n. clever (as a speech)

mf (“ā”) n. of a clear or serene mind

mf (“ā”) n. famous, celebrated

mf (“ā”) n. beautifully autumnal

mf (“ā”) n. lacking the gift of speech

mf (“ā”) n. bold, impudent

viśārada “vi-śārada” mf (“ā”) n. = “śreṣṭha” m. Mimusops Elengi

mf (“ā”) n. N. of an author and of another person

viśārada “vi-śārada” mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a kind of Alhagi

viśārada “vi-śārada” mf (“ā”) n. “-di-man” m. skill, proficiency,

conversancy

viśārada “vi-śārada” see p.952, col.3.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

viśārada a.

(1) Clever, skilful or proficient in, versed in, conversant with (usually

in comp.); madhudānaviśāradāḥ R. 9. 29, 8. 17.

(2) Learned, wise.

(3) Famous, celebrated.

(4) Bold, confident. –daḥ The Bakula tree.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

viśārada (wohl 2. vi + śā-) 1) adj. (f. ā) gaṇa dṛḍhādi zu P. 5, 1, 123. a)

“erfahren, kundig, vertraut” AK. 3, 4, 16, 98. H. 341. an. 4, 144. MED. d.

53. HĀR. 224. HALĀY. 2, 178. die Ergänzung im loc.: saṁkhyāne MBH. 3,

2833. rathamārgeṣu 8, 1983. nṛtyeṣu 14, 2643. bhaṅgisūcanavidhau

KATHĀS. 15, 148 (viśarada gedr.). im gen.: yuddhānāmaviśāradaḥ MBH.

7, 5540. im comp. vorangehend: sarvaśāstra- M. 7, 63. śrutijāti- YĀJÑ. 3,

115. yuddha- BHAG. 1, 9. mantrabuddhi- MBH. 1, 1597. pratipatti- 8248.

2, 394. 3, 2485. 5, 5970. 13, 6772. R. 1, 2, 1. 53, 8. 2, 43, 18. 74, 18. 80,

1. R. GORR. 2, 6, 15. 4, 9, 45. 51, 18. SUŚR. 1, 122, 12. 256, 3. RAGH. 8,

17. 9, 32. Spr. (II) 265. 1288. (I) 3073. 4413. KATHĀS. 20, 116. 74, 287.

RĀJA-TAR. 4, 265. BHĀG. P. 2, 3, 25. 9, 13, 27. lalanānunayāti- 5, 2, 17.

ohne Ergänzung MBH. 4, 1032. R. 5, 3, 70. BHĀG. P. 8, 23, 8 (= sarvajña

Comm.). buddhiḥ suviśāradā 11, 7, 26. parāpavādena viśāradena

“geschickt, gewandt, dem Zwecke entsprechend” 28, 23.

stavaiścārthaviśāradaiḥ so v. a. “sinnvoll” MBH. 13, 6413. — b) “dreist,

frech” AK. H. an. MED. — c) = śreṣṭha AJAYAPĀLA im ŚKDR. — 2) m.

“Mimusops Elengi Lin.” (bakula) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. AUSH. 48. — 3) f. ā

“eine best. Pflanze”, = kṣudradurālabhā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. vidyā-

und vaiśāradya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

viśārada viśārada,

1. Learned, wise.

2. Skilled, conversant with, Pañc. ii. d. 14; Chr. 5, 5.

3. Famous.

4. Bold, presuming.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

viśārada a. experienced, knowing, wise; clever at, familiar with (loc. or

–°).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

viśārada pu° viśālaṁ dadāti dā–ka lasya raḥ . 1 bakulavṛkṣe 2

kṣudradurālabhāyāṁ strī rājani° . 3 paṇḍite pu° 4 pragalbhaṁ tri° amaraḥ

5 śreṣṭhe ca tri° ajayaḥ .

year”) (applied to the disease called Takman as likely to occur every

autumn).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

viśvaśārada adj. “alljährlich” oder “ein ganzes Jahr dauernd” AV. 9, 8, 6.

19, 34, 10.

a hundred

mf (“ikā”) n. the hundredth

śataka m. N. of Viṣṇu

śataka mf (“ikā”) n. (“ikā”) f. an amount of a hundred or of several

hundreds (according to the numeral prefixed in comp. e.g. “dvi-śatikāṁ

dadāti”. he gives an amount or a sum of 200)

śataka mf (“ikā”) n. (“akam”) n. a hundred, a century (construed like

“śata”) (esp. in titles of wks. “a cento” or “a collection of 100 stanzas”;

cf. “amaru-, nīti-ś-” &c.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śataka a.

(1) A hundred.

(2) Containing a hundred. –kaṁ

(1) A century.

(2) A collection of one hundred stanzas; as in nīti-, vairāgya-,

śṛṁgāra- a collection of one hundred stanzas on Nīti’ &c.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śataka (von śata) 1) adj. (f. śatikā) a) “aus hundert bestehend, hundert

umfassend”: saṁgha P. 5, 1, 21, Schol. nidāna Vārtt., Schol. saṁdhyā

HARIV. 514. MĀRK. P. 46, 30. — b) “der hundertste”: kalā R. 7, 36, 13. —

2) m. Bein. Viṣṇu’s H. ś. 65. — 3) f. śatikā nach einer kleineren Zahl “ein

Betrag von – hundert” P. 5, 4, 1. 2. — 4) n. “ein Hundert”: puṁsām

PAÑCAR. 1, 1, 25. fg. 2, 25. śatakaiḥ skandhaiḥ 7, 13. puṣpodyānaiśca

śatakaiḥ 17. ratnakumbhaṁ (-kumbha?) śatakam 2, 4, 30. aṣṭa- 108:

nāmāṣṭaśatakam MBH. 3, 158. — Vgl. amaru-, dvi-, nīti-, bhāva-, mayūra-,

vairāgya-, vyāsa-, śṛṅgāra- u. s. w.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śataka śata + ka,

I. adj. Hundred.

II. (m.?), n. A century, a collection of a hundred stanzas, Bhartṛ. title.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śataka f. śatikā consisting of hundred or the hundredth; n. a hundred.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śataka śata-ka, a. (ikā) consisting of a hundred; hundredth; n. a hundred,

century (construed like sata);

-kṛtvas, ad. a hundred times;

-koṭi, 1. f. pl. a thousand millions; 2. m. (having a hundred points),

Indra’s thunderbolt; (a) -kratu, a. having a hundredfold power or counsel

(V.); containing a hundred sacrifices (Br.); m. N. of Indra (C.).: -° with

kṣiti-etc., lord of earth, prince, king;

-khaṇḍa-maya, a. (ī) consisting of a hundred rays;

-gu, a. possessing a hundred cows;

-guṇa, a. a hundredfold, increased a hundred times, a hundred times

stronger, more valuable or efficacious etc.: -m, ad. a hundred times more

than (ab.);

-guṇita, pp. increased a hundredfold, a hundred times longer;

-guṇi-bhāva, m. hundredfold increase;

-guṇi-bhū, be multiplied a hundredfold;

-gvin, a. hundredfold (RV.);

-ghnī, f. of -han; (a) -cakra, a. hundred-wheeled (RV.1);

-tama, a. (ā, ī) hundredth;

-traya, n., ī, f. three hundred;

-dala, n. lotus flower;

-dru -kā, -drū, f. N. of a river (= V. śutudrī), now Sutlej;

-dvāra, a. having a hundred exits (hole);

-dhara, m. N. of a king;

-dhā, ad. a hundredfold; into a hundred parts or pieces: with bhū, be

divided into a hundred parts consisting of (g.); (a) -dhāra, a. 1. having a

hundred streams; 2. having a hundred points or edges; m. thunderbolt

(C.);

-dhṛti, m. ep. of Brahman and of Indra;

-dhauta, pp. cleansed a hundredfold, perfectly clean; 1. -pattra, n. (°-)

a hundred leaves; a hundred vehicles; 2. (a) -pattra, a. having a hundred

feathers or leaves (RV.1); m. woodpecker; peacock; n. day-lotus: -yo-ni,

m. ep. of Brahman, -āyata+īkṣaṇa, a. having long lotus-like eyes;

-patha, a. having a hundred patha, very many-sided; m. T. of a

Brāhmaṇa;

-brāhmaṇa, n. id.; (a) -pad, a. (-ī; strg. base -pād) hundredfooted; m.,

-ī, f. centipede; (a) -parvan, a. hundred-jointed; (a) -pavitra, a. purifying

a hundredfold (RV.1);

-pādaka, m. centipede;

-pāla, m. overseer of a hundred (villages, g.);

-buddhi, a. hundred-witted; m. N. of a fish;

-brāhmaṇa-ghāta-ja, a. (arising from =) equal to the guilt produced by

the murder of a hundred Brāhmans;

-bhaṅgī-bhū, be varied in a hundred ways;

-makha, m. nep. of Indra; (a) -manyan, a. having a hundredfold

wrath; m. ep. of Indra (C.): -cāpa, m. n. rainbow;

-mayūkha, m. (hundred-rayed) moon; (a) -māna, a. hundredfold (V.);

weighing a hundred (Raktikās, comm.; V.); m. gold object weighing a

hundred Mānas; m. n. weight (or gift) of a hundred Mānas in gold or

silver);

-mukha, a. having a hundred openings or entrances; possible in a

hundred ways (fall); (a) -yātu, m. N.;

-yojaṇa-yāyin, a. travelling a hundred Yojanas;

-rātra, m. n. festival of a hundred days;

-rudriya, a. belonging or sacred to a hundred Rudras;

-ṛcin, m. pl. designation of the composers of Maṇḍ. 1. of the Ṛg-veda;

-lakṣa, n. a hundred lacs;

-varṣa, a. a hundred years old; lasting a hundred years;

-śarkara, n. sg. hundred globules: -tā, f. condition of a –;

-śas, ad. in a hundred ways, in hundreds (referring to a nm., ac., or

in.); a hundred times; (a) -śākha, a. (ā, ī) having a hundred branches

(also fig.); (a) -śārada, a. containing, bestowing etc. a hundred autumns

(V.); n. period or age of a hundred years (V.);

-śṛṅga, a. hundred-peaked;

-saṁkhya, a. numbering a hundred;

-sani, a. gaining a hundred;

-sahasra, n. sg. pl. a hundred thousand (w. g., app., or -°);

-sā, a. winning a hundred (RV.);

-sāhasra, a. (ī) amounting to a hundred thousand, hundred

thousandfold;

-seya, n. hundredfold gain (RV.1);

-svin, a. possessing a hundred (RV.1);

-han, a. (-ghnī) slaying a hundred (V.): -ghnī, f. kind of deadly

weapon;

-hali, a. possessing a hundred large ploughs; (a) -hima, a. living a

hundred winters (V.);

-hradā, f. lightning.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śataka tri° śataṁ parimāṇamasya lan . 1 śatasaṁkhyāyukte .

hundred autumns ; n. a period or age of a hundred years ; (“āya”) ind. for

a hundred autumns or years

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śataśārada 1) adj. “hundert Herbste zählend, – gebend u.s.w.” AV. 10, 3,

12. havis ṚV. 10, 161, 3 (śatavīrya AV.). ṛtavaḥ TS. 5, 7, 2, 4. — 2) n.

“Zeit” –, “Alter von hundert Jahren” ṚV. 7, 101, 6. 10, 161, 2. AV. 1, 35,

1. 8, 2, 2. 5, 21.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śataśārada a. containing or granting a hundred autumns or years; n. such

a period.

śaraccandra “śarac-candra” m. “-drāya” Nom. P. “-yate”, to resemble the

autumnal moon

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaraccandra (śarad + candra) m. “Herbstmond” ŚĀK. 145. VET. in LA.

(III) 1. 16. pariṇata- “Vollmond im Herbst” Spr. 2789.

pariṇataśaraccandrikāsu kṣapāsu MEGH. 109.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaraccandra m. the autumnal moon; -ccandrikā f. the autumnal moon-

shine.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaraccandra śarac-candra, m. autumnal moon (pariṇata-, full –);

-candrikā, f. autumn moonlight (pariṇata-, a. f. having autumnal full-

moonlight);

-chāli, m. autumnal rice (śāli).

candrikāsu kṣapāsu” cf. “pariṇata”)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaracchāli (śarad + śāli) m. “im Herbst reifender Reis” RĀJA-TAR. 2, 18.

5, 269.

(supposed to cease its cries)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaracchikhin (śarad + śi-) m. “ein Pfau im Herbste”: ist stumm MBH. 12,

4357.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śarajjyotsnā (śarad + jyo-) f. “herbstlicher Mondschein” Spr. 2960.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śarajjyotsnā f. the autumnal moon-shine.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śarajjyotsnā śaraj-jyotsnā, f. autumnal moonlight.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaratkāmin (śarad + kā-) m. “Hund” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śaratkāmin pu° śaradi kāmayate kama–ṇini . kukkure śabdara0

śaratkāla “śarat-kāla” m. “-lina” mfn. autumnal

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaratkāla (śarad + kāla) m. “Herbstzeit” RAGH. 12,79. Spr. 2964. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 288,b, No. 688. wohl auch BHĀG. P. 10, 33, 26 herzustellen für

śaratkāvya.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaratkāla m. the autumnal season.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaratkāla śarat-kāla, m. autumnal season;

-padma, n. autumnal lotus;

-samaya, m. autumnal season.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaratpadma (śarad + padma) n. “eine im Herbst erscheinende

Lotusblüthe” Spr. 5066. = sitāmbhoja “eine weisse Lotusblüthe” RĀJAN.

im ŚKDR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaratpadma n. an autumnal lotus-flower.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śaratpadma na° śaradiva śubhraṁ padmam . śvetapadme rājani° .

m. the moon in such a night)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaratparvan n. = śāradī “eine Vollmondsnacht im Herbst” TRIK. 1, 1, 108.

-parvaśaśin “Vollmond im Herbst” LA. (III) 88, 18.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaratparvan n. a full-moon night in autumn.

śaratparvaśaśin m. the full moon in autumn.

rainy season

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaratsamaya (śarad + sa-) m. “Herbstzeit” VEṆĪS. ed. GRILL 5,1. 2. 6.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,a,36.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaratsamaya m. the autumnal season.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaratsasya (śarad + sa-) n. “Herbstkorn” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 10, 18. 40, 1;

vgl. śaratsamutthānāṁ sasyānām 12.

autumnal season (the sultry season of two months succeeding the rains;

in some parts of India comprising the months Bhādra and āśvina, in other

places āśvina and Kārttika, fluctuating thus from August to November)

&c. &c.

f. a year (or pl. poetically for “years” cf. “varṣa”)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śarad f. [śṝ-adi Uṇ. 1. 129] 1. The autumn, autumnal season (comprising

the two months āśvina and kārtika); yātrāyai codayāmāsa taṁ śakteḥ

prathamaṁ śarad R. 4. 24.

(2) A year; tvaṁ jīva śaradaḥ śataṁ; R. 10. 1; U. 1. 15;

dhāriṇībhūtadhāriṇyārbhava bhartā śaracchataṁ M. 1. 15.

— Comp.

–aṁtaḥ the end of autumn, winter.

–aṁbudharaḥ an autumnal cloud.

–udāśayaḥ an antumnal lake.

–kāmin m. a dog.

–kālaḥ the autumnal season.

–ghanaḥ, –meghaḥ an autumnal cloud.

–caṁdraḥ (śaraccaṁdraḥ) the autumnal moon

–triyāmā an autumnal night

–padmaḥ, –dmaṁ the white lotus.

–parvan n. the festival called Kojagara; q. v.

–mukhaṁ the commencemont of autumn.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śarad UṆĀDIS. 1, 129. f. TRIK. 3, 5, 1. 1) “Herbst” NIR. 4, 25. AK. 1, 1, 3,

19. 3, 4, 16, 95. H. 158. an. 2, 235. MED. d. 39. AV. 6, 55, 2. 8, 2, 22. 12,

1, 36. ŚAT. BR. 1, 5, 3, 12. 2, 1, 3, 1. 4, 3, 1, 17. 11, 2, 7, 32. TS. 2, 6, 1,

1. 5, 7, 2, 4. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 8, 2. KAUŚ. 74. CHĀND. UP. 2, 5, 1.

MAITRJUP. 6, 33. MBH. 3, 12182. R. 3, 22, 1. 4, 26, 25. 27, 23. RAGH. 4,

24. Spr. 3000. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 12, 4. 8. fg. (śarat st. sarit zu lesen).

15,15. 40,12. 43,6. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 97,b,29. 288,b, No. 688. BHĀG.

P.1,5,28.2,8,5. 10,20,34. besteht aus den Monaten Kārttika und

Mārgaśīrṣa SUŚR. 1, 20, 4. 9. — 2) pl. poetisch für “Jahr” AK. 1, 1, 3, 20.

3, 4, 16, 95. H. 159. H. an. MED. HĀR. 258. HALĀY. 1, 116. ṚV. 1, 72, 3.

89, 6. 2, 12, 11. 24, 5. 27, 10. 3, 32, 9. na yaṁ jaranti śarado na māsā na

dyāvaḥ 6, 24, 7. 38, 4. śataṁ jīvātu śaradaḥ purūcīḥ 10, 18, 4. 95, 16.

TBR. 3, 1, 1, 2. 2, 1. KAṬHOP. 1, 23. MBH. 1, 7357. 3, 3054. 11934. R. 2,

54, 30 (32 GORR.). 94, 15. RAGH. 10, 1. UTTARAR. 7, 13 (11, 8.).

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 26. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 53. MĀRK. P. 16, 82. SĀH. D. 12,

14. — Vielleicht von 2. śar, also “Zeit der Reife”; vgl. NIR. 4, 25. — Vgl.

śāratka, śārada, śāradaka, śāradika.

śarad 2) Z. 2 lies 86, 6 st. 89, 6.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śarad śarad, and śaradā śaradā (probably from śṛ10), f.

1. The autumn, Pañc. v. d. 42 (rad).

2. A year, Utt. Rāmac. 11, 8 (rad).

— Comp. pariṇataśarad, i. e. pari-nata- (vb. nam), f. the latter part of

autumn, Megh. 109.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śarad f. autumn, pl. also = year.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śarad śarad, f. autumn: pl. = years (like ‘winters’).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śarad strī, (śṝ + adiḥ .) śarat . ityamaraḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śarad strī ghṛ–adi . 1 vatsare, 2 āśvirakārtikamāsātmake ṇṛtau ca amaraḥ

. tadvāriguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā varṣasu nābhasaṁ vāri

sevetaudbhidameva vā . sarvaṁ śaradi hemante taḍāgaṁ sārasantu vā .

śāradaṁ cānabhiṣyandi laghu tat parikīrtitam . haimantikajalaṁ snigdhaṁ

balyaṁ vṛṣyaṁ hitaṁ dhṛsa rājava° . tatrottaravāyusevanaṁ hitaṁ yathā

vasante dakṣiṇo vāto bhavet varṣāsu paścimaḥ . uttaraḥ śārade kāle

pūrṣo hemantaśaiśire rājani° . ṛtuśabde hṛ° dṛśyam . śaradṛtuśca

vaidyakamate bhādrāśvinamāsātbhayaḥ . tatra varṇanīyāni candrapaṭutā

jalaśuṣkatā agastyaḥ haṁsaḥ vṛṣaḥ kavikalpa° .

woman

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śarada 1) am Ende eines adv. comp. (-śaradam) = śarad “Herbst” P. 5, 4,

107. VOP. 6, 62. Vgl. upaśaradam. — 2) f. ā a) śarad “Herbst” TRIK. 1, 1,

110. HALĀY. 1, 113. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. HIOUEN-THSANG 1, 62 (es

könnte auch śarad gemeint sein). “Jahr” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b) N. pr.

eines Frauenzimmers RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1825.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaradanta (śarad + anta) m. “Ende des Herbstes, Winter” RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaradambudhara śarad-ambudhara, m. autumnal cloud.

śaradā

(1) Autumn.

(2) A year.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaradā śarad-ā, f. N..

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śaradā strī, vatsaraḥ . śaradṛtuḥ . iti śabdaratnāvalī ..

Commentary (also “-vyākhyā”).

autumnal

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śaradija a. Autumnal.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaradija (śa-, loc. von śarad, + 1. ja) adj. (f. ā) “im Herbst entstehend, –

erscheinend, herbstlich” P. 6, 3, 15. indu KATHĀS. 45, 409. śītaraśmi

Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 12, Śl. 44. gharma UTTARAR. 39, 21

(53, 18). nadyaḥ RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śaradija śarad + i-ja, adj. Produced in autumn, Utt. Rāmac. 3, 18.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaradija a. born or produced in autumn, autumnal.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaradija śaradi-ja, a. produced in autumn, autumnal.

seasons)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaradudāśaya (śarad + u-) m. “ein im Herbst entstehender Teich” BHĀG.

P. 10, 31, 2.

season”, N. of wk.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaradgata (śarad + gata) adj. “im Herbst erscheinend, herbstlich”:

megha R. 2, 44, 25.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaradghana śarad-ghana, m. autumnal cloud;

-dhima-ruci, m. autumnal moon;

-vadhū, f. autumn as a woman.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaraddhimaruci (śarad + hi-) m. “Herbstmond” Spr. (II) 3123.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaraddhrada (śarad + hrada) adj. “ein Teich im Herbst” BHĀG. P. 4, 7,

10.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaradvadhū f. autumn conceived as a woman.

Mannes P. 4, 1, 102. eines Sohnes oder entfernteren Nachkommen des

Gotama MBH. 1, 2435. 5072. 7116. HARIV. 454. 1784 (śāradvata die

neuere Ausg.). VP. 454. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 49,b,40. BHĀG. P.1,19,9.9,21,35.

— Vgl. śāradvata.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śaradvant śarad + vant, m. A proper name, Johns. Sel. 59, 176.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaradvant a. advanced in years (autumns), aged.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaradvihāra (śarad + vi-) m. “Herbstvergnügen, – Belustigung” Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 145,a,40.

autumn

autumnal cloud)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaranmegha (śarad + megha) m. “eine herbstliche Wolke” Spr. (II) 3462.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaranmegha m. an autumnal cloud.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaranmegha śaran-megha, m. autumnal cloud: -vat, ad. like clouds in

autumn.

of autumn, Hit. d. 91.

autumn, autumnal, mature &c. &c.

śārada mf (“ī”, or “śāradī”) n. (prob.) that which offers a shelter in

autumn (against the overflowings of rivers; applied to “puras” or

“castles”; others “rich in years”, “old”)

mf (“ī”, or “śāradī”) n. new, recent (perhaps “salilaṁ śāradam”; cf.

also “rajju-śārada” and “dṛṣac-chārada”)

mf (“ī”, or “śāradī”) n. modest, shy, diffident

śārada m. a year

śārada m. a cloud

śārada m. N. of various plants (a yellow kind of Phaseolus Mungo;

Mimusops Elengi &c.)

śārada m. autumnal sickness

śārada m. autumnal sunshine

śārada m. N. of a teacher of Yoga (v.l. “śābara”)

śārada mf (“ī”, or “śāradī”) n. (“ā”) f. see below

śārada mf (“ī”, or “śāradī”) n. (“ī”) f. (only the day of full moon in the

month Kārttika (or āśvina)

śārada m. Jussiaea Repens

śārada m. Alstonia Scholaris

śārada n. corn, grain, fruit (as ripening in autumn)

śārada n. the white lotus

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śārada a. [śaradi bhavaṁ aṇ]

(1) Belonging to autumn, autumnal; (the f. is śāradī in this sense);

vimalaśāradacaṁdiracaṁdrikā Bv. 1. 113; R. 10. 9; Ms. 6. 11; meghaḥ

śārada eva kāśaghavalaḥ pānīyariktodaraḥ Subhāṣ.

(2) Annual.

(3) New, recent.

(4) Young, fresh.

(5) Modest, shy, bashful.

(7) Diffident, not bold. –daḥ

(1) A year.

(2) An autumnal sickness.

(3) Autumnal sunshine.

(4) A kind of kidney-bean.

(5) The Bakula tree. –dī The full-moon day in the month of Kartika.

–daṁ

(1) Corn, grain.

(2) The white lotus. –dā

(1) A kind of Vīṇā or lute.

(2) N. of Durgā.

(3) Of Sarasvatī; (śaratkāle purā yasmānnavamyāṁ bodhitā suraiḥ .

śāradā sā samākhyātā pīṁṭhe loke ca nāmataḥ).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śārada (von śarad) 1) adj. (f. śāradī; śāradī VS. 13, 57). a) “herbstlich, im

Herbst erscheinend, – reifend u.s.w.” P. 5, 1, 96 (= tatra dīyate). 6, 2, 9.

H. an. 3, 339. fg. MED. d. 40. AV. 5, 22, 13. 15, 4, 4. ŚAT. BR. 4, 3, 1, 17.

10, 2, 5, 12. TS. 7, 5, 14, 1. AIT. BR. 4, 26. SUŚR. 1, 21, 6. Mond MBH. 3,

2575. R. 1, 15, 19. 5, 67, 13. KATHĀS. 47, 107. DHŪRTAS. 91, 15.

nakṣatravīthī MBH. 13, 521. Wolke 6, 5507. 7, 5895. R. 1, 44, 24. 4, 49,

22. 5, 9, 53. Regen 3, 32, 4. Tag RAGH. 10, 9. Nacht MBH. 3, 12554. R. 2,

101, 12 (110, 10 GORR.). 6, 19, 28. Himmel MBH. 7, 832. 6435. R. 2, 78,

18 (77, 18 GORR.). R. GORR. 2, 2, 22. dyaurivāvyaktaśāradī HARIV.

3723. 7079. Monat (māṁsa ed. Calc. māsa ed. Bomb.) MBH. 13, 5670.

roga, ātapa P. 4, 3, 13. śālayaḥ 43, Schol. utpala MBH. 2, 2174. 4, 256.

indīvara BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 28. sasya, dhānya VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 21. 27. 90.

vāsantaśāradairmunyannaiḥ M. 6, 11. — b) “alt”: puraḥ ṚV. 1, 131, 4.

174, 2. 6, 20, 10. — c) “frisch” AK. 3, 4, 16, 97. H. an. MED. hierher

vielleicht salila Spr. (II) 622; vgl. dṛṣacchārada, rajju-. — d) “schüchtern,

bescheiden” AK. H. 433. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 220. — 2) m. a) “Jahr” H.

ś. 25. H. an. MED. — b) “Wolke” TRIK. 3, 3, 211. — c) “gelb blühender

Phaseolus Mungo” (mudga) “Lin.” H. 1172. H. an. “Mimusops Elengi Lin.”

(bakula) und = kāsa RĀJAN. im ŚHDR. “Alstonia scholaris” RATNAM.

191. — d) N. pr. eines Joga-Lehrers Verz. d. B. H. 196,5. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

233,b, No. 566. śābara HALL 16. — 3) f. ā a) “eine Art Laute” ŚABDAR. im

ŚKDR. — b) Bez. zweier Pflanzen, = brāhmī und sārivā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

— c) ein N. der Sarasvatī, der Göttin der Rede, TRIK. 1, 1, 27. ŚUK. in LA.

(III) 32, 5. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 210, “b”, No. 497. 219, “b”, 3. 249, “b”, 40.

259, “a”, 6. śaratkāle purā yasmānnavamyāṁ bodhitā suraiḥ. śāradā sā

samākhyātā pīṭhe loke ca nāmataḥ.. TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR. sāradā

(vielleicht richtiger, d. i. sāra + dā; die Form auf ā von śārada ist

überhaupt verdächtig) RĀJA-TAR. 1, 37. 4, 325. -stotra Verz. d. Pet.

Hdschr. 66. — d) ein N. der Durgā ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. BHĀG. P. 10, 2, 12.

— e) N. pr. einer Tochter des Priesters Devaratha Verz. d. Oxf. H.

74,b,35. — f) = śāradātilaka Verz. d. Oxf. H. 95,b,18. 104,a,25. 292,b,21.

-ṭīkā 104, “a”, 25. fg. — 4) f. ī a) “eine Vollmondsnacht im Herbst” TRIK.

1, 1, 107. — b) “Alstonia scholaris” AK. 2, 4, 2, 3. TRIK. 3, 3, 112. H. an.

MED. “Jussiaea repens Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 29. TRIK. H. an. MED. — 5) n. a)

“Herbstkorn” MED. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 9, 42. 25, 2. 40,

14. 41, 3. 95, 4. — b) “eine weisse Lotusblüthe” (śvetakamala) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. — Vgl. tattva-, dṛṣacchārada, pūrva-, rajju-, vi-, viśva-, śata-.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śārada śārada, i. e. śarad + a,

I. adj., f. dī.

1. Autumnal, Nal. 13, 44; Lass. 91, 15.

2. Produced or growing in the autumn, Man. 6, 11.

3. New.

II. m.

1. Grain or rice ripening in the autumn.

2. A sort of kidney bean.

3. Autumnal sickness.

4. Autumnal sunshine.

5. A year.

III. f. dā.

1. Sarasvatī, Lass. 38, 7.

2. A title of Durgā.

3. A sort of guitar.

IV. f. dī, The day of full moon in the month kārttika.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śārada f. śāradī or śāradī autumnal.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śārada śārad-a, a. (f. śāradi, VS. ī) autumnal; fresh (C., rare); n. autumn

grain (C., rare): ā, f. N. of Sarasvati, goddess of speech;

-īna, -īya, a. autumnal.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śārada na° śaradi bhavam–ṛtvaṇ . 1 śvetapadme rājani° . 2 kāse 3 bakule

4 harinmudge ca pu° rājani° . 5 śaradbhavamātre tri° striyāṁ ṅīp .

śāradaṁ śvetapadmamastyasyāḥ ac . 5 sarasvatyāṁ strī trikā° . 7 nūtane

8 apratibhe tri° medi° . 9śālīne tri° viśvaḥ . 10 durgāyāṁ strī ṭāp

śāratkāle purā yasmāt navamyāṁ bodhitā suraiḥ . śāradā sā samākhyātā

pīṭhe loke ca nāmataḥ ti° ta° . 11 vānarabhede śabdara° . 12

toyapippalyāṁ 13 saptacchade strī medi° ṅīp evaṁ 14

kojāgarapurṇimāyāṁ strī śabdaratnā° śaratkālone pūjādau tri° striyāṁ

ṅīp . śāradī caṇḍikāpūjā trividhā parikīrtitā . sāttvikī rājasī caiva tāmasī

ceti tāṁ śṛṇu bhaviṣyapu° .

“śrāddha, ātapa, roga”)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śāradika (von śarad) adj. “herbstlich” (angeblich nur in best.

Verbindungen): śrāddha P. 4, 3, 12. roga, ātapa 13. puṣpa HARIV. 3849.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śāradika na° śaradi bhavaṁ śrāddhaṁ rogo vā ṭhañ . śaratkāle bhave 1

śrāddhe 2tatkālaje roge pu0

śāradikaḥ

(1) Autumnal sickness.

(2) Autumnal sunshine or heat. –kaṁ An autumnal or annual Srāddha.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śāradikaḥ puṁ, (śarad + vibhāṣā rogātapayoḥ . 4 . 3 . 13 . iti ṭhañ .)

rogaḥ . ātapaḥ . iti siddhāntakaumudī ..

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śāradīna a. the same.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śāradīya a. Autumnal.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śāradīya (wie eben) adj. “herbstlich, im Herbst stattfindend”: mahāpūjā

TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pañca-.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śāradīya a. the same.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śāradīya tri° śaradi bhavaḥ chaṇ . 1 śaratkāle kartavye utsavādau

tathābhūtāyāṁ durgāpūjāyāṁ strī adūre jagadambāyāḥ śāradīyo

mahotsavaḥ . śāradīyā mahāpūjā catuḥkarmamayo śubhā ti° ta° .

(of Durgā)

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śāradīyamahāpūjā strī, (śāradīyā mahāpūjā .) śaratkālīnadurgāmahāpūjā

. yathā —

śāradīyā mahāpūjā catuḥkarmamayī śubhā .

tāṁ tithitrayamāsādya kuryāt bhaktyā vidhānataḥ .. iti tithyāditattvam

.. api ca .

hate ghore mahāvīre surāsurabhayaṅkare .

devīmupāsakā devāḥ prabhutā rākṣasāstathā ..

sametāḥ sarvadevāste devīṁ bhaktyā tutoṣire .

valiñca dadyurbhūtānāṁ mahiṣājāmiṣeṇa ca ..

evaṁ tasmin dine vatsa pretabhūtasamākulam .

kṛtavān sarvadevaśca pūjāśca śāśvatīrmahān ..

jaladānte’śvine māsi mahiṣārinivarhiṇīm .

devīṁ saṁpūjayitvā tu aṣṭamīṣvardharātriṣu ..

ye ghātayanti sadā bhaktyā te bhavanti mahābalāḥ .

baliñca ye prayacchanti sarvabhūtavināśanam ..

teṣāntu tuṣyate devī yāvat kalpantu śāṅkaram .

krīḍate vividhairbhogairdevaloke sudurlabhe ..

yāvadbhūrvāyurākāśaṁ jalaṁ vahniśaśigrahāḥ .

tāvacca caṇḍikāpūjā bhaviṣyati sadā bhuvi ..

prāvṛṭkāle viśeṣeṇa āśvine hyaṣṭamīṣu ca .

mahāśabdo navamyāñca loke khyātiṁ gamiṣyati ..

indra uvāca .

āśvine ghātite ghore navamī prativatsaram .

śrotumicchāmyahaṁ tāta upavāmavratādikam ..

mahāvrataṁ mahāpuṇyaṁ śaṅkarādyairanuṣṭhitam .

kartavyaṁ devarājendra devībhaktisamanvitaiḥ ..

kanyāsaṁsthe ravau śakra śuklāmārabhya nandikām .

apāśī tvatha vaikāśī naktāśī vātha vāyvadaḥ ..

prātaḥsnāyī jitadvandbaḥ trikālaṁ śivapūjakaḥ .

japahomasamāyuktaḥ kanyakāṁ bhojayet sadā ..

aṣṭamyāṁ navagehāni dārujāni śubhāni ca .

evaṁ vā cittabhāvena kārayet surasattama ..

tasmin devī prakartavyā haimī vā rājatī ca vā .

mṛdvārkṣī lavanopetā khaḍge śūle’tha pūjayet ..

sarvopahārasampanno vastraratnaphalādibhiḥ .

kārayedrathadolādīn pūjāñca validaivakīm ..

puṣpādidroṇavilvāmrajātīpunnāgacampakaiḥ .

vicitrāṁ kārayet pūjāṁ aṣṭamyāmupavāsayet ..

durgāgrato japenmantramekacittaḥ subhāvitaḥ .

tadardhayāminīśeṣe vijayārthe nṛpottamaiḥ ..

pañcābdaṁ lakṣaṇopetaṁ gandhadhūpasragarcitam .

vidhivata kāli kālīti japtvā khaḍgena ghātayet ..

tasyotthaṁ rudhiraṁ māṁsaṁ gṛhītvā pūtanādiṣu .

nairṛtāya pradātavyā mahākauśikamantritam ..

tasyāgrato nṛpaḥ snāyācchakraṁ kṛtvā tu piṣṭajam .

khaḍgena ghātayitvā tu dadyāt skandaviśākhayoḥ .. tato devīṁ

snāpayet prājñaḥ kṣīrasarpirjalādibhiḥ .

kuṅkumāgurukarpūracandanaiścārudhūpakaiḥ .. haimāni puṣparatnāni

vāsāṁsi svāhatāni ca . nivedyaṁ suprabhūtantu deyaṁ devyāḥ

subhāvitaiḥ .. aśvamedhamavāpnoti bhaktimān surasattama .

mahānavamyāṁ pūjeyaṁ sarvakāmapradāyikā .. sarveṣu sarvavarṇeṣu

tava bhaktyā prakīrtitā . kṛtvāpnoti yaśo rājyaṁ puttrāyurdhanasampadaḥ

.. iti devīpurāṇe 29 . 30 adhyāyāt saṅkalitaṁ na tu sakramakam ..

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śāradya (wie eben) adj. dass.; n. “Herbstkorn” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 27, 1.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śāradya n. autumn-corn.

autumnal Durgā-pūjā

mf (“ī”) n. relating to or endowed with the quality Sattva (i.e. “purity”

or “goodness”), pure, true, genuine, honest, good, virtuous (also applied

to partic. Purāṇas which exalt Viṣṇu 513) &c. internal, caused by

internal feeling or sentiment

mf (“ī”) n. natural, not artificial, unaffected (as style)

sāttvika m. a state of body caused by some natural emotion (constituting

a class of 8 Bhāvas holding a middle place between the Sthāyi- and

Vyabhicāri-bhavas, viz. “stambha, sveda, romāṇca, svara-vikāra, vepathu,

varṇavikāra, aśru, pralaya”, qq. vv.)

sāttvika m. N. of Brahmā

sāttvika m. of the eighth creation by Prajā-pati

sāttvika mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. N. of Durgā

sāttvika m. a partic. kind of Pūjā practised by the worshippers of Durgā

sāttvika m. (scil. “tuṣṭi”) N. of one of the five kinds of external

acquiescence (in Sāṁkhya)

sāttvika m. an autumn night

sāttvika n. an offering or oblation (without pouring water)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

sāttvika a. (kī f.) [sattvaguṇena tatkāryeṇa manasā vā nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ]

(1) Real, essential.

(2) True, genuine, natural.

(3) Honest, sincere, good.

(4) Virtuous, amiable.

(5) Vigorous.

(6) Endowed with the quality Sattva (goodness).

(7) Belonging to or derived from the Sattva quality; ye caiva sāttvikā

bhāvāḥ Bg. 7. 12, 14. 16.

(8) Caused by internal feeling or sentiment (as of love), internal;

tadbhūrisāttvikavikāramapāstadhairyamācāryakaṁ vijayi

mānmathamāvirāsīt Mal. 1. 26. –kaḥ

(1) An external indication of (internal) feeling or emotion, one of the

kinds of Bhāvas in poetry; (these are eight: –staṁbhaḥ svedo’tha

romāṁcaḥ svarabhaṁgo’tha vepathuḥ . vaivarṇyamaśru pralaya ityaṣṭau

sāttvikāḥ smṛtāḥ .. see S. D. 164 also.

(2) A Brāhmaṇa.

(3) N. of Brahman. –kī N. of Durga.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sāttvika (von sattva) 1) adj. (f. ī) a) “charaktervoll”: Personen M. 3, 263.

MBH. 5, 1729. 13, 4895. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 2, S. 3, Z. 5 v. u. KATHĀS. 35,

39. — b) “zur Qualität” sattva “in Beziehung stehend, von ihr

vorzugsweise beherrscht u.s.w.” MAITRJUP. 5, 2. M. 12, 31. 40. 48. fgg.

MBH. 12, 7097. BHAG. 7, 12. 14, 16. SUŚR. 1, 192, 4. 312, 18. 335, 15.

KAP. 2, 18. SĀṁKHYAK. 23. 25. Spr. (II) 2741. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 8.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 14, “a”, No. 1. 56, “b”, 10. 80, “a”, 25. 81, “a”, 45. 82,

“b”, 17. MĀRK. P. 45, 37. BHĀG. P. 3, 29, 10. TATTVAS. 19. VEDĀNTAS.

(Allah.) No. 46. SARVADARŚANAS. 148, 6. WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 12. fg.

252. — c) in der Rhetorik und Dramatik so v. a. “äusserlich in

entsprechender Weise hervortretend” SĀH. D. 164. 208.274. 22, 13. 37,

19. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 200, “a”, 2. 213, “a”, 1. v. u. AK. 1, 1, 7, 16. H. 283.

295. 307. MĀLATĪM. 16, 3. — 2) m. ein N. Brahman’s H. 211. — 3) f. ī ein

N. der Durgā ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

sāttvika sāttvika, i. e. sattva + ika,

I. adj.

1. Endowed with the quality sattva, i. e. the best of qualities, Man. 3,

263.

2. Endowed with goodness, Man. 12, 40.

3. Relating, belonging to, or proceeding from, that quality, Bhag. 7,

12; Man. 12, 31.

4. Good, honest, true, Hit. i. d. 15, M. M.; sincere, Mālat. 16, 3.

II. m. Brahman.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sāttvika f. ī relating to or endowed with the quality of goodness (ph.);

courageous, energetic, virtuous, brave.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sāttvika sāttv-ika, a. (ī) spirited, vigorous (person); relating to,

dominated by etc. the quality of Sattva; indicating an inward feeling or

sentiment (rh., dr.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sāttvika pu° sattvāt sattvaguṇapradhānāt viṣṇorbhavati ṭhañ . 1

caturmukhe brahmaṇi hemaca° . tasya viṣṇunābhikamalajatvāt tathātvam

. sattvameva sāttvamastyasya ṭhan . 2 viṣṇau . sattvaguṇena tatkāryeṇa

manasā vā nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ . 3 sattvaguṇajāte 4

sattvapradhānamanoviśeṣajāte ca . 5 śṛṅgārādirasānuguṇe bhāvabhede

sā° da° uktāḥ strīṇāmalaṅkārā aṅgajāśca svabhāvajāḥ . tadrūpāḥ sāttvikā

bhāvāstathā ceṣṭāḥ parā api . vikārāḥ sattvasambhūtāḥ sāttvikāḥ

parikīrtitāḥ . sattvamātrodbhavatvātte bhinnā apyanubhāvataḥ .

stambhaḥ svedo’tha romāñcaḥ svarabhaṅgo’tha vepathuḥ .

vaivarṇyamaśru pralaya ityaṣṭau sāttvikā smṛtāḥ . eteṣāṁ lakṣaṇāni

tattacchabde dṛśyāni . strīṇāṁ yauvane sattvajāte 6 alaṅkārabhede sā°

da° yauvane sattvajāstāsāmaṣṭāviṁśatisaṁkhyakāḥ . alaṅkāraśabde 408

pṛ° dṛśyam . 7 sattvapradhāne tri° . 8 devīpūjābhede strī śāradī

caṇḍikāpūjā trvidhā parikīrtitā . sāttviko rājasī caiva tāmasī cati tāṁ śṛṇu

. sāttviko japayajñaiśca naivedyaiśca nirāmiṣaiḥ ti° ta° . 9 bhāvabhede

pu° sattvotkaṭe manasi ye prabhavanti bhāvāste sāttvikā iti

vidurmunipuṅgavāstu sarvāna° . 10 sattvapradhāne purāṇabhede

vaiṣṇavaṁ nāradīyañca tathā bhāgavataṁ śubham . gāruḍañca tathā

pādmaṁ vārāhaṁ śubhadarśane! . sāttvikāni purāṇāni vijñeyāni śubhāni

vai . sātvikeṣu purāṇeṣu viṣṇumāhātmyavarṇanam upapurāṇaśabde

dṛśyam . 11 smṛtibhede strī vāsiṣṭhaṁ caiva hārītaṁ vyāsaṁ pārāśaraṁ

tathā . bhāradvājaṁ kāśyapañca sāttvikyo muktidāḥ śubhāḥ padmapu°

utta° 43 a° . 12 durgāyāṁ strī ṅīp . 13 gītokteṣu śraddhādibhedeṣu

yathāyathaṁ tri° yathā sattvānurūpā sarvasya śraddhā bhavati bhārata! .

śraddhāma yo’yaṁ puruṣo yo yacchraddhaḥ sa eva saḥ . yajante sāttvikā

devān (śraddhā) āhārastvapi sarvasya trividho bhavati priyaḥ .

yajñastapastathā dānaṁ teṣāṁ bhedamimaṁ śṛṇu ityupakrame

āyuḥsattvabalārogyasukhaprītivivardhanāḥ . rasyāḥ snigdhāḥ sthirā hṛdyā

āhārāḥ sāttvika priyāḥ (āhāraḥ) aphalākāṅkṣibhiryajño vidhidṛṣṭo ya ijyate

. yaṣṭavyameveti manaḥ samādhāya sa sāttvikaḥ (yajñaḥ) śraddhayā

parayā taptaṁ tapastattrividhaṁ naraiḥ . aphalākāṅkṣibhiryuktaiḥ

sāttvikaṁ paricakṣate (kāyikādi trividhaṁ tapaḥ) dātavyamiti yaddānaṁ

dīyate’nupakāriṇe . deśe kāle ca pātre ca taddānaṁ sāttvikaṁ matam

(dānam) sarvabhūteṣu yenaikaṁ bhāvamavyayamīkṣate . avibhaktaṁ

vibhakteṣu tajjñānaṁ viddhi sāttvikam (jñānam) niyataṁ

saṅgarahitamarāgadveṣataḥ kṛtam . aphalaprepsunā karma yattat

sāttvikamucyate (karma) muktasaṅgo’nahaṁvādī dhṛtyutsāhasamanvitaḥ

. siddhyasiddhyornirvikāraḥ kartā sā ttvika ucyate (kartā) pravṛttiṁ ca

nivṛttiṁ ca kāryākārye bhayābhaye . bandhaṁ mokṣaṁ ca yā vetti

buddhiḥ sā pārtha! sāttvikī (buddhiḥ) dhṛtyā yayā dhārayate manaḥ

prāṇendriyakriyāḥ . yogenāvyabhicāriṇyā dhṛtiḥ sā pārtha! sāttvikī (dhṛtiḥ)

yattadagre viṣamiva pariṇābhe’mṛtopamam . tat sukhaṁ sāttvikaṁ

proktamātmabuddhiprasādajam (sukham) kāryamityeva yat karma niyata

kurute’rjuna! . saṅgaṁ tyaktvāphalaṁ caiva sa tyāgaḥ sāttviko mataḥ

(tyāgaḥ) . tatra sāttvikāhārasya cittaśuddhau hetutvaṁ chāndo° uktaṁ

yathā āhāraśuddhau satavaśuddhiḥ sattvaśuddhau dhruvā smṛtiḥ .

sattvaṁ manaḥ . annamayaṁ hi saumya! manaḥ ityādinā tasya

annamayatvasya tatroktestathātvam . sākhyamatāsaddhe

sattvapradhāne 14 mahattattave 15 ahaṅkāratattave ca sāttivakī

rājasaścaiva tāmasaśca tridhā mahān sāṁ° pra° dhṛtavākyam .

sāttvikamekādaśakaṁ pravartate vaikṛtādahaṅkārāt sāṁ° sū°

ekādaśānāṁ pūraṇamekādaśakaṁ manaḥ ṣoḍaśātmagaṇamadhye

sāttivakam . atastadvaikṛtāt sāttivakāhaṅkārājjāyata ityarthaḥ .

vaikārikastaijasaśca tāmasaścetyahaṁ tridhā .

ahantattavādvikurvāṇānmano vekārikādabhūt . vaikārikāśca ye devā

arthābhivyañjanaṁ yataḥ sā° pra° dha° vākyam . 16 adhyavasāyādau ca

adhyavasāyo buddhirdhamo jñānaṁ virāga aiśvaryam .

sāttivakametadrūpaṁ tāmasamasmādviparyastam sāṁ° kā° . sāttvika

ekādaśakaḥ pravartate vaikṛtādahaṅkārāt . bhūtādestanmātraḥ sa

tāmasastaijasādubhayam sāṁ° kā° prakāśalāghavābhyāmekādaśaka

indriyagaṇaḥ sāttviko vaikṛtāt sāttivakādahaṅkārāt pravartate tattavakau°

.

mf (“ī”) n. cracked, split

mf (“ī”) n. having five hair-tufts on the head

sāraṇa m. dysentery, diarrhoea

sāraṇa m. wind during the autumn

sāraṇa m. Paederia Foetida

sāraṇa m. Spondias Mangifera.

sāraṇa m. N. of a brother of Kṛiṣṇa

sāraṇa m. of one of Rāvaṇa’s ministers (sent as ambissad or to Rāma)

sāraṇa mf (“ī”) n. (“ā”) f. stretching out, extension (only ifc.)

sāraṇa m. (ifc. f. “ā”) producing a sound, striking a note on (loc.)

sāraṇa m. a partic. process to which mineral substances (esp.

quicksilver) are subjected (two others being given called “ṛtu-s-” and

“prati-sāraṇā; -ṇā-traya” n. “the three Sāraṇā processes”)

sāraṇa mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. see below

sāraṇa n. leading home

sāraṇa n. buttermilk (one fourth part of which is water)

sāraṇa n. a kind of perfume

sāraṇa “sāraṇi” &c. see col.1.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

sāraṇa a. (ṇī f.) Causing to go or flow. –ṇaḥ

(1) Dysentery.

(2) The hog-plum. –ṇaṁ A kind of perfume.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sāraṇa 1) (vom caus. von sar) adj. (f. ī) “laxativ” RĀJAN. 5, 120. 6, 238.

— 2) m. a) = atīsāra “Durchfall” H. an. 3, 229. MED. ṇ. 83. — b) “Paederia

foetida Lin.” (vgl. saraṇā) DHAR. im ŚKDR. “Spondias mangifera”

ŚABDAC. ebend. — c) N. pr. a) eines Bruders des Kṛṣṇa MBH. 1, 7915.

7922. 2, 125. 1274. 3, 736. HARIV. 1951. 6626. 8057. 8095. 8401. VP.

439. MĀRK. P. 1, 14, 28. 9, 24, 45. hier und da fälschlich śāraṇa

geschrieben. — b) eines Ministers des Rāvaṇa H. an. MED. R. 5, 12, 10. 6,

1, 1. 18, 19. — 3) f. ā nom. act. vom caus. von sar. a) “das Ausstrecken”:

karāvābaddhasāraṇau KATHĀS. 6, 57. — b) “das Erklingenlassen eines

Tones”: tasyāṁ (vallakyāṁ) ca sāraṇāṁ eṣa dadat KATHĀS. 49, 18.

vismṛtasvarasāraṇā adj. 51, 8. — c) “eine bestimmte mit dem Quecksilber

vorgenommene Operation” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,a,14. 26.

SARVADARŚANAS. 100,6. — 4) f. ī s. u. sāraṇi. — 5) n. a) “Buttermilch

(abführend”) H. ś. 99. — b) “ein best. Geruch” DHAR. im ŚKDR. — Vgl.

ṛtu-, gandha-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

sāraṇa 1 I

sāraṇa 2 II A minister of Rāvaṇa. (For details see the word

Śukasāraṇas).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

sāraṇa sāraṇa, i. e. sṛ, Caus., + ana, m. Dysentery.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sāraṇa n. causing to go, dismissing.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sāraṇa sār-aṇa, n. accompanying (-°);

ā, f. stretching out (only -° a.); striking a note on (lc.);

ī, f. stream, canal;

ī, f. stream of (blood, -°).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sāraṇa na° sṛ–ṇica–lyu . 1 gandhadravye dharaṇiḥ . 2 atīsāraroge 3

rāvaṇasacivabhede ca hemaca° . 4 bhadrabalāyāṁ dharaṇiḥ 5 āmrātake

śabdaca° .